Dolibarr ERP CRM Wiki - User contributions [en]

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Membership management

2021-03-12T14:16:07Z

Pradeepv:

{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

===='''Storyboard for Membership Module'''====
'''Video Title:''' Membership Management in Dolibarr

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video,
we will look at how to use the “Members” module for managing foundation members in Dolibarr.
|Show the standard intro animation with video title “Membership Management in Dolibarr”.
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Members" from the menu Home - Setup - Modules.
|Enable the Members module.
|-
|Grant permission on the “Members” module for your users.
For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions".
|Grant permissions on the “Members” module.
|-
|'''Creating a Member'''
|
|-
|The Members module can be used to manage the members of a foundation and their subscription.
Click on the appropriate menu link to add a new member.
|From the Home dashboard, click on the Members menu. Click on New Member.
|-
|Provide a username and password.
|Enter a username and password
|-
|Choose a member type and the nature of the member.
|Choose a member type
|-
|Note that you can create new member types from the Member types menu.
Specify if subscription is required and if voting is allowed. Duration defines the membership duration.
|Click on Member types. Click on New and show the Member type creation screen.
|-
|Coming back to the member creation process, provide personal details such as the member’s name and address.
Click on the button to create the member.
|Transition back to Create Member screen.
|-
|Once created, the member is in the Draft status. Click on the “Validate” button to validate the member.
The status now changes to “Validated and awaiting subscription”.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|'''Adding a Subscription for the Member'''
|
|-
|Click on the “Subscriptions” tab and click on the appropriate button to create a subscription.
Choose the subscription start and end dates and enter the subscription amount. Choose the appropriate complementary action. Note that if the member is linked to a third party, the invoice options can be chosen for the subscription transaction. Otherwise, you can enter the relevant payment information to capture the payment details for the subscription transaction.
|-
|New members can also self-register and self-subscribe using the public self-subscription page.
If you have enabled an online payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can setup the application so that the user will be able to make the subscription payment just after the registration. The member and the subscription will be automatically recorded and the user will receive an email. The invoice can also be automatically attached to the email.
|Go on the public page (url is provided into setup of the module Member) and send a subscription.
|-
|'''Module Features'''
|
|-
|You can upload any files for a particular member by using the appropriate menu.
|Click Upload Files tab and upload a file.
|-
|The Events and Agenda tab captures all the events related to the member.
|Click the tab and show the events.
|-
|If you wish to terminate the member, click on the appropriate button.
|Show clicking Terminate and show the resulting popup.
|-
|Click on the “List” menu to list all the members.
The list views are also available based on the member status such as “Draft”, “Validated”, “Up to date”, “Out of date” and “Terminated”.
|Show the list views.
|-
|“Statistics” provides a birds-eye-view of all members and member subscriptions.
|Show Statistics with filtering.
|-
|You can generate business cards for all members or specific members from the appropriate menu.
Choose a format and click on the button to generate the appropriate business cards in the PDF format, which can them be sent for printing.
|Click and show the Members business cards menu.
|-
|Use the “Tags” menu to categorize members based on tags.
You can create your own custom tags and map members to those tags.
|Click the tags menu. Click on a tag to show the members listed for that tag.
|-
|'''Renewal of subscription'''
|
|-
|Enable the module Scheduled Task, so that an automated task will be run every day to send email reminders to members whose subscription has expired and needs to be renewed.
|Enable the module and go into home setup - administration - scheduled task to show the task.
|-
|If you have enabled a payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can also add a payment link by editing the email template configured for the renewal reminder email.
So, the member will be able to make the payment by clicking on the link in the email, and the subscription and invoice will be automatically generated and recorded.
|Go into templates of email in home - tools - email templates) and open the template "SendingReminderForExpiredSubscription" and show that keyword __ONLINE_PAYMENT_TEXT_AND_URL__
that is inside the email template.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module setup such as email templates and the link for the public self-registration and self-subscription page.
You can also add your own custom fields and define default values or mandatory fields.
|Show creating a custom field and show it available in the creation page.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Standard ending with text and animation.
|}

'''Translation in Spanish'''

'''Video Title:''' Gestión de Suscripciones en Dolibarr

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over in English'''
|'''Voice Over in Translated Language'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the “Members” module for managing foundation members in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenido a este videotutorial sobre el sistema ERP y CRM Dolibarr. En este vídeo, veremos cómo utilizar el módulo "Miembros" para gestionar los miembros de la organización en Dolibarr.
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|'''Requisitos Previos'''
|-
|Activate the module "Members" from the menu Home - Setup - Modules.
|Activar el módulo "Miembros " desde el menú Inicio - Configuración - Módulos.
|-
|Grant permission on the “Members” module for your users.

For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions".
|Conceda permisos en el módulo "Miembros" a sus usuarios.

Para obtener información más avanzada sobre cómo configurar los permisos a los usuarios, puede ver nuestro vídeo "Usuarios, Grupos y Permisos".
|-
|'''Creating a Member'''
|'''Crear un Miembro'''
|-
|The Members module can be used to manage the members of a foundation and their subscription.
|El módulo "Miembros" puede utilizarse para gestionar los miembros de una organización y su suscripción.
|-
|Click on the appropriate menu link to add a new member.
|Haga clic en el enlace correspondiente del menú para añadir un nuevo miembro.
|-
|Provide a username and password.
|Indique un nombre de usuario y una contraseña.
|-
|Choose a member type and the nature of the member.
|Elija un tipo de miembro y la naturaleza del mismo.
|-
|Note that you can create new member types from the Member types menu.
|Tenga en cuenta que puede crear nuevos tipos de miembros desde el menú Tipos de Miembros.
|-
|Specify if subscription is required and if voting is allowed. Duration defines the membership duration.
|Especifique si la suscripción es obligatoria y si se permite votar. La duración define la duración de la suscripción.
|-
|Coming back to the member creation process, provide personal details such as the member’s name and address.

Click on the button to create the member.
|Volviendo al proceso de creación de miembros, proporcione datos personales como el nombre y la dirección del miembro.

Haga clic en el botón para crear el miembro.
|-
|Once created, the member is in the Draft status. Click on the “Validate” button to validate the member.
|Una vez creado, el miembro estará en estado Borrador. Haga clic en el botón "Validar" para validar el miembro.
|-
|The status now changes to “Validated and awaiting subscription”.
|El estado cambia a "Validado y en espera de suscripción".
|-
|'''Adding a Subscription for the Member'''
|'''Añadir una Suscripción para el Miembro'''
|-
|Click on the “Subscriptions” tab and click on the appropriate button to create a subscription.
|Haga clic en la pestaña "Suscripciones" y pulse el botón correspondiente para crear una suscripción.
|-
|Choose the subscription start and end dates and enter the subscription amount. Choose the appropriate complementary action.
|Elija las fechas de inicio y de finalización de la suscripción e introduzca el importe de la misma. Elija la acción adicional que corresponda.
|-
|Note that if the member is linked to a third party, the invoice options can be chosen for the subscription transaction.
|Tenga en cuenta que si el miembro está vinculado a un tercero, se pueden escoger las opciones de factura para la tramitación de la suscripción.
|-
|Otherwise, you can enter the relevant payment information to capture the payment details for the subscription transaction.
|De lo contrario, puede introducir la información de pago pertinente para registrar los datos de pago de la transacción de suscripción.
|-
|New members can also self-register and self-subscribe using the public self-subscription page.
|Los nuevos miembros también pueden autorregistrarse y autosuscribirse utilizando la página pública de autosuscripción.
|-
|If you have enabled an online payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can setup the application so that the user will be able to make the subscription payment just after the registration. The member and the subscription will be automatically recorded and the user will receive an email. The invoice can also be automatically attached to the email.
|Si ha habilitado un módulo de pago online como Stripe o Paypal, puede configurar la aplicación para que el usuario pueda realizar el pago de la suscripción justo después del registro. El miembro y la suscripción se registrarán automáticamente y el usuario recibirá un correo electrónico. También se puede adjuntar automáticamente la factura al correo electrónico.
|-
|'''Module Features'''
|'''Características del Módulo'''
|-
|You can upload any files for a particular member by using the appropriate menu.
|Puede cargar cualquier archivo para un miembro en particular utilizando el menú correspondiente.
|-
|The Events and Agenda tab captures all the events related to the member.
|La pestaña de Eventos y Agenda captura todos los eventos relacionados con el miembro.
|-
|If you wish to terminate the member, click on the appropriate button.
|Si desea dar de baja a un miembro, haga clic en el botón correspondiente.
|-
|Click on the “List” menu to list all the members.
|Haga clic en el menú "Lista" para enumerar todos los miembros.
|-
|The list views are also available based on the member status such as “Draft”, “Validated”, “Without Subscription”, “Up to date”, “Out of date” and “Terminated”.
|Las vistas de lista también están disponibles en función del estado del miembro, como "Borrador", "Validado", "Sin suscripción", "Al día", "Fuera de plazo" y "Cancelado".
|-
|“Statistics” provides a birds-eye-view of all members and member subscriptions.
|Las "Estadísticas" proporcionan una visión general de todos los miembros y de las suscripciones de los miembros.
|-
|You can generate business cards for all members or specific members from the appropriate menu.
|Puede generar tarjetas de visita para todos los miembros o para miembros específicos desde el menú correspondiente.
|-
|Choose a format and click on the button to generate the appropriate business cards in the PDF format, which can them be sent for printing.
|Elija un formato y haga clic en el botón para generar las tarjetas de visita correspondientes en formato PDF, que pueden enviarse a imprimir.
|-
|Use the “Tags” menu to categorize members based on tags.
|Utilice el menú "Etiquetas" para clasificar a los miembros en función de las etiquetas.
|-
|You can create your own custom tags and map members to those tags.
|Puede crear sus propias etiquetas personalizadas y asignar los miembros a esas etiquetas.
|-
|'''Renewal of subscription'''
|'''Renovación de la Suscripción'''
|-
|Enable the module Scheduled Task, so that an automated task will be run every day to send email reminders to members whose subscription has expired and needs to be renewed.
|Habilite el módulo Tarea Programada, para que se ejecute una tarea automatizada cada día con el fin de enviar recordatorios por correo electrónico a los miembros cuya suscripción ha caducado y debe ser renovada.
|-
|If you have enabled a payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can also add a payment link by editing the email template configured for the renewal reminder email.
|Si ha habilitado un módulo de pago como Stripe o Paypal, también puede añadir un enlace de pago editando la plantilla de correo electrónico configurada para el correo de recordatorio de renovación.
|-
|So, the member will be able to make the payment by clicking on the link in the email, and the subscription and invoice will be automatically generated and recorded.
|Así, el miembro podrá realizar el pago haciendo clic en el enlace del correo electrónico, y la suscripción y la factura se generarán y registrarán de forma automática.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module setup such as email templates and the link for the public self-registration and self-subscription page.
|También hay muchas otras características que se pueden habilitar desde la configuración del módulo, como las plantillas de correo electrónico y el enlace para la página pública de autorregistro y autosuscripción.
|-
|You can also add your own custom fields and define default values or mandatory fields.
|También puede añadir sus propios campos personalizados y definir valores por defecto o campos obligatorios.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Gracias por ver este video tutorial. Visite www.dolibarr.org para obtener más información.
|}

'''Translation in French'''

'''Video Title:''' Gestion des adhésions à Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over in English'''
|'''Voice Over in Translated Language'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the “Members” module for managing foundation members in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenue dans ce tutoriel vidéo sur le système ERP et CRM Dolibarr. Dans cette vidéo, nous allons voir comment utiliser le module "Membres" pour gérer les membres d'une fondation dans Dolibarr.
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|'''Pré-requis'''
|-
|Activate the module "Members" from the menu Home - Setup - Modules.
|Activer le module "Membres" à partir du menu Accueil - Paramètres - Modules.
|-
|Grant permission on the “Members” module for your users.

For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions".
|Accordez une autorisation sur le module "Membres" à vos utilisateurs.

Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration des autorisations pour les utilisateurs, vous pouvez regarder notre vidéo "Utilisateurs, groupes et autorisations".
|-
|'''Creating a Member'''
|'''Création d’un membre'''
|-
|The Members module can be used to manage the members of a foundation and their subscription.
|Le module "Membres" peut être utilisé pour gérer les membres d'une fondation et leur abonnement.
|-
|Click on the appropriate menu link to add a new member.
|Cliquez sur le lien du menu approprié pour ajouter un nouveau membre.
|-
|Provide a username and password.
|Fournissez un nom d'utilisateur et un mot de passe.
|-
|Choose a member type and the nature of the member.
|Choisissez un type de membre et la nature du membre.
|-
|Note that you can create new member types from the Member types menu.
|Notez que vous pouvez créer de nouveaux types de membres à partir du menu Types de membres.
|-
|Specify if subscription is required and if voting is allowed. Duration defines the membership duration.
|Indiquez si l'abonnement est obligatoire et si le vote est autorisé. La durée définit la durée de l'adhésion.
|-
|Coming back to the member creation process, provide personal details such as the member’s name and address.

Click on the button to create the member.
|Pour revenir au processus de création du membre, fournissez les détails personnels tels que le nom et l'adresse du membre.

Cliquez sur le bouton pour créer un membre.
|-
|Once created, the member is in the Draft status. Click on the “Validate” button to validate the member.
|Une fois créé, le membre est dans le statut "Brouillon". Cliquez sur le bouton "Valider" pour valider le membre.
|-
|The status now changes to “Validated and awaiting subscription”.
|Le statut passe alors à "Validé et en attente d'abonnement".
|-
|'''Adding a Subscription for the Member'''
|'''Ajout d'un abonnement pour le membre'''
|-
|Click on the “Subscriptions” tab and click on the appropriate button to create a subscription.
|Cliquez sur l'onglet "Abonnements" et cliquez sur le bouton approprié pour créer un abonnement.
|-
|Choose the subscription start and end dates and enter the subscription amount. Choose the appropriate complementary action.
|Choisissez les dates de début et de fin de l'abonnement et saisissez le montant de l'abonnement. Choisissez l'action complémentaire appropriée.
|-
|Note that if the member is linked to a third party, the invoice options can be chosen for the subscription transaction.
|Notez que si le membre est lié à un tiers, les options de facturation peuvent être choisies pour la transaction d'abonnement.
|-
|Otherwise, you can enter the relevant payment information to capture the payment details for the subscription transaction.
|Autrement, vous pouvez saisir les informations de paiement appropriées pour obtenir les détails du paiement pour la transaction d'abonnement.
|-
|New members can also self-register and self-subscribe using the public self-subscription page.
|Les nouveaux membres peuvent également s'auto-inscrire et s'auto-abonner en utilisant la page publique d'auto-abonnement.
|-
|If you have enabled an online payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can setup the application so that the user will be able to make the subscription payment just after the registration. The member and the subscription will be automatically recorded and the user will receive an email. The invoice can also be automatically attached to the email.
|Si vous avez activé un module de paiement en ligne comme Stripe ou Paypal, vous pouvez configurer l'application de sorte que l'utilisateur puisse effectuer le paiement de l'abonnement juste après l'inscription. Le membre et l'abonnement seront automatiquement enregistrés et l'utilisateur recevra un e-mail. La facture peut également être automatiquement jointe à l'e-mail.
|-
|'''Module Features'''
|'''Caractéristiques du module'''
|-
|You can upload any files for a particular member by using the appropriate menu.
|Vous pouvez télécharger n'importe quel fichier pour un membre particulier en utilisant le menu approprié.
|-
|The Events and Agenda tab captures all the events related to the member.
|L'onglet Événements et Agenda contient tous les événements liés au membre.
|-
|If you wish to terminate the member, click on the appropriate button.
|Si vous souhaitez résilier le membre, cliquez sur le bouton approprié.
|-
|Click on the “List” menu to list all the members.
|Cliquez sur le menu "Liste" pour lister tous les membres.
|-
|The list views are also available based on the member status such as “Draft”, “Validated”, “Without Subscription”, “Up to date”, “Out of date” and “Terminated”.
|Les aperçus de liste sont également disponibles en fonction du statut du membre, à savoir "Brouillon", "Validé", "Sans abonnement", "A jour", "Périmé" et "Résilié".
|-
|“Statistics” provides a birds-eye-view of all members and member subscriptions.
|La rubrique "Statistiques" offre une vue d'ensemble de tous les membres et de leurs abonnements.
|-
|You can generate business cards for all members or specific members from the appropriate menu.
|Vous pouvez générer des cartes de visite pour tous les membres ou pour des membres spécifiques à partir du menu approprié.
|-
|Choose a format and click on the button to generate the appropriate business cards in the PDF format, which can them be sent for printing.
|Choisissez un format et cliquez sur le bouton pour générer les cartes de visite appropriées au format PDF, lesquelles peuvent ensuite être envoyées pour impression.
|-
|Use the “Tags” menu to categorize members based on tags.
|Utilisez le menu "Étiquettes" pour classer les membres en fonction des étiquettes.
|-
|You can create your own custom tags and map members to those tags.
|Vous pouvez créer vos propres étiquettes personnalisées et associer les membres à ces étiquettes.
|-
|'''Renewal of subscription'''
|'''Renouvellement de l'abonnement'''
|-
|Enable the module Scheduled Task, so that an automated task will be run every day to send email reminders to members whose subscription has expired and needs to be renewed.
|Activez le module Tâche Planifiée, afin qu'une tâche automatique soit exécutée chaque jour pour envoyer des rappels par e-mail aux membres dont l'abonnement a expiré et doit être renouvelé.
|-
|If you have enabled a payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can also add a payment link by editing the email template configured for the renewal reminder email.
|Si vous avez activé un module de paiement comme Stripe ou Paypal, vous pouvez également ajouter un lien de paiement en modifiant le modèle d'e-mail configuré pour l'e-mail de rappel de renouvellement.
|-
|So, the member will be able to make the payment by clicking on the link in the email, and the subscription and invoice will be automatically generated and recorded.
|Ainsi, le membre pourra effectuer le paiement en cliquant sur le lien dans l'email. L'abonnement et la facture seront automatiquement générés et enregistrés.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module setup such as email templates and the link for the public self-registration and self-subscription page.
|De nombreuses autres fonctions peuvent être activées à partir de la configuration du module, comme les modèles d'e-mail et le lien vers la page publique d'auto-inscription et d'auto-souscription.
|-
|You can also add your own custom fields and define default values or mandatory fields.
|Vous pouvez également ajouter vos propres champs personnalisés et définir des valeurs par défaut ou des champs obligatoires.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Merci d'avoir regardé ce tutoriel vidéo. Visitez www.dolibarr.org pour en savoir plus.
|}
 '''Translation in German'''

'''Video Title:''' Verwaltung von Mitgliedschaften in Dolibarr

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over in English'''
|'''Voice Over in Translated Language'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the “Members” module for managing foundation members in Dolibarr.
|Willkommen zu diesem Video-Tutorial über das Dolibarr ERP- und CRM-System. In diesem Video erfahren Sie, wie Sie das Modul "Mitglieder" zum Verwalten von Vereinsmitgliedern in Dolibarr verwenden.
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|'''Voraussetzungen'''
|-
|Activate the module "Members" from the menu Home - Setup - Modules.
|Aktivieren Sie das Modul "Mitglieder" aus dem Menü Home - Setup - Module.
|-
|Grant permission on the “Members” module for your users.

For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions".
|Erteilen Sie Ihren Benutzern die Berechtigung für das Modul “Mitglieder". Weitere Informationen zum Einrichten von Berechtigungen für Benutzer finden Sie in unserem Video "Benutzer, Gruppen und Berechtigungen".
|-
|'''Creating a Member'''
|'''Ein Mitglied erstellen'''
|-
|The Members module can be used to manage the members of a foundation and their subscription.
|Mit dem Modul Mitglieder können Sie die Mitglieder eines Vereins und deren Mitgliedschaft verwalten.
|-
|Click on the appropriate menu link to add a new member.
|Klicken Sie auf das entsprechende Menü, um ein neues Mitglied hinzuzufügen.
|-
|Provide a username and password.
|Geben Sie einen Benutzernamen und ein Passwort ein.
|-
|Choose a member type and the nature of the member.
|Wählen Sie einen Mitgliedstyp und die Art des Mitglieds.
|-
|Note that you can create new member types from the Member types menu.
|Beachten Sie, dass Sie über das Menü Elementtypen neue Mitgliedstypen erstellen können.
|-
|Specify if subscription is required and if voting is allowed. Duration defines the membership duration.
|Geben Sie an, ob eine Mitgliedsgebühr verrechnet wird und ob es sich um eine Mitgliedschaft mit Stimmrecht handelt. Dauer definiert die Dauer der Mitgliedschaft.
|-
|Coming back to the member creation process, provide personal details such as the member’s name and address.

Click on the button to create the member.
|Wenn Sie zum Erstellungsprozess des Mitglieds zurückkehren, geben Sie die restlichen persönliche Daten, wie den Namen und die Adresse des Mitglieds an. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche, um das Mitglied zu erstellen.
|-
|Once created, the member is in the Draft status. Click on the “Validate” button to validate the member.
|Nach der Erstellung befindet sich das Mitglied im Entwurfsstatus. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Bestätigen", um das Mitglied freizugeben.
|-
|The status now changes to “Validated and awaiting subscription”.
|Der Status ändert sich nun zu "Freigegeben (Beitrag ausstehend)".
|-
|'''Adding a Subscription for the Member'''
|'''Ein Abonnement für ein Mitglied hinzufügen'''
|-
|Click on the “Subscriptions” tab and click on the appropriate button to create a subscription.
|Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte "Mitgliedsbeiträge" und dann auf die Schaltfläche "Beitrag erstellen", um einen Mitgliedsbeitrag zu erfassen.
|-
|Choose the subscription start and end dates and enter the subscription amount. Choose the appropriate complementary action.
|Wählen Sie das Start- und Enddatum und geben Sie den Betrag ein. Wählen Sie die geeignete ergänzenden Informationen.
|-
|Note that if the member is linked to a third party, the invoice options can be chosen for the subscription transaction.
|Beachten Sie, dass die Rechnungsoptionen für die Transaktion ausgewählt werden können, wenn das Mitglied mit einem Geschäftspartner verbunden ist.
|-
|Otherwise, you can enter the relevant payment information to capture the payment details for the subscription transaction.
|Andernfalls können Sie die entsprechenden Zahlungsinformationen eingeben, um die Zahlungsdetails für die Transaktion zu erfassen.
|-
|New members can also self-register and self-subscribe using the public self-subscription page.
|Neue Mitglieder können sich auch über die öffentliche Seite selbst registrieren.
|-
|If you have enabled an online payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can setup the application so that the user will be able to make the subscription payment just after the registration. The member and the subscription will be automatically recorded and the user will receive an email. The invoice can also be automatically attached to the email.
|Wenn Sie ein Online-Zahlungsmodul wie Stripe oder Paypal aktiviert haben, können Sie die Anwendung so einrichten, dass der Benutzer die Zahlung des Mitgliedsbeitrags unmittelbar nach der Registrierung vornehmen kann. Das Mitglied und die Zahlung werden automatisch aufgezeichnet und der Benutzer erhält eine E-Mail. Die Rechnung kann auch automatisch an die E-Mail angehängt werden.
|-
|'''Module Features'''
|'''Funktionen des Moduls'''
|-
|You can upload any files for a particular member by using the appropriate menu.
|Sie können beliebige Dateien für ein bestimmtes Mitglied über das entsprechende Menü hochladen.
|-
|The Events and Agenda tab captures all the events related to the member.
|Auf der Registerkarte Ereignisse und Agenda werden alle Ereignisse erfasst, die sich auf das Mitglied beziehen.
|-
|If you wish to terminate the member, click on the appropriate button.
|Wenn Sie die Mitgliedschaft aufheben möchten, klicken Sie auf die entsprechende Schaltfläche.
|-
|Click on the “List” menu to list all the members.
|Klicken Sie auf das Menü "Liste", um alle Mitglieder aufzulisten.
|-
|The list views are also available based on the member status such as “Draft”, “Validated”, “Without Subscription”, “Up to date”, “Out of date” and “Terminated”.
|Die Listenansichten sind auch basierend auf dem Mitgliedsstatus verfügbar, z. B. "Entwurf", "Freigegeben", "Ohne Mitgliedschaft", "Aktuell", "Veraltet" und "Deaktiviert".
|-
|“Statistics” provides a birds-eye-view of all members and member subscriptions.
|"Statistik" bietet Berichte und Reports zu allen Mitgliedern und Mitgliedsbeiträgen.
|-
|You can generate business cards for all members or specific members from the appropriate menu.
|Sie können Visitenkarten für alle Mitglieder oder bestimmte Mitglieder aus dem entsprechenden Menü generieren.
|-
|Choose a format and click on the button to generate the appropriate business cards in the PDF format, which can them be sent for printing.
|Wählen Sie ein Format und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche, um die entsprechenden Visitenkarten im PDF-Format zu generieren, die zum Drucken gesendet werden können.
|-
|Use the “Tags” menu to categorize members based on tags.
|Verwenden Sie das Menü "Kategorien", um Mitglieder zu kategorisieren.
|-
|You can create your own custom tags and map members to those tags.
|Sie können Ihre eigenen benutzerdefinierten Kategorien erstellen und Mitgliedern diese zuordnen.
|-
|'''Renewal of subscription'''
|'''Erneuerung des Abonnements'''
|-
|Enable the module Scheduled Task, so that an automated task will be run every day to send email reminders to members whose subscription has expired and needs to be renewed.
|Aktivieren Sie das Modul "Geplante Aufgabe", sodass täglich eine automatisierte Aufgabe ausgeführt wird, um E-Mail-Erinnerungen an Mitglieder zu senden, deren Mitgliedschaft abgelaufen ist und erneuert werden muss.
|-
|If you have enabled a payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can also add a payment link by editing the email template configured for the renewal reminder email.
|Wenn Sie ein Zahlungsmodul wie Stripe oder Paypal aktiviert haben, können Sie auch einen Zahlungslink hinzufügen, indem Sie die E-Mail-Vorlage bearbeiten, die für die E-Mail zur Erneuerungserinnerung konfiguriert ist.
|-
|So, the member will be able to make the payment by clicking on the link in the email, and the subscription and invoice will be automatically generated and recorded.
|So kann das Mitglied die Zahlung durch Klicken auf den Link in der E-Mail vornehmen. Damit wird die Mitgliedschaft verlängert und die Rechnung automatisch generiert und gespeichert.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module setup such as email templates and the link for the public self-registration and self-subscription page.
|Es gibt auch viele andere Funktionen, die über das Modul-Setup aktiviert werden können, z. B. E-Mail-Vorlagen und den Link für die öffentliche Vereinsseite.
|-
|You can also add your own custom fields and define default values or mandatory fields.
|Sie können auch eigene benutzerdefinierte Felder hinzufügen und Standardwerte oder Pflichtfelder definieren.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Vielen Dank, dass Sie sich dieses Video-Tutorial angesehen haben. Besuchen Sie www.dolibarr.org, um mehr zu erfahren.
|}
 
[[Category:Video]]

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Membership management

2021-03-12T07:27:34Z

Pradeepv: Translation in German added

{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

===='''Storyboard for Membership Module'''====
'''Video Title:''' Membership Management in Dolibarr

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video,
we will look at how to use the “Members” module for managing foundation members in Dolibarr.
|Show the standard intro animation with video title “Membership Management in Dolibarr”.
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Members" from the menu Home - Setup - Modules.
|Enable the Members module.
|-
|Grant permission on the “Members” module for your users.
For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions".
|Grant permissions on the “Members” module.
|-
|'''Creating a Member'''
|
|-
|The Members module can be used to manage the members of a foundation and their subscription.
Click on the appropriate menu link to add a new member.
|From the Home dashboard, click on the Members menu. Click on New Member.
|-
|Provide a username and password.
|Enter a username and password
|-
|Choose a member type and the nature of the member.
|Choose a member type
|-
|Note that you can create new member types from the Member types menu.
Specify if subscription is required and if voting is allowed. Duration defines the membership duration.
|Click on Member types. Click on New and show the Member type creation screen.
|-
|Coming back to the member creation process, provide personal details such as the member’s name and address.
Click on the button to create the member.
|Transition back to Create Member screen.
|-
|Once created, the member is in the Draft status. Click on the “Validate” button to validate the member.
The status now changes to “Validated and awaiting subscription”.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|'''Adding a Subscription for the Member'''
|
|-
|Click on the “Subscriptions” tab and click on the appropriate button to create a subscription.
Choose the subscription start and end dates and enter the subscription amount. Choose the appropriate complementary action. Note that if the member is linked to a third party, the invoice options can be chosen for the subscription transaction. Otherwise, you can enter the relevant payment information to capture the payment details for the subscription transaction.
|-
|New members can also self-register and self-subscribe using the public self-subscription page.
If you have enabled an online payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can setup the application so that the user will be able to make the subscription payment just after the registration. The member and the subscription will be automatically recorded and the user will receive an email. The invoice can also be automatically attached to the email.
|Go on the public page (url is provided into setup of the module Member) and send a subscription.
|-
|'''Module Features'''
|
|-
|You can upload any files for a particular member by using the appropriate menu.
|Click Upload Files tab and upload a file.
|-
|The Events and Agenda tab captures all the events related to the member.
|Click the tab and show the events.
|-
|If you wish to terminate the member, click on the appropriate button.
|Show clicking Terminate and show the resulting popup.
|-
|Click on the “List” menu to list all the members.
The list views are also available based on the member status such as “Draft”, “Validated”, “Up to date”, “Out of date” and “Terminated”.
|Show the list views.
|-
|“Statistics” provides a birds-eye-view of all members and member subscriptions.
|Show Statistics with filtering.
|-
|You can generate business cards for all members or specific members from the appropriate menu.
Choose a format and click on the button to generate the appropriate business cards in the PDF format, which can them be sent for printing.
|Click and show the Members business cards menu.
|-
|Use the “Tags” menu to categorize members based on tags.
You can create your own custom tags and map members to those tags.
|Click the tags menu. Click on a tag to show the members listed for that tag.
|-
|'''Renewal of subscription'''
|
|-
|Enable the module Scheduled Task, so that an automated task will be run every day to send email reminders to members whose subscription has expired and needs to be renewed.
|Enable the module and go into home setup - administration - scheduled task to show the task.
|-
|If you have enabled a payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can also add a payment link by editing the email template configured for the renewal reminder email.
So, the member will be able to make the payment by clicking on the link in the email, and the subscription and invoice will be automatically generated and recorded.
|Go into templates of email in home - tools - email templates) and open the template "SendingReminderForExpiredSubscription" and show that keyword __ONLINE_PAYMENT_TEXT_AND_URL__
that is inside the email template.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module setup such as email templates and the link for the public self-registration and self-subscription page.
You can also add your own custom fields and define default values or mandatory fields.
|Show creating a custom field and show it available in the creation page.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Standard ending with text and animation.
|}

'''Translation in Spanish'''

'''Video Title:''' Gestión de Suscripciones en Dolibarr

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over in English'''
|'''Voice Over in Translated Language'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the “Members” module for managing foundation members in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenido a este videotutorial sobre el sistema ERP y CRM Dolibarr. En este vídeo, veremos cómo utilizar el módulo "Miembros" para gestionar los miembros de la organización en Dolibarr.
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|'''Requisitos Previos'''
|-
|Activate the module "Members" from the menu Home - Setup - Modules.
|Activar el módulo "Miembros " desde el menú Inicio - Configuración - Módulos.
|-
|Grant permission on the “Members” module for your users.

For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions".
|Conceda permisos en el módulo "Miembros" a sus usuarios.

Para obtener información más avanzada sobre cómo configurar los permisos a los usuarios, puede ver nuestro vídeo "Usuarios, Grupos y Permisos".
|-
|'''Creating a Member'''
|'''Crear un Miembro'''
|-
|The Members module can be used to manage the members of a foundation and their subscription.
|El módulo "Miembros" puede utilizarse para gestionar los miembros de una organización y su suscripción.
|-
|Click on the appropriate menu link to add a new member.
|Haga clic en el enlace correspondiente del menú para añadir un nuevo miembro.
|-
|Provide a username and password.
|Indique un nombre de usuario y una contraseña.
|-
|Choose a member type and the nature of the member.
|Elija un tipo de miembro y la naturaleza del mismo.
|-
|Note that you can create new member types from the Member types menu.
|Tenga en cuenta que puede crear nuevos tipos de miembros desde el menú Tipos de Miembros.
|-
|Specify if subscription is required and if voting is allowed. Duration defines the membership duration.
|Especifique si la suscripción es obligatoria y si se permite votar. La duración define la duración de la suscripción.
|-
|Coming back to the member creation process, provide personal details such as the member’s name and address.

Click on the button to create the member.
|Volviendo al proceso de creación de miembros, proporcione datos personales como el nombre y la dirección del miembro.

Haga clic en el botón para crear el miembro.
|-
|Once created, the member is in the Draft status. Click on the “Validate” button to validate the member.
|Una vez creado, el miembro estará en estado Borrador. Haga clic en el botón "Validar" para validar el miembro.
|-
|The status now changes to “Validated and awaiting subscription”.
|El estado cambia a "Validado y en espera de suscripción".
|-
|'''Adding a Subscription for the Member'''
|'''Añadir una Suscripción para el Miembro'''
|-
|Click on the “Subscriptions” tab and click on the appropriate button to create a subscription.
|Haga clic en la pestaña "Suscripciones" y pulse el botón correspondiente para crear una suscripción.
|-
|Choose the subscription start and end dates and enter the subscription amount. Choose the appropriate complementary action.
|Elija las fechas de inicio y de finalización de la suscripción e introduzca el importe de la misma. Elija la acción adicional que corresponda.
|-
|Note that if the member is linked to a third party, the invoice options can be chosen for the subscription transaction.
|Tenga en cuenta que si el miembro está vinculado a un tercero, se pueden escoger las opciones de factura para la tramitación de la suscripción.
|-
|Otherwise, you can enter the relevant payment information to capture the payment details for the subscription transaction.
|De lo contrario, puede introducir la información de pago pertinente para registrar los datos de pago de la transacción de suscripción.
|-
|New members can also self-register and self-subscribe using the public self-subscription page.
|Los nuevos miembros también pueden autorregistrarse y autosuscribirse utilizando la página pública de autosuscripción.
|-
|If you have enabled an online payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can setup the application so that the user will be able to make the subscription payment just after the registration. The member and the subscription will be automatically recorded and the user will receive an email. The invoice can also be automatically attached to the email.
|Si ha habilitado un módulo de pago online como Stripe o Paypal, puede configurar la aplicación para que el usuario pueda realizar el pago de la suscripción justo después del registro. El miembro y la suscripción se registrarán automáticamente y el usuario recibirá un correo electrónico. También se puede adjuntar automáticamente la factura al correo electrónico.
|-
|'''Module Features'''
|'''Características del Módulo'''
|-
|You can upload any files for a particular member by using the appropriate menu.
|Puede cargar cualquier archivo para un miembro en particular utilizando el menú correspondiente.
|-
|The Events and Agenda tab captures all the events related to the member.
|La pestaña de Eventos y Agenda captura todos los eventos relacionados con el miembro.
|-
|If you wish to terminate the member, click on the appropriate button.
|Si desea dar de baja a un miembro, haga clic en el botón correspondiente.
|-
|Click on the “List” menu to list all the members.
|Haga clic en el menú "Lista" para enumerar todos los miembros.
|-
|The list views are also available based on the member status such as “Draft”, “Validated”, “Without Subscription”, “Up to date”, “Out of date” and “Terminated”.
|Las vistas de lista también están disponibles en función del estado del miembro, como "Borrador", "Validado", "Sin suscripción", "Al día", "Fuera de plazo" y "Cancelado".
|-
|“Statistics” provides a birds-eye-view of all members and member subscriptions.
|Las "Estadísticas" proporcionan una visión general de todos los miembros y de las suscripciones de los miembros.
|-
|You can generate business cards for all members or specific members from the appropriate menu.
|Puede generar tarjetas de visita para todos los miembros o para miembros específicos desde el menú correspondiente.
|-
|Choose a format and click on the button to generate the appropriate business cards in the PDF format, which can them be sent for printing.
|Elija un formato y haga clic en el botón para generar las tarjetas de visita correspondientes en formato PDF, que pueden enviarse a imprimir.
|-
|Use the “Tags” menu to categorize members based on tags.
|Utilice el menú "Etiquetas" para clasificar a los miembros en función de las etiquetas.
|-
|You can create your own custom tags and map members to those tags.
|Puede crear sus propias etiquetas personalizadas y asignar los miembros a esas etiquetas.
|-
|'''Renewal of subscription'''
|'''Renovación de la Suscripción'''
|-
|Enable the module Scheduled Task, so that an automated task will be run every day to send email reminders to members whose subscription has expired and needs to be renewed.
|Habilite el módulo Tarea Programada, para que se ejecute una tarea automatizada cada día con el fin de enviar recordatorios por correo electrónico a los miembros cuya suscripción ha caducado y debe ser renovada.
|-
|If you have enabled a payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can also add a payment link by editing the email template configured for the renewal reminder email.
|Si ha habilitado un módulo de pago como Stripe o Paypal, también puede añadir un enlace de pago editando la plantilla de correo electrónico configurada para el correo de recordatorio de renovación.
|-
|So, the member will be able to make the payment by clicking on the link in the email, and the subscription and invoice will be automatically generated and recorded.
|Así, el miembro podrá realizar el pago haciendo clic en el enlace del correo electrónico, y la suscripción y la factura se generarán y registrarán de forma automática.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module setup such as email templates and the link for the public self-registration and self-subscription page.
|También hay muchas otras características que se pueden habilitar desde la configuración del módulo, como las plantillas de correo electrónico y el enlace para la página pública de autorregistro y autosuscripción.
|-
|You can also add your own custom fields and define default values or mandatory fields.
|También puede añadir sus propios campos personalizados y definir valores por defecto o campos obligatorios.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Gracias por ver este video tutorial. Visite www.dolibarr.org para obtener más información.
|}

'''Translation in French'''

'''Video Title:''' Gestion des adhésions à Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over in English'''
|'''Voice Over in Translated Language'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the “Members” module for managing foundation members in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenue dans ce tutoriel vidéo sur le système ERP et CRM Dolibarr. Dans cette vidéo, nous allons voir comment utiliser le module "Membres" pour gérer les membres d'une fondation dans Dolibarr.
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|'''Pré-requis'''
|-
|Activate the module "Members" from the menu Home - Setup - Modules.
|Activer le module "Membres" à partir du menu Accueil - Paramètres - Modules.
|-
|Grant permission on the “Members” module for your users.

For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions".
|Accordez une autorisation sur le module "Membres" à vos utilisateurs.

Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration des autorisations pour les utilisateurs, vous pouvez regarder notre vidéo "Utilisateurs, groupes et autorisations".
|-
|'''Creating a Member'''
|'''Création d’un membre'''
|-
|The Members module can be used to manage the members of a foundation and their subscription.
|Le module "Membres" peut être utilisé pour gérer les membres d'une fondation et leur abonnement.
|-
|Click on the appropriate menu link to add a new member.
|Cliquez sur le lien du menu approprié pour ajouter un nouveau membre.
|-
|Provide a username and password.
|Fournissez un nom d'utilisateur et un mot de passe.
|-
|Choose a member type and the nature of the member.
|Choisissez un type de membre et la nature du membre.
|-
|Note that you can create new member types from the Member types menu.
|Notez que vous pouvez créer de nouveaux types de membres à partir du menu Types de membres.
|-
|Specify if subscription is required and if voting is allowed. Duration defines the membership duration.
|Indiquez si l'abonnement est obligatoire et si le vote est autorisé. La durée définit la durée de l'adhésion.
|-
|Coming back to the member creation process, provide personal details such as the member’s name and address.

Click on the button to create the member.
|Pour revenir au processus de création du membre, fournissez les détails personnels tels que le nom et l'adresse du membre.

Cliquez sur le bouton pour créer un membre.
|-
|Once created, the member is in the Draft status. Click on the “Validate” button to validate the member.
|Une fois créé, le membre est dans le statut "Brouillon". Cliquez sur le bouton "Valider" pour valider le membre.
|-
|The status now changes to “Validated and awaiting subscription”.
|Le statut passe alors à "Validé et en attente d'abonnement".
|-
|'''Adding a Subscription for the Member'''
|'''Ajout d'un abonnement pour le membre'''
|-
|Click on the “Subscriptions” tab and click on the appropriate button to create a subscription.
|Cliquez sur l'onglet "Abonnements" et cliquez sur le bouton approprié pour créer un abonnement.
|-
|Choose the subscription start and end dates and enter the subscription amount. Choose the appropriate complementary action.
|Choisissez les dates de début et de fin de l'abonnement et saisissez le montant de l'abonnement. Choisissez l'action complémentaire appropriée.
|-
|Note that if the member is linked to a third party, the invoice options can be chosen for the subscription transaction.
|Notez que si le membre est lié à un tiers, les options de facturation peuvent être choisies pour la transaction d'abonnement.
|-
|Otherwise, you can enter the relevant payment information to capture the payment details for the subscription transaction.
|Autrement, vous pouvez saisir les informations de paiement appropriées pour obtenir les détails du paiement pour la transaction d'abonnement.
|-
|New members can also self-register and self-subscribe using the public self-subscription page.
|Les nouveaux membres peuvent également s'auto-inscrire et s'auto-abonner en utilisant la page publique d'auto-abonnement.
|-
|If you have enabled an online payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can setup the application so that the user will be able to make the subscription payment just after the registration. The member and the subscription will be automatically recorded and the user will receive an email. The invoice can also be automatically attached to the email.
|Si vous avez activé un module de paiement en ligne comme Stripe ou Paypal, vous pouvez configurer l'application de sorte que l'utilisateur puisse effectuer le paiement de l'abonnement juste après l'inscription. Le membre et l'abonnement seront automatiquement enregistrés et l'utilisateur recevra un e-mail. La facture peut également être automatiquement jointe à l'e-mail.
|-
|'''Module Features'''
|'''Caractéristiques du module'''
|-
|You can upload any files for a particular member by using the appropriate menu.
|Vous pouvez télécharger n'importe quel fichier pour un membre particulier en utilisant le menu approprié.
|-
|The Events and Agenda tab captures all the events related to the member.
|L'onglet Événements et Agenda contient tous les événements liés au membre.
|-
|If you wish to terminate the member, click on the appropriate button.
|Si vous souhaitez résilier le membre, cliquez sur le bouton approprié.
|-
|Click on the “List” menu to list all the members.
|Cliquez sur le menu "Liste" pour lister tous les membres.
|-
|The list views are also available based on the member status such as “Draft”, “Validated”, “Without Subscription”, “Up to date”, “Out of date” and “Terminated”.
|Les aperçus de liste sont également disponibles en fonction du statut du membre, à savoir "Brouillon", "Validé", "Sans abonnement", "A jour", "Périmé" et "Résilié".
|-
|“Statistics” provides a birds-eye-view of all members and member subscriptions.
|La rubrique "Statistiques" offre une vue d'ensemble de tous les membres et de leurs abonnements.
|-
|You can generate business cards for all members or specific members from the appropriate menu.
|Vous pouvez générer des cartes de visite pour tous les membres ou pour des membres spécifiques à partir du menu approprié.
|-
|Choose a format and click on the button to generate the appropriate business cards in the PDF format, which can them be sent for printing.
|Choisissez un format et cliquez sur le bouton pour générer les cartes de visite appropriées au format PDF, lesquelles peuvent ensuite être envoyées pour impression.
|-
|Use the “Tags” menu to categorize members based on tags.
|Utilisez le menu "Étiquettes" pour classer les membres en fonction des étiquettes.
|-
|You can create your own custom tags and map members to those tags.
|Vous pouvez créer vos propres étiquettes personnalisées et associer les membres à ces étiquettes.
|-
|'''Renewal of subscription'''
|'''Renouvellement de l'abonnement'''
|-
|Enable the module Scheduled Task, so that an automated task will be run every day to send email reminders to members whose subscription has expired and needs to be renewed.
|Activez le module Tâche Planifiée, afin qu'une tâche automatique soit exécutée chaque jour pour envoyer des rappels par e-mail aux membres dont l'abonnement a expiré et doit être renouvelé.
|-
|If you have enabled a payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can also add a payment link by editing the email template configured for the renewal reminder email.
|Si vous avez activé un module de paiement comme Stripe ou Paypal, vous pouvez également ajouter un lien de paiement en modifiant le modèle d'e-mail configuré pour l'e-mail de rappel de renouvellement.
|-
|So, the member will be able to make the payment by clicking on the link in the email, and the subscription and invoice will be automatically generated and recorded.
|Ainsi, le membre pourra effectuer le paiement en cliquant sur le lien dans l'email. L'abonnement et la facture seront automatiquement générés et enregistrés.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module setup such as email templates and the link for the public self-registration and self-subscription page.
|De nombreuses autres fonctions peuvent être activées à partir de la configuration du module, comme les modèles d'e-mail et le lien vers la page publique d'auto-inscription et d'auto-souscription.
|-
|You can also add your own custom fields and define default values or mandatory fields.
|Vous pouvez également ajouter vos propres champs personnalisés et définir des valeurs par défaut ou des champs obligatoires.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Merci d'avoir regardé ce tutoriel vidéo. Visitez www.dolibarr.org pour en savoir plus.
|}
 '''Translation in German'''

'''Video Title in English:''' Membership Management in Dolibarr

'''Video Title in the Translated Language:'''

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over in English'''
|'''Voice Over in Translated Language'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the “Members” module for managing foundation members in Dolibarr.
|Willkommen zu diesem Video-Tutorial über das Dolibarr ERP- und CRM-System. In diesem Video erfahren Sie, wie Sie das Modul "Mitglieder" zum Verwalten von Gründungsmitgliedern in Dolibarr verwenden.
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|'''Voraussetzungen'''
|-
|Activate the module "Members" from the menu Home - Setup - Modules.
|Aktivieren Sie das Modul "Mitglieder" aus dem Menü Home - Setup - Module.
|-
|Grant permission on the “Members” module for your users.

For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions".
|Erteilen Sie Ihren Benutzern die Berechtigung für das Modul “Mitglieder". Weitere Informationen zum Einrichten von Berechtigungen für Benutzer finden Sie in unserem Video "Benutzer, Gruppen und Berechtigungen".
|-
|'''Creating a Member'''
|'''Ein Mitglied erstellen'''
|-
|The Members module can be used to manage the members of a foundation and their subscription.
|Mit dem Modul Mitglieder können Sie die Mitglieder einer Stiftung und deren Abonnement verwalten.
|-
|Click on the appropriate menu link to add a new member.
|Klicken Sie auf den entsprechenden Menülink, um ein neues Mitglied hinzuzufügen.
|-
|Provide a username and password.
|Geben Sie einen Benutzernamen und ein Passwort ein.
|-
|Choose a member type and the nature of the member.
|Wählen Sie ein Mitgliedstyp und die Art des Mitglieds.
|-
|Note that you can create new member types from the Member types menu.
|Beachten Sie, dass Sie über das Menü Elementtypen neue Elementtypen erstellen können.
|-
|Specify if subscription is required and if voting is allowed. Duration defines the membership duration.
|Geben Sie an, ob ein Abonnement erforderlich ist und ob eine Abstimmung zulässig ist. Dauer definiert die Dauer der Mitgliedschaft.
|-
|Coming back to the member creation process, provide personal details such as the member’s name and address.

Click on the button to create the member.
|Wenn Sie zum Erstellungsprozess des Mitglieds zurückkehren, geben Sie persönliche Daten wie den Namen und die Adresse des Mitglieds an. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche, um das Mitglied zu erstellen.
|-
|Once created, the member is in the Draft status. Click on the “Validate” button to validate the member.
|Nach der Erstellung befindet sich das Mitglied im Entwurfsstatus. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Validieren", um das Mitglied zu validieren.
|-
|The status now changes to “Validated and awaiting subscription”.
|Der Status ändert sich nun zu "Validiert und wartet auf Abonnement".
|-
|'''Adding a Subscription for the Member'''
|'''Ein Abonnement für ein Mitglied hinzufügen'''
|-
|Click on the “Subscriptions” tab and click on the appropriate button to create a subscription.
|Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte "Abonnements" und dann auf die entsprechende Schaltfläche, um ein Abonnement zu erstellen.
|-
|Choose the subscription start and end dates and enter the subscription amount. Choose the appropriate complementary action.
|Wählen Sie das Start- und Enddatum des Abonnements und geben Sie den Abonnementbetrag ein. Wählen Sie die geeignete ergänzenden Maßnahmen.
|-
|Note that if the member is linked to a third party, the invoice options can be chosen for the subscription transaction.
|Beachten Sie, dass die Rechnungsoptionen für die Abonnementtransaktion ausgewählt werden können, wenn das Mitglied mit einem Dritten verbunden ist.
|-
|Otherwise, you can enter the relevant payment information to capture the payment details for the subscription transaction.
|Andernfalls können Sie die entsprechenden Zahlungsinformationen eingeben, um die Zahlungsdetails für die Abonnementtransaktion zu erfassen.
|-
|New members can also self-register and self-subscribe using the public self-subscription page.
|Neue Mitglieder können sich auch über die öffentliche Selbstabonnementseite selbst registrieren und abonnieren.
|-
|If you have enabled an online payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can setup the application so that the user will be able to make the subscription payment just after the registration. The member and the subscription will be automatically recorded and the user will receive an email. The invoice can also be automatically attached to the email.
|Wenn Sie ein Online-Zahlungsmodul wie Stripe oder Paypal aktiviert haben, können Sie die Anwendung so einrichten, dass der Benutzer die Abonnementzahlung unmittelbar nach der Registrierung vornehmen kann. Das Mitglied und das Abonnement werden automatisch aufgezeichnet und der Benutzer erhält eine E-Mail. Die Rechnung kann auch automatisch an die E-Mail angehängt werden.
|-
|'''Module Features'''
|'''Funktionen des Moduls'''
|-
|You can upload any files for a particular member by using the appropriate menu.
|Sie können beliebige Dateien für ein bestimmtes Mitglied über das entsprechende Menü hochladen.
|-
|The Events and Agenda tab captures all the events related to the member.
|Auf der Registerkarte Ereignisse und Agenda werden alle Ereignisse erfasst, die sich auf das Mitglied beziehen.
|-
|If you wish to terminate the member, click on the appropriate button.
|Wenn Sie das Mitglied kündigen möchten, klicken Sie auf die entsprechende Schaltfläche.
|-
|Click on the “List” menu to list all the members.
|Klicken Sie auf das Menü "Liste", um alle Mitglieder aufzulisten.
|-
|The list views are also available based on the member status such as “Draft”, “Validated”, “Without Subscription”, “Up to date”, “Out of date” and “Terminated”.
|Die Listenansichten sind auch basierend auf dem Mitgliedsstatus verfügbar, z. B. "Entwurf", "Validiert", "Ohne Abonnement", "Aktuell", "Veraltet" und "Beendet".
|-
|“Statistics” provides a birds-eye-view of all members and member subscriptions.
|"Statistik" bietet eine Vogelperspektive auf alle Mitglieder und Mitgliederabonnements.
|-
|You can generate business cards for all members or specific members from the appropriate menu.
|Sie können Visitenkarten für alle Mitglieder oder bestimmte Mitglieder aus dem entsprechenden Menü generieren.
|-
|Choose a format and click on the button to generate the appropriate business cards in the PDF format, which can them be sent for printing.
|Wählen Sie ein Format und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche, um die entsprechenden Visitenkarten im PDF-Format zu generieren, die zum Drucken gesendet werden können.
|-
|Use the “Tags” menu to categorize members based on tags.
|Verwenden Sie das Menü "Tags", um Mitglieder anhand von Tags zu kategorisieren.
|-
|You can create your own custom tags and map members to those tags.
|Sie können Ihre eigenen benutzerdefinierten Tags erstellen und Mitgliedern diese Tags zuordnen.
|-
|'''Renewal of subscription'''
|'''Erneuerung des Abonnements'''
|-
|Enable the module Scheduled Task, so that an automated task will be run every day to send email reminders to members whose subscription has expired and needs to be renewed.
|Aktivieren Sie das Modul Geplante Aufgabe, sodass täglich eine automatisierte Aufgabe ausgeführt wird, um E-Mail-Erinnerungen an Mitglieder zu senden, deren Abonnement abgelaufen ist und erneuert werden muss.
|-
|If you have enabled a payment module like Stripe or Paypal, you can also add a payment link by editing the email template configured for the renewal reminder email.
|Wenn Sie ein Zahlungsmodul wie Stripe oder Paypal aktiviert haben, können Sie auch einen Zahlungslink hinzufügen, indem Sie die E-Mail-Vorlage bearbeiten, die für die E-Mail zur Erneuerungserinnerung konfiguriert ist.
|-
|So, the member will be able to make the payment by clicking on the link in the email, and the subscription and invoice will be automatically generated and recorded.
|So kann das Mitglied die Zahlung durch Klicken auf den Link in der E-Mail vornehmen, und das Abonnement und die Rechnung werden automatisch generiert und aufgezeichnet.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module setup such as email templates and the link for the public self-registration and self-subscription page.
|Es gibt auch viele andere Funktionen, die über das Modul-Setup aktiviert werden können, z. B. E-Mail-Vorlagen und den Link für die öffentliche Selbstregistrierungs- und Selbstabonnementseite.
|-
|You can also add your own custom fields and define default values or mandatory fields.
|Sie können auch eigene benutzerdefinierte Felder hinzufügen und Standardwerte oder Pflichtfelder definieren.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Vielen Dank, dass Sie sich dieses Video-Tutorial angesehen haben. Besuchen Sie www.dolibarr.org, um mehr zu erfahren.
|}
 
[[Category:Video]]

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Membership management

2021-03-11T05:32:44Z

Pradeepv:

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Membership management

2021-03-11T05:32:15Z

Pradeepv: Added French translation

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Membership management

2021-03-11T05:29:48Z

Pradeepv:

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Membership management

2021-03-10T14:27:40Z

Pradeepv: Added Spanish Translation

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Membership management

2021-03-01T16:18:03Z

Pradeepv: Language changes + added self-subscription to settings

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - TakePOS

2021-02-16T09:58:06Z

Pradeepv: Reordering

{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

==='''Storyboard for Module TakePOS'''===
'''Video Title:''' TakePOS: Point of Sale in Dolibarr

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the “TakePOS Point of Sale” module in Dolibarr.
|
|Show the standard intro animation with video title “TakePOS: Point of Sale in Dolibarr”.
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|
|-
|Activate the module "POS TakePOS" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable related modules such as “Third Parties”, "Invoices", "Banks", "Categories" and “Products”.
|
|Enable the modules mentioned in the voice over
|-
|Grant permission on the “POS TakePOS” module as well as the related modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|
|Grant permissions on the “TakePOS” and “Products” modules.
|-
|'''Creating an Invoice via TakePOS'''
|
|
|-
|The TakePOS Dolibarr module allows make sales from computers and mobile terminals in any type of store including bar and restaurants. The user interface is fully compatible with touch screens, order printers, scales etc.
|
|Show a stock video footage of point of sale. Rapid zoom in to the screen and show the Dolibarr TakePOS screen on it.
|-
|Begin by choosing a terminal.
|
|Click on the button. Choose Terminal1.
|-
|Choose the customer or third party. This is optional, so you can also stay with a Generic customer.
|
|Click on the button and choose a third party.
|-
|The recent invoices show up based on the time of creation. Click or tap on a time to load the invoice.
|
|Click on a time to load the items billed.
|-
|You can also click or tap on “History” to view all the invoices generated for all customers. Click or tap on an invoice to load it.
|
|Click on History and show the popup. Click on an item to load the products.
|-
|If you want to start a new concurrent invoice, click or tap on the NEW button.
|
|Click on New.
|-
|Choose a category. The respective products are loaded. Click or tap on a product to add it to the invoice.
|
|Choose a category and product.
|-
|You can modify the quantity, price and discount. On the invoice, click or tap on a line item to highlight it. If you want to change the quantity, click or tap on the “Quantity” button, enter the desired quantity and press the OK button. The quantity is now updated for the chosen item.
|
|Demo quantity modification.
|-
|Similarly, you can choose an item and setup a discount percentage for it.
|
|Demo adding discount.
|-
|You can also choose an item and modify the price. Note that the price change apples only for this invoice and not for the product master.
|
|Demo price change.
|-
|New or non-standard products can be added quickly by using the appropriate button. Provide a description, enter a price and choose a sales tax percentage. The new product is now added to the invoice.
|
|Show adding a product via “Not a predefined product / service”
|-
|Note that adding a new product in this manner does not add it to the product master. If you use the module Stock, you may also setup the module to decrease the stock automatically when a sale has been completed. Stock for predefined products can be made visible on TakePOS too. For more information on how to add Products and allocate Stock, please watch the tutorial videos on “Products and Services” and “Stock”.
|
|Show where we can see the stock when we add a new predefined product in TakePOS screen.
|-
|Global discount for the entire invoice can also be added. You can add a discount by price or discount by percentage. The discount has now been added to the invoice.
|
|Click on “Discount” and show the popup window. Add a discount amount.
|-
|The invoice is now ready for payment. Click or tap on the “Payment” button and enter the payment amount as paid. The “Excess Received” is clearly shown. Now, click or tap on the appropriate payment method. You can enter several payments for the same order.
|
|Enter a rounded value and click on CASH.
|-
|Once the total paid matches the amount on the invoice, the invoice status is modified to PAID. Click or tap on the print button to send the invoice to the printer.
|
|Click on PAID. Demo the Print option.
|-
|Note that the payments, invoice status and the POS terminal used to generate the invoice are saved and visible in the main Dolibarr interface as well. You can send the invoice by email, make a return or print a gift ticket.
|
|Click on the Invoice name to open the Dolibarr Invoice view and show the invoice. Show the send email option.
|-
|'''Using TakePOS for a restaurant'''
|
|
|-
|You can also use TakePOS for a restaurant to manage tables as well as the orders for those tables. For this, navigate to the setup of the module TakePOS and enable the feature for Restaurant.
|
|go into setup of module TakePOS To enable the feature for Restaurant
|-
|You can define the map of the levels, such as floor 1, floor 2 or level 1 and level 2. You can also define the position of each table with the editor.
|
|Show how to add tables
|-
|Use the TakePOS module as usual for restaurants. The difference is that you can choose a table when you take an order, and come back later to finish the invoice.
|
|Show how you can choose the level/table before making a new order
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. You can configure the number of terminals, format of the receipts that are generated as well as the banking and settlement parameters for each terminal.
|
|Transition to show the module settings page and show each settings tab.
|-
|For example, with TakePOS Connector, you can print directly, use scales etc.
|
|Show receipt tab in TakePOS setup
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|
|Standard ending with text and animation.
|}
 
[[Category:Video]]

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - TakePOS

2021-02-09T20:15:27Z

Pradeepv: Language-specific changes

{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

==='''Storyboard for Module TakePOS'''===
'''Video Title:''' TakePOS: Point of Sale in Dolibarr

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the “TakePOS Point of Sale” module in Dolibarr.
|
|Show the standard intro animation with video title “TakePOS: Point of Sale in Dolibarr”.
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|
|-
|Activate the module "POS TakePOS" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable related modules such as “Third Parties”, "Invoices", "Banks", "Categories" and “Products”.
|
|Enable the modules mentioned in the voice over
|-
|Grant permission on the “POS TakePOS” module as well as the related modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|
|Grant permissions on the “TakePOS” and “Products” modules.
|-
|'''Creating an Invoice via TakePOS'''
|
|
|-
|The TakePOS Dolibarr module allows make sales from computers and mobile terminals in any type of store including bar and restaurants. The user interface is fully compatible with touch screens, order printers, scales etc.
|
|Show a stock video footage of point of sale. Rapid zoom in to the screen and show the Dolibarr TakePOS screen on it.
|-
|Begin by choosing a terminal.
|
|Click on the button. Choose Terminal1.
|-
|Choose the customer or third party. This is optional, so you can also stay with a Generic customer.
|
|Click on the button and choose a third party.
|-
|The recent invoices show up based on the time of creation. Click or tap on a time to load the invoice.
|
|Click on a time to load the items billed.
|-
|You can also click or tap on “History” to view all the invoices generated for all customers. Click or tap on an invoice to load it.
|
|Click on History and show the popup. Click on an item to load the products.
|-
|If you want to start a new concurrent invoice, click or tap on the NEW button.
|
|Click on New.
|-
|Choose a category. The respective products are loaded. Click or tap on a product to add it to the invoice.
|
|Choose a category and product.
|-
|You can modify the quantity, price and discount. On the invoice, click or tap on a line item to highlight it. If you want to change the quantity, click or tap on the “Quantity” button, enter the desired quantity and press the OK button. The quantity is now updated for the chosen item.
|
|Demo quantity modification.
|-
|Similarly, you can choose an item and setup a discount percentage for it.
|
|Demo adding discount.
|-
|You can also choose an item and modify the price. Note that the price change apples only for this invoice and not for the product master.
|
|Demo price change.
|-
|New or non-standard products can be added quickly by using the appropriate button. Provide a description, enter a price and choose a sales tax percentage. The new product is now added to the invoice.
|
|Show adding a product via “Not a predefined product / service”
|-
|Note that adding a new product in this manner does not add it to the product master. If you use the module Stock, you may also setup the module to decrease the stock automatically when a sale has been completed. Stock for predefined products can be made visible on TakePOS too. For more information on how to add Products and allocate Stock, please watch the tutorial videos on “Products and Services” and “Stock”.
|
|Show where we can see the stock when we add a new predefined product in TakePOS screen.
|-
|Global discount for the entire invoice can also be added. You can add a discount by price or discount by percentage. The discount has now been added to the invoice.
|
|Click on “Discount” and show the popup window. Add a discount amount.
|-
|The invoice is now ready for payment. Click or tap on the “Payment” button and enter the payment amount as paid. The “Excess Received” is clearly shown. Now, click or tap on the appropriate payment method. You can enter several payments for the same order.
|
|Enter a rounded value and click on CASH.
|-
|Once the total paid matches the amount on the invoice, the invoice status is modified to PAID. Click or tap on the print button to send the invoice to the printer.
|
|Click on PAID. Demo the Print option.
|-
|You can send the invoice by email, make a return or print a gift ticket.
|
|Show this options.
|-
|Note that the payments, invoice status and the POS terminal used to generate the invoice are saved and visible in the main Dolibarr interface as well.
|
|Click on the Invoice name to open the Dolibarr Invoice view and show the invoice.
|-
|'''Using TakePOS for a restaurant'''
|
|
|-
|You can also use TakePOS for a restaurant to manage tables as well as the orders for those tables. For this, navigate to the setup of the module TakePOS and enable the feature for Restaurant.
|
|go into setup of module TakePOS To enable the feature for Restaurant
|-
|You can define the map of the levels, such as floor 1, floor 2 or level 1 and level 2. You can also define the position of each table with the editor.
|
|Show how to add tables
|-
|Use the TakePOS module as usual for restaurants. The difference is that you can choose a table when you take an order, and come back later to finish the invoice.
|
|Show how you can choose the level/table before making a new order
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. You can configure the number of terminals, format of the receipts that are generated as well as the banking and settlement parameters for each terminal.
|
|Transition to show the module settings page and show each settings tab.
|-
|For example, with TakePOS Connector, you can print directly, use scales etc.
|
|Show receipt tab in TakePOS setup
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|
|Standard ending with text and animation.
|}
 
[[Category:Video]]

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Membership management

2021-01-28T19:34:04Z

Pradeepv: Added Category

===='''Storyboard for Members Module'''====
'''Video Title:''' Member Management in Dolibarr

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video,
we will look at how to use the “Members” module for managing foundation members in Dolibarr.
|Show the standard intro animation with video title “Member Management in Dolibarr”.
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Members" from the menu Home - Setup - Modules.
|Enable the Members module.
|-
|Grant permission on the “Members” module for your users.
For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions".
|Grant permissions on the “Members” module.
|-
|'''Creating a Member'''
|
|-
|The Members module can be used to manage the members of a foundation and their subscription.
Click on the appropriate menu link to add a new member.
|From the Home dashboard, click on the Members menu. Click on New Member.
|-
|Provide a username and password.
|Enter a username and password
|-
|Choose a member type and the nature of the member.
|Choose a member type
|-
|Note that you can create new member types from the Member types menu.
Specify if subscription is required and if voting is allowed. Duration defines the membership duration.
|Click on Member types. Click on New and show the Member type creation screen.
|-
|Coming back to the member creation process, provide personal details such as the member’s name and address.
Click on the button to create the member.
|Transition back to Create Member screen.
|-
|Once created, the member is in the Draft status. Click on the “Validate” button to validate the member.
The status now changes to “Validated and awaiting subscription”.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|'''Adding a Subscription for the Member'''
|
|-
|Click on the “Subscriptions” tab and click on the appropriate button to create a subscription.
Choose the subscription start and end dates and enter the subscription amount.

Choose the appropriate complimentary action. Note that if the member is linked to a third party,

the invoice options can be chosen for the subscription transaction.

Otherwise, you can enter the relevant payment information to capture the payment details of the subscription transaction.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|'''Module Features'''
|
|-
|You can upload any files for the particular member by using the appropriate menu.
|Click Upload Files tab and upload a file.
|-
|The Events and Agenda tab captures all the events related to this member.
|Click the tab and show the events.
|-
|If you wish to terminate the member, click on the appropriate button.
|Show clicking Terminate and show the resulting popup.
|-
|Click on the “List” menu to list all the members.
The list views are also available based on the member status such as “Draft”, “Validated”,

“Up to date”, “Out of date” and “Terminated”.
|Show the list views.
|-
|“Statistics” provides a birds-eye-view of all members and member subscriptions.
|Show Statistics with filtering.
|-
|You can generate business cards for all members or specific members from the appropriate menu.
Choose a format and click on the button to generate the appropriate business cards in the PDF format,

which can them be sent for printing.
|Click and show the Members business cards menu.
|-
|Use the “Tags” menu to categorize members based on tags.
You can create your own custom tags and map members to those tags.
|Click the tags menu. Click on a tag to show the members listed for that tag.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module setup such as templates.
Also, like most other Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields and define default values or mandatory fields.
|Show creating a custom field and show it available in the creation page.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Standard ending with text and animation.
|}
[[Category:Video]]

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Membership management

2021-01-28T19:33:06Z

Pradeepv: Added storyboard for Members module

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - TakePOS

2021-01-28T12:09:16Z

Pradeepv: Added to Video category

==='''Storyboard for Module TakePOS'''===
'''Video Title:''' TakePOS: Point of Sale in Dolibarr

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the “TakePOS Point of Sale” module in Dolibarr.
|Show the standard intro animation with video title “TakePOS: Point of Sale in Dolibarr”.
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "POS TakePOS" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable related modules such as “Third Parties”, "Invoices" and “Products”.
|Enable the modules mentioned in the voice over
|-
|Grant permission on the “POS TakePOS” module as well as the related modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Grant permissions on the “TakePOS” and “Products” modules.
|-
|'''Creating an Invoice via TakePOS'''
|
|-
|The TakePOS Dolibarr module allows you to run point of sale terminals using computers or touch screen devices at retail stores like restaurants and bars.
|Show a stock video footage of point of sale. Rapid zoom in to the screen and show the Dolibarr TakePOS screen on it.
|-
|Begin by choosing a terminal.
|Click on the button. Choose Terminal1.
|-
|Choose the customer or third party. This is optional.
|Click on the button and choose a third party.
|-
|The recent invoices show up based on the time of creation. Click or tap on a time to load the invoice.
|Click on a time to load the items billed.
|-
|You can also click or tap on “History” to view all the invoices generated for all customers. Click or tap on an invoice to load it.
|Click on History and show the popup. Click on an item to load the products.
|-
|If you want to start a new invoice, click or tap on the NEW button.
|Click on New.
|-
|Choose a category. The respective products are loaded. Click or tap on a product to add it to the invoice.
|Choose a category and product.
|-
|You can modify the quantity, price and discount. On the invoice, click or tap on a line item to highlight it. If you want to change the quantity, click or tap on the “Quantity” button, enter the desired quantity and press the OK button. The quantity is now updated for the chosen line item.
|Demo quantity modification.
|-
|Similarly, you can choose a line item and setup a discount percentage for it.
|Demo adding discount.
|-
|You can also choose a line item and modify the price. Note that the price change apples only for this invoice and not for the product master.
|Demo price change.
|-
|New or non-standard products can be added quickly by using the appropriate button. Provide a description, enter a price and choose a sales tax percentage. The new product is now added to the invoice.
|Show adding a product via “Not a predefined product / service”
|-
|Note that adding a new product in this manner does not add it to the product master. Products need to be added via the Products and Services menu in Dolibarr. For more information on how to add Products and allocate Stock, please watch the tutorial videos on “Products and Services” and “Stock”.
|Transition and show the Dolibarr main menu. Click on the Products and Services menu. Click on “New Product” and show the product creation screen.
|-
|Global discount for the entire invoice can also be added. You can add a discount by price or discount by percentage. The discount has now been added to the invoice.
|Transition back to TakePOS screen. Click on “Discount” and show the popup window. Add a discount amount.
|-
|The invoice is now ready for payment. Click or tap on the “Payment” button and enter the payment amount as paid. The “Excess Received” is clearly shown. Now, click or tap on the appropriate payment method.
|Enter a rounded value and click on CASH.
|-
|The invoice status is modified to PAID. Click or tap on the print button to send the invoice to the printer.
|Click on PAID. Demo the Print option.
|-
|Note that the payment and invoice status are saved and visible in the main Dolibarr interface as well.
|Click on the Invoice name to open the Dolibarr Invoice view and show the invoice.
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. You can configure the number of terminals, format of the receipts that are generated as well as the banking and settlement parameters for each terminal.
|Transition to show the module settings page and show each settings tab.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Standard ending with text and animation.
|}
 
[[Category:Video]]

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - TakePOS

2021-01-28T12:07:46Z

Pradeepv: Adding Storyboard for TakePOS

=== '''Storyboard for Module TakePOS''' ===
'''Video Title:''' TakePOS: Point of Sale in Dolibarr

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the “TakePOS Point of Sale” module in Dolibarr.
|Show the standard intro animation with video title “TakePOS: Point of Sale in Dolibarr”.
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "POS TakePOS" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable related modules such as “Third Parties”, "Invoices" and “Products”.
|Enable the modules mentioned in the voice over
|-
|Grant permission on the “POS TakePOS” module as well as the related modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Grant permissions on the “TakePOS” and “Products” modules.
|-
|'''Creating an Invoice via TakePOS'''
|
|-
|The TakePOS Dolibarr module allows you to run point of sale terminals using computers or touch screen devices at retail stores like restaurants and bars.
|Show a stock video footage of point of sale. Rapid zoom in to the screen and show the Dolibarr TakePOS screen on it.
|-
|Begin by choosing a terminal.
|Click on the button. Choose Terminal1.
|-
|Choose the customer or third party. This is optional.
|Click on the button and choose a third party.
|-
|The recent invoices show up based on the time of creation. Click or tap on a time to load the invoice.
|Click on a time to load the items billed.
|-
|You can also click or tap on “History” to view all the invoices generated for all customers. Click or tap on an invoice to load it.
|Click on History and show the popup. Click on an item to load the products.
|-
|If you want to start a new invoice, click or tap on the NEW button.
|Click on New.
|-
|Choose a category. The respective products are loaded. Click or tap on a product to add it to the invoice.
|Choose a category and product.
|-
|You can modify the quantity, price and discount. On the invoice, click or tap on a line item to highlight it. If you want to change the quantity, click or tap on the “Quantity” button, enter the desired quantity and press the OK button. The quantity is now updated for the chosen line item.
|Demo quantity modification.
|-
|Similarly, you can choose a line item and setup a discount percentage for it.
|Demo adding discount.
|-
|You can also choose a line item and modify the price. Note that the price change apples only for this invoice and not for the product master.
|Demo price change.
|-
|New or non-standard products can be added quickly by using the appropriate button. Provide a description, enter a price and choose a sales tax percentage. The new product is now added to the invoice.
|Show adding a product via “Not a predefined product / service”
|-
|Note that adding a new product in this manner does not add it to the product master. Products need to be added via the Products and Services menu in Dolibarr. For more information on how to add Products and allocate Stock, please watch the tutorial videos on “Products and Services” and “Stock”.
|Transition and show the Dolibarr main menu. Click on the Products and Services menu. Click on “New Product” and show the product creation screen.
|-
|Global discount for the entire invoice can also be added. You can add a discount by price or discount by percentage. The discount has now been added to the invoice.
|Transition back to TakePOS screen. Click on “Discount” and show the popup window. Add a discount amount.
|-
|The invoice is now ready for payment. Click or tap on the “Payment” button and enter the payment amount as paid. The “Excess Received” is clearly shown. Now, click or tap on the appropriate payment method.
|Enter a rounded value and click on CASH.
|-
|The invoice status is modified to PAID. Click or tap on the print button to send the invoice to the printer.
|Click on PAID. Demo the Print option.
|-
|Note that the payment and invoice status are saved and visible in the main Dolibarr interface as well.
|Click on the Invoice name to open the Dolibarr Invoice view and show the invoice.
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. You can configure the number of terminals, format of the receipts that are generated as well as the banking and settlement parameters for each terminal.
|Transition to show the module settings page and show each settings tab.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Standard ending with text and animation.
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Purchase Orders

2021-01-28T09:10:12Z

Pradeepv:

{{TemplateAssoEn}}
{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

'''Story board for Module Purchase Orders:'''

==English==

'''Video Title:''' Purchase Orders
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Purchase Orders module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Vendors" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you may be interested in enabling other modules that interact with the Vendors module such as the modules Vendor Commercial Proposals, Invoices, etc, even if these are not required.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll down and enable the Vendors module. Enable also the Vendor Commercial Proposals and Invoices modules.
|-
|Grant permission on the "Vendors" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Purchase Order'''
|
|-
|A Purchase Order can be created from a vendor proposal that has been suggested by a vendor. Navigate to the vendor proposal and click on the "Create Order" button which is available only for vendor proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|Navigate to the vendor proposals list view. Choose a proposal. Click on the "Create Order" button.
|-
|In this case, the products or services defined in the vendor proposal are copied into the Purchase Order automatically.
|Highlight and show that the products have been copied over into the Purchase Order.
|-
|When a purchase order is created from a vendor proposal, like any other object created from another one in Dolibarr, the purchase order and the vendor proposal remain linked with each other. You can switch at any time from the Purchase order to the vendor proposal by using the links visible in the section "Related Objects".
|Show the automatically generated link under "Related Objects".
|-
|You can also make some links manually with any other object by using the "Link to" menu and choosing the object type and object to which the link must be created.
|Create a link manually.
|-
|You can also create a Purchase Order from scratch by clicking on "New Order" and entering all the details manually.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Choose the vendor for whom you are creating the Purchase Order. Choose the payment terms, payment type and planned date of delivery. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Choose a currency. Add any public or private notes. Click the "create" button to create the Purchase Order.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|You can now start adding the actual product or service and pricing information to your Purchase Order. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple products or services to the Purchase Order.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|'''Validating, Approving and Sending the Purchase Order'''
|
|-
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the Purchase Order.
|Click on Validate with an account that has no permission to approve purchase order (button must be 'Validate' and not 'Validate and approve')
|-
|Now, the Purchase Order can be approved. Approval must be done by a user with the permission for Purchase order approval. Note that if the user creating the purchase order has the permission to approve, the validation and approval will be in the same step.
|Click on Approve.
|-
|Now, the Purchase Order is ready to be sent to your vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Show the PDF file.
|-
|Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the Purchase Order are automatically included.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details. Show the email being sent.
|-
|Record that your purchase has been sent to the vendor. Click on the appropriate button, fill in the order date, order method and enter any comments to change the purchase order to the "Ordered" status.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|For recording receivables, use the appropriate button and provide the delivery date, the relevant delivery status and any comments to change the status of delivery corresponding to the purchase order. Note that if you enabled the module Reception, an enhanced process is also available to follow your vendor deliveries.
|Demo the flow for Classify Reception button.
|-
|'''Purchase Orders - Module Features'''
|
|-
|You can use the list view to view the list of Purchase Orders. The list is categorized based on the status of the Purchase Orders such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Ordered, Partially Received, All products received, Canceled and Refused.
|Show the list of POs. Show the various list views. Click on a PO to open the detailed view.
|-
|The Contacts and Addresses tab can be used to define explicit contacts - either business entities or people - to the Purchase Order, but this is optional.
|Show the contacts tab. Add a contact.
|-
|The "Item Receipts" tab lists all the items dispatched and received as part of the purchase order.
|Show the tab.
|-
|Use the "Linked files" section to add any file attachments to the Purchase Order.
|Show the linked files tab and upload an attachment.
|-
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the purchase order, such as creation, update, reception, etc.
|Show the events tab.
|-
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Purchase Order with all the details pre-filled.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|You can create a reception or invoice from the purchase order by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Invoices are covered in detail in the video tutorial 'Vendor invoices'.
|Show the appropriate buttons. Click on one of them to show the invoice creation screen.
|-
|You must decide, based to your own internal workflow, the order of events according to which you make the reception from the purchase order, you create and send the invoice, and you set the purchase order as billed. Like most other Dolibarr modules, the Dolibarr process can be customized to work according to how your existing company process works. So, you need not change your company process according to Dolibarr!
|Show a purchase order being fulfilled.
|-
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the purchase orders are being fulfilled. Use the filters such as Company and Vendor to view detailed statistics.
|Show the Statistics and fill in a filter.
|-
|In any page of the application, for example on the main dashboard, when the reference of a Purchase Order is mentioned, an orange flag alerts you when a Purchase Order is delayed. You can setup an offset - the number of days before or after the expiration date - to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|Go on main My dashboard page to show the widget "Orders" to show a PO with the exclamation flag and put the mouse on the flag so the tooltip "Late" appears.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup, for example, to generate an invoice automatically on purchase order validation or to set a Purchase order automatically to the paid status when an invoice is generated thanks to the Workflow module or to add a second approver if the amount is higher than a certain value.
|Navigate to the module settings for Purchase Orders.
|-
|Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your Purchase Orders, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your database of Purchase Orders.
|Show adding a custom field on a purchase order
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

==FRENCH TRANSLATION==

'''Video Title:''' Commandes Fournisseurs avec Dolibarr

'''Translated Video Title:''' Commandes Fournisseurs avec Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Translated Voice Over'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Purchase Orders module in Dolibarr.
|
Bienvenue dans ce tutoriel vidéo sur le système ERP et CRM Dolibarr. Cette vidéo explique comment utiliser le module "Commande Fournisseur" de Dolibarr.
|-
|'''2'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
'''Pré-requis'''
|-
|3
|Activate the module "Vendors" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you may be interested in enabling other modules that interact with the Vendors module such as the modules Vendor Commercial Proposals, Invoices, etc, even if these are not required.
|
Activez le module "Fournisseurs" à partir du menu Accueil - Configuration - Modules. Sachez que vous pouvez être intéressé par l'activation d'autres modules ayant une interaction avec le module "Fournisseurs", tels que les modules "Propositions commerciales fournisseurs", "Factures", etc. même si ceux-ci ne sont pas obligatoires.
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the "Vendors" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|
Accordez à vos utilisateurs les permissions sur le module "Fournisseurs". Pour plus d'informations sur la procédure de configuration des autorisations pour les utilisateurs, regardez notre vidéo "Utilisateurs, groupes et autorisations".
|-
|'''5'''
|'''Creating a Purchase Order'''
|
'''Création d'une commande fournisseur'''
|-
|6
|A Purchase Order can be created from a vendor proposal that has been suggested by your vendor. Navigate to the vendor proposal and click on the "Create Order" button which is available only for vendor proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|
Une commande d'achat peut être créée à partir d'une proposition commerciale qui a été proposée par un fournisseur. Accédez à la proposition du fournisseur et cliquez sur le bouton "Créer commande fournisseur" qui n'est disponible que pour les propositions qui ont été validées et acceptées.
|-
|7
|In this case, the products or services defined in the vendor proposal are copied into the Purchase Order automatically.
|
Les produits ou services définis dans la proposition du fournisseur sont alors automatiquement copiés dans la commande fournisseur.
|-
|8
|When a purchase order is created from a vendor proposal, like any other object created from another one in Dolibarr, the purchase order and the vendor proposal remain linked with each other. You can switch at any time from the Purchase order to the vendor proposal by using the links visible in the section "Related Objects".
|
Lorsqu'une commande est créée à partir d'une proposition de fournisseur, comme tout autre objet créé à partir d'une autre dans Dolibarr, la commande et la proposition de fournisseur restent liées entre elles. Vous pouvez passer à tout moment de la commande à la proposition du fournisseur en utilisant les liens visibles dans la section "Objets liés".
|-
|9
|You can also make some links manually with any other object by using the "Link to" menu and choosing the object type and object to which the link must be created.
|
Vous pouvez également créer vous-même des liens avec tout autre objet en utilisant le menu "Lien vers" et en choisissant le type d'objet et l'objet vers lequel le lien doit être créé.
|-
|10
|You can also create a Purchase Order from scratch by clicking on "New Order" and entering all the details manually.
|
Il est également possible de créer une commande d'achat à partir de zéro en cliquant sur "Nouvelle commande" et en entrant tous les détails directement.
|-
|11
|Choose the vendor for whom you are creating the Purchase Order. Choose the payment terms, payment type and planned date of delivery. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Choose a currency. Add any public or private notes. Click the "create" button to create the Purchase Order.
|
Choisissez le fournisseur pour lequel vous créez la commande. Indiquez les conditions de paiement, le type de paiement et la date de livraison prévue. Si le module "Projet" est activé, vous pouvez choisir un projet. Ajoutez des notes, publiques qui seront potentiellement vues par le fournisseur, ou privées. Cliquez sur le bouton "créer" pour créer la commande d'achat.
|-
|12
|You can now start adding the actual product or service and pricing information to your Purchase Order. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple products or services to the Purchase Order.
|
Le produit ou service et les informations tarifaires peuvent maintenant être ajoutés à votre commande. Ajoutez le nom du service ou choisissez l'un de vos produits ou services prédéfinis. Indiquez un taux de taxe si nécessaire. Entrez le prix, la quantité et toute remise applicable. Vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs produits ou services à la même commande d'achat.
|-
|'''13'''
|'''Validating, Approving and Sending the Purchase Order'''
|
'''Validation, approbation et envoi de la commande'''
|-
|14
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the Purchase Order.
|
Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur "Valider" pour finaliser la commande d'achat.
|-
|15
|Now, the Purchase Order can be approved. Approval must be done by a user with the permission for Purchase order approval. Note that if the user creating the purchase order has the permission to approve, the validation and approval will be in the same step.
|
La commande peut maintenant être approuvée. Un utilisateur ayant la permission d'approuver les commandes d'achat doit l'approuver. Sachez que si l'utilisateur qui crée la commande a la permission d'approuver, la validation et l'approbation se feront au cours de la même étape.
|-
|16
|Now, the Purchase Order is ready to be sent to your vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|
Maintenant, la commande peut être envoyée au fournisseur. Un modèle par défaut peut être utilisé pour générer le fichier PDF.
|-
|17
|Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the Purchase Order are automatically included.
|
Cliquez sur le bouton "Envoyer email". Vous pouvez maintenant remplir le ou les destinataire. Tous les autres détails de la commande sont automatiquement pré-remplis.
|-
|18
|Record that your purchase has been sent to the vendor. Click on the appropriate button, fill in the order date, order method and enter any comments to change the purchase order to the "Ordered" status.
|
Vérifiez que votre achat a été envoyé au fournisseur. Cliquez sur le bouton qui convient, saisissez la date et le mode de commande, puis entrez vos commentaires éventuels pour faire passer la commande d'achat à l'état "Commandé".
|-
|19
|For recording receivables, use the appropriate button and provide the delivery date, the relevant delivery status and any comments to change the status of delivery corresponding to the purchase order. Note that if you enabled the module Reception, an enhanced process is also available to follow your vendor deliveries.
|
Pour enregistrer les réceptions, utilisez le bouton qui convient et saisissez la date de livraison, le statut de livraison correspondant et tout commentaire pour modifier le statut de livraison correspondant à la commande. Sachez que si vous avez activé le module Réception, un processus amélioré est également disponible pour suivre les livraisons de vos fournisseurs.
|-
|'''20'''
|'''Purchase Orders - Module Features'''
|
'''Commandes - Caractéristiques du module'''
|-
|21
|You can use the list view to view the list of Purchase Orders. The list is categorized based on the status of the Purchase Orders such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Ordered, Partially Received, All products received, Canceled and Refused.
|
Utilisez la vue liste pour consulter la liste des commandes d'achat. La liste est classée en fonction du statut des commandes : brouillon, validée, approuvée, commandée, partiellement reçue, tous les produits reçus, annulée et refusée.
|-
|22
|The Contacts and Addresses tab can be used to define explicit contacts - either business entities or people - to the Purchase Order, but this is optional.
|
L'onglet Contacts et adresses peut être utilisé pour définir des contacts explicites à la commande d'achat - soit des contacts de sociétés, soit des utilisateurs, mais ceci est facultatif.
|-
|23
|The "Item Receipts" tab lists all the items dispatched and received as part of the purchase order.
|
L'onglet "Reception d'articles" énumère tous les articles reçus dans le cadre de la commande fournisseur.
|-
|24
|Use the "Linked files" section to add any file attachments to the Purchase Order.
|
Utilisez la section "Fichiers liés" pour ajouter toute pièce jointe au bon de commande d'achat.
|-
|25
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the purchase order, such as creation, update, reception, etc.
|
L'onglet "Événements ou agenda" vous donnera une liste complète de tous les événements passés et à venir liés à la commande d'achat, tels que la création, la mise à jour, les réceptions, etc.
|-
|26
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Purchase Order with all the details pre-filled.
|
Utilisez le bouton "Cloner" pour créer une commande similaire avec tous les détails pré-remplis.
|-
|27
|You can create a reception or invoice from the purchase order by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Invoices are covered in detail in the video tutorial 'Vendor invoices'.
|
Vous pouvez créer une réception ou une facture fournisseur à partir de la commande d'achat en cliquant sur les boutons qui conviennent. Les factures fournisseurs sont traitées en détail dans le tutoriel vidéo "Factures fournisseurs".
|-
|28
|You must decide, based to your own internal workflow, the order of events according to which you make the reception from the purchase order, you create and send the invoice, and you set the purchase order as billed. Like most other Dolibarr modules, the Dolibarr process can be customized to work according to how your existing company process works. So, you need not change your company process according to Dolibarr!
|
Selon votre propre flux de travail interne, il vous faut décider l'ordre des événements selon lequel vous effectuerez la réception à partir de la commande, vous créerez et enverrez la facture, et vous définissez la commande comme étant facturée. Comme la plupart des autres modules Dolibarr, le processus Dolibarr peut être personnalisé pour fonctionner selon le fonctionnement de votre processus d'entreprise existant. Ainsi, vous n'avez pas besoin de modifier votre processus d'entreprise dans Dolibarr !
|-
|29
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the purchase orders are being fulfilled. Use the filters such as Company and Vendor to view detailed statistics.
|
Les "statistiques" offrent une vue d'ensemble des commandes d'achats. Utilisez les filtres tels que le "Tiers", la catégorie des fournisseurs pour afficher des statistiques détaillées.
|-
|30
|In any page of the application, for example on the main dashboard, when the reference of a Purchase Order is mentioned, an orange flag alerts you when a Purchase Order is delayed. You can setup an offset - the number of days before or after the expiration date - to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|
Dans n'importe quelle page de l'application, par exemple sur le tableau de bord principal, lorsque la référence d'une commande d'achat est mentionnée, une alerte est donnée par un panneau orange lorsqu'une commande d'achat est en retard. Il est possible de définir un décalage - le nombre de jours avant ou après la date d'expiration - pour décider quand l'alerte visuelle "Retard" doit être affichée.
|-
|31
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup, for example, to generate an invoice automatically on purchase order validation or to set a Purchase order automatically to the paid status when an invoice is generated thanks to the Workflow module or to add a second approver if the amount is higher than a certain value.
|
Il existe également de nombreuses autres fonctionnalités qui peuvent être activées à partir de la configuration, par exemple, pour générer automatiquement une facture lors de la validation de la commande d'achat ou pour mettre automatiquement une commande à l'état payé lorsqu'une facture est générée grâce au module Workflow ou encore pour ajouter un second approbateur si le montant est supérieur à une certaine valeur, etc...
|-
|32
|Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your Purchase Orders, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your database of Purchase Orders.
|
De plus, comme pour la plupart des modules de Dolibarr, vous pouvez ajouter vos propres champs personnalisés pour décrire votre commande d'achat, définir des valeurs par défaut ou des champs obligatoires et vous pouvez utiliser le module d'exportation pour exporter votre base de données de commandes.
|-
|33
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Merci d'avoir suivi ce tutoriel vidéo. Visitez le site www.dolibarr.org pour en savoir plus.
|}

==SPANISH TRANSLATION==

'''Video Title:''' Purchase Orders in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Translated Voice Over'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Purchase Orders module in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenido a este video tutorial sobre el sistema ERP y CRM Dolibarr. En este vídeo, veremos cómo utilizar el módulo de Pedidos de Compra en Dolibarr.
|-
|'''2'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|Requisitos Previos
|-
|3
|Activate the module "Vendors" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you may be interested in enabling other modules that interact with the Vendors module such as the modules Vendor Commercial Proposals, Invoices, etc, even if these are not required.
|Activar el módulo "Proveedores " en el menú Inicio - Configuración - Módulos. Tenga en cuenta que podría ser interesante habilitar otros módulos que interactúan con el módulo "Proveedores" como los módulos "Presupuestos de Proveedores", "Facturas y Abonos", etc., aunque no sean necesarios.
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the "Vendors" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Conceda permiso al módulo "Proveedores" a sus usuarios. Para obtener información más avanzada sobre cómo configurar los permisos de los usuarios, puede ver nuestro video "Usuarios, Grupos y Permisos".
|-
|'''5'''
|'''Creating a Purchase Order'''
|Creación de un Pedido de Compra
|-
|6
|A Purchase Order is usually created from a vendor proposal that has been accepted by your vendor. Navigate to the vendor proposal and click on the "Create Order" button which is available only for vendor proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|Un pedido de compra suele crearse a partir de un presupuesto de proveedor que ha sido aceptado por su proveedor. Navegue hasta el presupuesto de proveedor y haga clic en el botón "Crear Pedido", que sólo está disponible para presupuestos de proveedores que hayan sido validados y aceptados.
|-
|7
|In this case, the products or services defined in the vendor proposal are copied into the Purchase Order automatically.
|En este caso, los productos o servicios definidos en el presupuesto de proveedor se copian automáticamente en el pedido a proveedor.
|-
|8
|When a purchase order is created from a vendor proposal, like any other object created from another one in Dolibarr, the purchase order and the vendor proposal remain linked with each other. You can switch at any time from the Purchase order to the vendor proposal by using the links visible in the section "Related Objects".
|Cuando se crea un pedido a proveedor a partir de un presupuesto de proveedor, como cualquier otro objeto creado a partir de otro en Dolibarr, el pedido a proveedor y el presupuesto de proveedor permanecen vinculados entre sí. Puede pasar en cualquier momento del Pedido al presupuesto de proveedor utilizando los enlaces visibles en la sección "Objetos relacionados".
|-
|9
|You can also make some links manually with any other object by using the "Link to" menu and choosing the object type and object to which the link must be created.
|También puede realizar manualmente algunos enlaces con cualquier otro objeto utilizando el menú "Enlazar a..." y seleccionando el tipo de objeto y el objeto con el que se debe crear el enlace.
|-
|10
|You can also create a Purchase Order from scratch by clicking on "New Order" and entering all the details manually.
|También puede crear una Pedido desde cero haciendo clic en "Nuevo Pedido" e introduciendo todos los detalles manualmente.
|-
|11
|Choose the vendor for whom you are creating the Purchase Order. Choose the payment terms, payment type and planned date of delivery. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Choose a currency. Add any public or private notes. Click the "create" button to create the Purchase Order.
|Seleccione el proveedor para el que está creando el Pedido de Proveedor. Seleccione las condiciones de pago, la clase de pago y la fecha de entrega prevista. Si el módulo "Proyecto" está activado, puede elegir un proyecto. Elija una moneda. Añada cualquier nota pública o privada. Haga clic en el botón "crear" para crear el Pedido de Proveedor.
|-
|12
|You can now start adding the actual product or service and pricing information to your Purchase Order. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple products or services to the Purchase Order.
|Ahora puede comenzar a añadir el producto o servicio real y la información de precios a su Pedido de Proveedor. Añada el nombre del servicio o elija uno de sus servicios predefinidos. Elija una tabla de impuestos si es pertinente. Introduzca el precio unitario, la cantidad y cualquier descuento correspondiente. Puede añadir varios productos o servicios al Pedido de Proveedor.
|-
|'''13'''
|'''Validating, Approving and Sending the Purchase Order'''
|Validación, Aprobación y Envío del Pedido de Proveedor
|-
|14
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the Purchase Order.
|Una vez que haya terminado, haga clic en "Validar" para finalizar el Pedido de Proveedor.
|-
|15
|Now, the Purchase Order can be approved. Approval must be done by a user with the permission for Purchase order approval. Note that if the user creating the purchase order has the permission to approve, the validation and approval will be in the same step.
|Ahora, el Pedido de Proveedor puede ser aprobado. La aprobación debe ser hecha por un usuario con permiso para la aprobación de Pedido de Proveedor. Tenga en cuenta que si el usuario que crea el pedido de proveedor tiene el permiso para aprobar, la validación y la aprobación se harán en el mismo paso.
|-
|16
|Now, the Purchase Order is ready to be sent to your vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Ahora, el Pedido de Proveedor está lista para ser enviada a su proveedor. Se utiliza una plantilla predeterminada para el archivo PDF generado.
|-
|17
|Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the Purchase Order are automatically included.
|Haga clic en el botón "Enviar E-mail". Ahora puede rellenar los datos del receptor. Todos los demás detalles del Pedido de Proveedor se incluyen de forma automática.
|-
|18
|Record that your purchase has been sent to the vendor. Click on the appropriate button, fill in the order date, order method and enter any comments to change the purchase order to the "Ordered" status.
|Registre que su pedido ha sido enviado al proveedor. Haga clic en el botón apropiado, rellene la fecha de pedido, el método de pedido e introduzca cualquier comentario para cambiar la orden de compra al estado "Pedido".
|-
|19
|For recording receivables, use the appropriate button and provide the delivery date, the relevant delivery status and any comments to change the status of delivery corresponding to the purchase order. Note that if you enabled the module Reception, an enhanced process is also available to follow your vendor deliveries.
|Para registrar los pedidos recibidos, utilice el botón apropiado e indique la fecha de entrega, el estado de entrega pertinente y cualquier comentario para cambiar el estado de entrega correspondiente al pedido de compra. Tenga en cuenta que si habilitó el módulo Recepción, también está disponible un proceso mejorado para seguir las entregas de su proveedor.
|-
|'''20'''
|'''Purchase Orders - Module Features'''
|Pedidos de Proveedor - Características del Módulo
|-
|21
|You can use the list view to view the list of Purchase Orders. The list is categorized based on the status of the Purchase Orders such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Ordered, Partially Received, All products received, Canceled and Refused.
|Puede utilizar la vista de lista para ver la lista de Pedidos de Proveedor. La lista se clasifica en función del estado de los Pedidos de Proveedor, como Borrador, Validado, Aprobado, Pedido, Recibido parcialmente, Todos los productos recibidos, Anulado y Rechazado.
|-
|22
|The Contacts and Addresses tab can be used to define explicit contacts - either business entities or people - to the Purchase Order, but this is optional.
|La pestaña Contactos/Direcciones se puede utilizar para definir contactos explícitos - ya sea entidades comerciales o personas - para el Pedido de Proveedor, pero esto es opcional.
|-
|23
|The "Item Receipts" tab lists all the items dispatched and received as part of the purchase order.
|La pestaña "Recepción de Productos" enumera todos los artículos enviados y recibidos como parte de la orden de compra.
|-
|24
|Use the "Linked files" section to add any file attachments to the Purchase Order.
|Utilice la sección "Documentos" para agregar cualquier archivo adjunto al Pedido de Proveedor.
|-
|25
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the purchase order, such as creation, update, reception, etc.
|La pestaña "Eventos" le ofrecerá una lista completa de todos los eventos pasados y futuros relacionados conel Pedido de Proveedor, tales como la creación, actualización, recepción, etc.
|-
|26
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Purchase Order with all the details pre-filled.
|Utilice el botón "Copiar" para crear un Pedido de Proveedor similar con todos los detalles ya rellenados.
|-
|27
|You can create a reception or invoice from the purchase order by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Invoices are covered in detail in the video tutorial 'Vendor invoices'.
|Puede crear una recepción o factura a partir del Pedido de Proveedor haciendo clic en los botones correspondientes. Las facturas se tratan en detalle en el video tutorial "Facturas de Proveedores".
|-
|28
|You must decide, based to your own internal workflow, the order of events according to which you make the reception from the purchase order, you create and send the invoice, and you set the purchase order as billed. Like most other Dolibarr modules, the Dolibarr process can be customized to work according to how your existing company process works. So, you need not change your company process according to Dolibarr!
|Debe decidir, en función de su propio flujo de trabajo interno, el orden de los eventos según el cual realiza la recepción desde el Pedido de Proveedor, crea y envía la factura, y establece un Pedido de Proveedor como facturado. Como la mayoría de los otros módulos de Dolibarr, el procedimiento de Dolibarr puede ser personalizado para funcionar según el funcionamiento del proceso de su empresa. Por lo tanto, ¡no necesita cambiar su proceso de empresa de acuerdo a Dolibarr!
|-
|29
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the purchase orders are being fulfilled. Use the filters such as Company and Vendor to view detailed statistics.
|Las "estadísticas" permiten ver a simple vista cómo se realizan los Pedido de Proveedor. Utilice los filtros como Empresa y Proveedor para ver las estadísticas detalladas.
|-
|30
|In any page of the application, for example on the main dashboard, when the reference of a Purchase Order is mentioned, an orange flag alerts you when a Purchase Order is delayed. You can setup an offset - the number of days before or after the expiration date - to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|En cualquier página de la aplicación, por ejemplo en el tablero principal, cuando se menciona la referencia de un pedido de compra, una bandera naranja le avisa cuando un pedido de compra se retrasa. Puede configurar una compensación - el número de días antes o después de la fecha de vencimiento - para decidir cuándo debe mostrarse la alerta visual de "Retraso".
|-
|31
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup, for example, to generate an invoice automatically on purchase order validation or to set a Purchase order automatically to the paid status when an invoice is generated thanks to the Workflow module or to add a second approver if the amount is higher than a certain value.
|También hay muchas otras funciones que pueden activarse desde la configuración, por ejemplo, para generar una factura automáticamente al validar un pedido de proveedor o para establecer un pedido de proveedor automáticamente al estado pagado cuando se genera una factura gracias al módulo de flujo de trabajo o para añadir un segundo autorizador si el importe es superior a un valor determinado.
|-
|32
|Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your Purchase Orders, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your database of Purchase Orders.
|Además, como la mayoría de los módulos de Dolibarr, puede añadir sus propios campos personalizados para describir sus Pedidos de Proveedor, definir valores por defecto o campos obligatorios y puede utilizar el módulo de exportación para exportar su base de datos de Pedidos de Proveedor.
|-
|33
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Gracias por ver este video tutorial. Visite www.dolibarr.org para obtener más información.
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - MRP (BOM and MO)

2021-01-18T20:03:21Z

Pradeepv: Removed repetition

{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

'''Story board for Module Bills of Materials and Manufacturing Orders:'''

'''Video Title:''' Bills of Materials and Manufacturing Orders

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Bills of Materials and Manufacturing Orders modules in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module Bills of Materials and the module Manufacturing Orders from the menu Home - Setup - Modules.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Bills of Materials module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the module "Manufacturing Orders".
|-
|Grant permission on the Bills of Materials module and the Manufacturing Orders module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Bill of Materials'''
|
|-
|A bill of material is the list of the raw materials, components, parts, and the quantities of goods needed to manufacture an end product
|Show the list view of BOMs.
|-
|Let's create a new Bill of Materials. Provide a label. Choose the actual end product that is to be created with this Bill of Materials.
|Demo BOM creation.
|-
|Choose the quantity and provide a description.
|Demo BOM creation.
|-
|Provide the estimated time duration to manufacture the chosen product.
|Demo BOM creation.
|-
|Choose the warehouse for production and click the button to continue.
|Demo BOM creation.
|-
|Now, you are ready to specify the raw materials belonging to this Bill of Materials. Type the name and choose from the pre-populated list of materials. Provide the quantity as well as other attributes and click on the "Add" button. You can add multiple raw materials one by one.
|Demo BOM creation.
|-
|Use the "Linked files" menu to add any file attachments to the Bill of Materials.
|Attach a file.
|-
|Once you are done, click on the "Validate" button.
|Click Validate.
|-
|The "Events" tab captures the complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the bill of materials, such as creation, update etc.
|Show the Events tab.
|-
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Bill of Materials without having to re-enter all the information.
|Demo the Clone button.
|-
|'''Creating a Manufacturing Order'''
|
|-
|Once the bill of materials has been created, the next step in the manufacturing process is the creation of a manufacturing order.
|Show the list view of MOs.
|-
|There are two ways to create a Manufacturing Order. You can do it from the "New" menu item under Manufacturing Orders.
|Click and show the "New Manufacturing Order" menu.
|-
|You can also use the "Create MO" button available in the Bill of Materials to create a Manufacturing Order for that Bill of Materials.
|Show the detailed view of a BOM. Click on the "Create MO" button.
|-
|The "Bill of Materials"-specific parameters are pre-filled. Provide a label and quantity to produce. All other fields are optional.
|Demo the MO creation.
|-
|Review the raw materials listed at the bottom, which will be consumed for this order. Click on the button to create the Manufacturing Order.
|Demo the MO creation.
|-
|Click the "Validate" button to approve the Manufacturing Order for production.
|Click the Validate button.
|-
|'''Consuming and producing'''
|
|-
|Open a Manufacturing Order. The "Production" tab tracks consumption and production.
|Show the Production tab.
|-
|Click on "Consume or produce". You can define quantity to produce and consume. Once validated, stock movements will be recorded.
|Show the production by entering a small quantity to consume.
|-
|Clicking on "Consume and produce (all)" as the same effect than "Consume or Produce" button. But all remain quantities to consume and produce are automatically filled.
Status of Manufacturing Order will be automatically modified if all quantities are consumed and produced. You can also modify it manually.
|Show the production and show that status once production is done
|-
|'''Other features'''
|
|-
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Manufacturing Order without having to re-enter all the information.
|Click the Clone button.
|-
|The "Stock movements" tab tracks the relevant stock movements done for consumption and production.
|Show the Stock Movements tab.
|-
|Use the "Linked files" menu to add any file attachments to the Manufacturing Order.
|Attach a file.
|-
|The "Events" tab captures the complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the Manufacturing Order, such as creation, update etc.
|Show the Events tab.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module setup such as templates and watermarks. Also, like most other Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your Bills of Materials and Manufacturing Orders and define default values or mandatory fields. You can use the import or export modules to import or export your Bill of Materials and Manufacturing Orders database.
|Show the options.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Purchase Orders

2021-01-18T15:48:02Z

Pradeepv: Added FR and ES translations

{{TemplateAssoEn}}
{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

'''Story board for Module Purchase Orders:'''

'''Video Title:''' Purchase Orders
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Purchase Orders module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Vendors" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you may be interested in enabling other modules that interact with the Vendors module such as the modules Vendor Commercial Proposals, Invoices, etc, even if these are not required.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll down and enable the Vendors module. Enable also the Vendor Commercial Proposals and Invoices modules.
|-
|Grant permission on the "Vendors" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Purchase Order'''
|
|-
|A Purchase Order is usually created from a vendor proposal that has been accepted by your vendor. Navigate to the vendor proposal and click on the "Create Order" button which is available only for vendor proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|Navigate to the vendor proposals list view. Choose a proposal. Click on the "Create Order" button.
|-
|In this case, the products or services defined in the vendor proposal are copied into the Purchase Order automatically.
|Highlight and show that the products have been copied over into the Purchase Order.
|-
|When a purchase order is created from a vendor proposal, like any other object created from another one in Dolibarr, the purchase order and the vendor proposal remain linked with each other. You can switch at any time from the Purchase order to the vendor proposal by using the links visible in the section "Related Objects".
|Show the automatically generated link under "Related Objects".
|-
|You can also make some links manually with any other object by using the "Link to" menu and choosing the object type and object to which the link must be created.
|Create a link manually.
|-
|You can also create a Purchase Order from scratch by clicking on "New Order" and entering all the details manually.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Choose the vendor for whom you are creating the Purchase Order. Choose the payment terms, payment type and planned date of delivery. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Choose a currency. Add any public or private notes. Click the "create" button to create the Purchase Order.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|You can now start adding the actual product or service and pricing information to your Purchase Order. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple products or services to the Purchase Order.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|'''Validating, Approving and Sending the Purchase Order'''
|
|-
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the Purchase Order.
|Click on Validate with an account that has no permission to approve purchase order (button must be 'Validate' and not 'Validate and approve')
|-
|Now, the Purchase Order can be approved. Approval must be done by a user with the permission for Purchase order approval. Note that if the user creating the purchase order has the permission to approve, the validation and approval will be in the same step.
|Click on Approve.
|-
|Now, the Purchase Order is ready to be sent to your vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Show the PDF file.
|-
|Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the Purchase Order are automatically included.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details. Show the email being sent.
|-
|Record that your purchase has been sent to the vendor. Click on the appropriate button, fill in the order date, order method and enter any comments to change the purchase order to the "Ordered" status.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|For recording receivables, use the appropriate button and provide the delivery date, the relevant delivery status and any comments to change the status of delivery corresponding to the purchase order. Note that if you enabled the module Reception, an enhanced process is also available to follow your vendor deliveries.
|Demo the flow for Classify Reception button.
|-
|'''Purchase Orders - Module Features'''
|
|-
|You can use the list view to view the list of Purchase Orders. The list is categorized based on the status of the Purchase Orders such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Ordered, Partially Received, All products received, Canceled and Refused.
|Show the list of POs. Show the various list views. Click on a PO to open the detailed view.
|-
|The Contacts and Addresses tab can be used to define explicit contacts - either business entities or people - to the Purchase Order, but this is optional.
|Show the contacts tab. Add a contact.
|-
|The "Item Receipts" tab lists all the items dispatched and received as part of the purchase order.
|Show the tab.
|-
|Use the "Linked files" section to add any file attachments to the Purchase Order.
|Show the linked files tab and upload an attachment.
|-
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the purchase order, such as creation, update, reception, etc.
|Show the events tab.
|-
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Purchase Order with all the details pre-filled.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|You can create a reception or invoice from the purchase order by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Invoices are covered in detail in the video tutorial 'Vendor invoices'.
|Show the appropriate buttons. Click on one of them to show the invoice creation screen.
|-
|You must decide, based to your own internal workflow, the order of events according to which you make the reception from the purchase order, you create and send the invoice, and you set the purchase order as billed. Like most other Dolibarr modules, the Dolibarr process can be customized to work according to how your existing company process works. So, you need not change your company process according to Dolibarr!
|Show a purchase order being fulfilled.
|-
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the purchase orders are being fulfilled. Use the filters such as Company and Vendor to view detailed statistics.
|Show the Statistics and fill in a filter.
|-
|In any page of the application, for example on the main dashboard, when the reference of a Purchase Order is mentioned, an orange flag alerts you when a Purchase Order is delayed. You can setup an offset - the number of days before or after the expiration date - to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|Go on main My dashboard page to show the widget "Orders" to show a PO with the exclamation flag and put the mouse on the flag so the tooltip "Late" appears.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup, for example, to generate an invoice automatically on purchase order validation or to set a Purchase order automatically to the paid status when an invoice is generated thanks to the Workflow module or to add a second approver if the amount is higher than a certain value.
|Navigate to the module settings for Purchase Orders.
|-
|Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your Purchase Orders, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your database of Purchase Orders.
|Show adding a custom field on a purchase order
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}
'''FRENCH TRANSLATION:'''

'''Video Title:''' Purchase Orders in Dolibarr

'''Translated Video Title:'''
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Translated Voice Over'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Purchase Orders module in Dolibarr.
|

Bienvenue à ce tutoriel vidéo sur le système ERP et CRM Dolibarr. Cette vidéo explique comment utiliser le module "Commande" de Dolibarr.
|-
|'''2'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|

'''Pré-requis'''
|-
|3
|Activate the module "Vendors" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you may be interested in enabling other modules that interact with the Vendors module such as the modules Vendor Commercial Proposals, Invoices, etc, even if these are not required.
|

Activez le module " Fournisseurs " à partir du menu Accueil - Configuration - Modules. Sachez que vous pouvez être intéressé par l'activation d'autres modules ayant une interaction avec le module " Fournisseurs ", tels que les modules " Propositions commerciales des fournisseurs ", " Factures et Avoirs ", etc. même si ceux-ci ne sont pas obligatoires.
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the "Vendors" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|

Accordez à vos utilisateurs la permission d'utiliser le module " Fournisseurs ". Pour plus d'informations sur la procédure de configuration des autorisations pour les utilisateurs, regardez notre vidéo "Utilisateurs, groupes et autorisations".
|-
|'''5'''
|'''Creating a Purchase Order'''
|

'''Création d'une commande'''
|-
|6
|A Purchase Order is usually created from a vendor proposal that has been accepted by your vendor. Navigate to the vendor proposal and click on the "Create Order" button which is available only for vendor proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|

Une commande est généralement créée à partir d'une proposition de fournisseur qui a été acceptée par votre fournisseur. Accédez à la proposition du fournisseur et cliquez sur le bouton "Créer une commande" qui n'est disponible que pour les propositions de fournisseurs qui ont été validées et acceptées.
|-
|7
|In this case, the products or services defined in the vendor proposal are copied into the Purchase Order automatically.
|

Les produits ou services définis dans la proposition du fournisseur sont alors automatiquement copiés dans la commande.
|-
|8
|When a purchase order is created from a vendor proposal, like any other object created from another one in Dolibarr, the purchase order and the vendor proposal remain linked with each other. You can switch at any time from the Purchase order to the vendor proposal by using the links visible in the section "Related Objects".
|

En effet, lorsqu'une commande est créée à partir d'une proposition de fournisseur, comme tout autre objet créé à partir d'une autre dans Dolibarr, la commande et la proposition de fournisseur restent liées entre elles. Vous pouvez passer à tout moment de la commande à la proposition du fournisseur en utilisant les liens visibles dans la section "Objets liés".
|-
|9
|You can also make some links manually with any other object by using the "Link to" menu and choosing the object type and object to which the link must be created.
|

Vous pouvez également créer vous-même des liens avec tout autre objet en utilisant le menu "Lien vers" et en choisissant le type d'objet et l'objet vers lequel le lien doit être créé.
|-
|10
|You can also create a Purchase Order from scratch by clicking on "New Order" and entering all the details manually.
|

Il est également possible de créer une commande à partir de zéro en cliquant sur "Nouvelle commande" et en entrant tous les détails directement.
|-
|11
|Choose the vendor for whom you are creating the Purchase Order. Choose the payment terms, payment type and planned date of delivery. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Choose a currency. Add any public or private notes. Click the "create" button to create the Purchase Order.
|

Choisissez le fournisseur pour lequel vous créez la commande. Indiquez les conditions de paiement, le type de paiement et la date de livraison prévue. Si le module "Projet" est activé, vous pouvez choisir un projet. Choisissez une devise. Ajoutez des billets publics ou privés. Cliquez sur le bouton "créer" pour créer la commande.
|-
|12
|You can now start adding the actual product or service and pricing information to your Purchase Order. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple products or services to the Purchase Order.
|

Le produit ou service et les informations tarifaires peuvent maintenant être ajoutés à votre commande. Ajoutez le nom du service ou choisissez l'un de vos services prédéfinis. Indiquez une tranche de taxe si nécessaire. Entrez le coût net, la quantité et toute remise applicable. Vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs produits ou services à la commande.
|-
|'''13'''
|'''Validating, Approving and Sending the Purchase Order'''
|

'''Validation, approbation et envoi de la commande'''
|-
|14
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the Purchase Order.
|

Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur "Valider" pour finaliser la commande d'achat.
|-
|15
|Now, the Purchase Order can be approved. Approval must be done by a user with the permission for Purchase order approval. Note that if the user creating the purchase order has the permission to approve, the validation and approval will be in the same step.
|

La commande peut maintenant être approuvée. Un utilisateur ayant la permission d'approuver la commande doit l'approuver. Sachez que si l'utilisateur qui crée la commande a la permission d'approuver, la validation et l'approbation se feront au cours de la même étape.
|-
|16
|Now, the Purchase Order is ready to be sent to your vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|

Maintenant, la commande peut être envoyée à votre fournisseur. Un modèle par défaut est utilisé pour le fichier PDF généré.
|-
|17
|Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the Purchase Order are automatically included.
|

Cliquez sur le bouton "Envoyer un courriel". Vous pouvez maintenant remplir les détails du destinataire. Tous les autres détails de la commande sont automatiquement inclus.
|-
|18
|Record that your purchase has been sent to the vendor. Click on the appropriate button, fill in the order date, order method and enter any comments to change the purchase order to the "Ordered" status.
|

Vérifiez que votre achat a été envoyé au fournisseur. Cliquez sur le bouton qui convient, saisissez la date et le mode de commande, puis entrez vos commentaires éventuels pour faire passer la commande à l'état "commandé".
|-
|19
|For recording receivables, use the appropriate button and provide the delivery date, the relevant delivery status and any comments to change the status of delivery corresponding to the purchase order. Note that if you enabled the module Reception, an enhanced process is also available to follow your vendor deliveries.
|

Pour enregistrer les créances, utilisez le bouton qui convient et saisissez la date de livraison, le statut de livraison correspondant et tout commentaire pour modifier le statut de livraison correspondant à la commande. Sachez que si vous avez activé le module Réception, un processus amélioré est également disponible pour suivre les livraisons de vos fournisseurs.
|-
|'''20'''
|'''Purchase Orders - Module Features'''
|

'''Commandes - Caractéristiques du module'''
|-
|21
|You can use the list view to view the list of Purchase Orders. The list is categorized based on the status of the Purchase Orders such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Ordered, Partially Received, All products received, Canceled and Refused.
|

Utilisez la vue en liste pour consulter la liste des commandes. La liste est classée en fonction du statut des commandes, par exemple : projet, validée, approuvée, commandée, partiellement reçue, tous les produits reçus, annulée et refusée.
|-
|22
|The Contacts and Addresses tab can be used to define explicit contacts - either business entities or people - to the Purchase Order, but this is optional.
|

L'onglet Contacts et adresses peut être utilisé pour définir des contacts explicites - soit des entités commerciales, soit des personnes - avec la commande, mais cela est facultatif.
|-
|23
|The "Item Receipts" tab lists all the items dispatched and received as part of the purchase order.
|

L'onglet "Reçus d'articles" énumère tous les articles expédiés et reçus dans le cadre de la commande .
|-
|24
|Use the "Linked files" section to add any file attachments to the Purchase Order.
|

Utilisez la section "Fichiers liés" pour ajouter toute pièce jointe au bon de commande.
|-
|25
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the purchase order, such as creation, update, reception, etc.
|

L'onglet "Événements ou agenda" vous donnera une liste complète de tous les événements passés et à venir liés à la commande, tels que la création, la mise à jour, la réception, etc.
|-
|26
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Purchase Order with all the details pre-filled.
|

Utilisez le bouton "Cloner" pour créer une commande similaire avec tous les détails pré-remplis.
|-
|27
|You can create a reception or invoice from the purchase order by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Invoices are covered in detail in the video tutorial 'Vendor invoices'.
|

Vous pouvez créer une réception ou une facture et avoir à partir de la commande en cliquant sur les boutons qui conviennent. Les factures et avoirs sont traitées en détail dans le tutoriel vidéo "Factures et Avoirs des fournisseurs".
|-
|28
|You must decide, based to your own internal workflow, the order of events according to which you make the reception from the purchase order, you create and send the invoice, and you set the purchase order as billed. Like most other Dolibarr modules, the Dolibarr process can be customized to work according to how your existing company process works. So, you need not change your company process according to Dolibarr!
|

Selon votre propre flux de travail interne, il vous faut décider l'ordre des événements selon lequel vous effectuez la réception à partir de la commande, vous créez et envoyez la facture et avoir, et vous définissez la commande comme étant facturée. Comme la plupart des autres modules Dolibarr, le processus Dolibarr peut être personnalisé pour fonctionner selon le fonctionnement de votre processus d'entreprise existant. Ainsi, vous n'avez pas besoin de modifier votre processus d'entreprise selon Dolibarr !
|-
|29
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the purchase orders are being fulfilled. Use the filters such as Company and Vendor to view detailed statistics.
|

Les "statistiques" offrent une vue d'ensemble de la façon dont les commandes sont remplies. Utilisez les filtres tels que "Entreprise" et "Fournisseur" pour afficher des statistiques détaillées.
|-
|30
|In any page of the application, for example on the main dashboard, when the reference of a Purchase Order is mentioned, an orange flag alerts you when a Purchase Order is delayed. You can setup an offset - the number of days before or after the expiration date - to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|

Dans n'importe quelle page de l'application, par exemple sur le tableau de bord principal, lorsque la référence d'un ordre d'achat est mentionnée, une alerte est donnée par un drapeau orange lorsqu'un ordre d'achat est retardé. Il est possible de définir un décalage - le nombre de jours avant ou après la date d'expiration - pour décider quand l'alerte visuelle "Retard" doit être affichée.
|-
|31
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup, for example, to generate an invoice automatically on purchase order validation or to set a Purchase order automatically to the paid status when an invoice is generated thanks to the Workflow module or to add a second approver if the amount is higher than a certain value.
|

Il existe également de nombreuses autres fonctionnalités qui peuvent être activées à partir de la configuration, par exemple, pour générer automatiquement une facture et avoir lors de la validation de la commande ou pour mettre automatiquement une commande à l'état payé lorsqu'une facture et avoir est générée grâce au module de flux de travail ou pour ajouter un second approbateur si le montant est supérieur à une certaine valeur.
|-
|32
|Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your Purchase Orders, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your database of Purchase Orders.
|

De plus, comme la plupart des modules de Dolibarr, vous pouvez ajouter vos propres champs personnalisés pour décrire votre commande, définir des valeurs par défaut ou des champs obligatoires et vous pouvez utiliser le module d'exportation pour exporter votre base de données de commandes.
|-
|33
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Nous vous remercions de regarder ce tutoriel vidéo. Visitez le site www.dolibarr.org pour en savoir plus.
|}

'''SPANISH TRANSLATION:'''

'''Video Title:''' Purchase Orders in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Translated Voice Over'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Purchase Orders module in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenido a este video tutorial sobre el sistema ERP y CRM Dolibarr. En este vídeo, veremos cómo utilizar el módulo de Pedidos de Compra en Dolibarr.
|-
|'''2'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|Requisitos Previos
|-
|3
|Activate the module "Vendors" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you may be interested in enabling other modules that interact with the Vendors module such as the modules Vendor Commercial Proposals, Invoices, etc, even if these are not required.
|Activar el módulo "Proveedores " en el menú Inicio - Configuración - Módulos. Tenga en cuenta que podría ser interesante habilitar otros módulos que interactúan con el módulo "Proveedores" como los módulos "Presupuestos de Proveedores", "Facturas y Abonos", etc., aunque no sean necesarios.
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the "Vendors" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Conceda permiso al módulo "Proveedores" a sus usuarios. Para obtener información más avanzada sobre cómo configurar los permisos de los usuarios, puede ver nuestro video "Usuarios, Grupos y Permisos".
|-
|'''5'''
|'''Creating a Purchase Order'''
|Creación de un Pedido de Compra
|-
|6
|A Purchase Order is usually created from a vendor proposal that has been accepted by your vendor. Navigate to the vendor proposal and click on the "Create Order" button which is available only for vendor proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|Un pedido de compra suele crearse a partir de un presupuesto de proveedor que ha sido aceptado por su proveedor. Navegue hasta el presupuesto de proveedor y haga clic en el botón "Crear Pedido", que sólo está disponible para presupuestos de proveedores que hayan sido validados y aceptados.
|-
|7
|In this case, the products or services defined in the vendor proposal are copied into the Purchase Order automatically.
|En este caso, los productos o servicios definidos en el presupuesto de proveedor se copian automáticamente en el pedido a proveedor.
|-
|8
|When a purchase order is created from a vendor proposal, like any other object created from another one in Dolibarr, the purchase order and the vendor proposal remain linked with each other. You can switch at any time from the Purchase order to the vendor proposal by using the links visible in the section "Related Objects".
|Cuando se crea un pedido a proveedor a partir de un presupuesto de proveedor, como cualquier otro objeto creado a partir de otro en Dolibarr, el pedido a proveedor y el presupuesto de proveedor permanecen vinculados entre sí. Puede pasar en cualquier momento del Pedido al presupuesto de proveedor utilizando los enlaces visibles en la sección "Objetos relacionados".
|-
|9
|You can also make some links manually with any other object by using the "Link to" menu and choosing the object type and object to which the link must be created.
|También puede realizar manualmente algunos enlaces con cualquier otro objeto utilizando el menú "Enlazar a..." y seleccionando el tipo de objeto y el objeto con el que se debe crear el enlace.
|-
|10
|You can also create a Purchase Order from scratch by clicking on "New Order" and entering all the details manually.
|También puede crear una Pedido desde cero haciendo clic en "Nuevo Pedido" e introduciendo todos los detalles manualmente.
|-
|11
|Choose the vendor for whom you are creating the Purchase Order. Choose the payment terms, payment type and planned date of delivery. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Choose a currency. Add any public or private notes. Click the "create" button to create the Purchase Order.
|Seleccione el proveedor para el que está creando el Pedido de Proveedor. Seleccione las condiciones de pago, la clase de pago y la fecha de entrega prevista. Si el módulo "Proyecto" está activado, puede elegir un proyecto. Elija una moneda. Añada cualquier nota pública o privada. Haga clic en el botón "crear" para crear el Pedido de Proveedor.
|-
|12
|You can now start adding the actual product or service and pricing information to your Purchase Order. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple products or services to the Purchase Order.
|Ahora puede comenzar a añadir el producto o servicio real y la información de precios a su Pedido de Proveedor. Añada el nombre del servicio o elija uno de sus servicios predefinidos. Elija una tabla de impuestos si es pertinente. Introduzca el precio unitario, la cantidad y cualquier descuento correspondiente. Puede añadir varios productos o servicios al Pedido de Proveedor.
|-
|'''13'''
|'''Validating, Approving and Sending the Purchase Order'''
|Validación, Aprobación y Envío del Pedido de Proveedor
|-
|14
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the Purchase Order.
|Una vez que haya terminado, haga clic en "Validar" para finalizar el Pedido de Proveedor.
|-
|15
|Now, the Purchase Order can be approved. Approval must be done by a user with the permission for Purchase order approval. Note that if the user creating the purchase order has the permission to approve, the validation and approval will be in the same step.
|Ahora, el Pedido de Proveedor puede ser aprobado. La aprobación debe ser hecha por un usuario con permiso para la aprobación de Pedido de Proveedor. Tenga en cuenta que si el usuario que crea el pedido de proveedor tiene el permiso para aprobar, la validación y la aprobación se harán en el mismo paso.
|-
|16
|Now, the Purchase Order is ready to be sent to your vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Ahora, el Pedido de Proveedor está lista para ser enviada a su proveedor. Se utiliza una plantilla predeterminada para el archivo PDF generado.
|-
|17
|Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the Purchase Order are automatically included.
|Haga clic en el botón "Enviar E-mail". Ahora puede rellenar los datos del receptor. Todos los demás detalles del Pedido de Proveedor se incluyen de forma automática.
|-
|18
|Record that your purchase has been sent to the vendor. Click on the appropriate button, fill in the order date, order method and enter any comments to change the purchase order to the "Ordered" status.
|Registre que su pedido ha sido enviado al proveedor. Haga clic en el botón apropiado, rellene la fecha de pedido, el método de pedido e introduzca cualquier comentario para cambiar la orden de compra al estado "Pedido".
|-
|19
|For recording receivables, use the appropriate button and provide the delivery date, the relevant delivery status and any comments to change the status of delivery corresponding to the purchase order. Note that if you enabled the module Reception, an enhanced process is also available to follow your vendor deliveries.
|Para registrar los pedidos recibidos, utilice el botón apropiado e indique la fecha de entrega, el estado de entrega pertinente y cualquier comentario para cambiar el estado de entrega correspondiente al pedido de compra. Tenga en cuenta que si habilitó el módulo Recepción, también está disponible un proceso mejorado para seguir las entregas de su proveedor.
|-
|'''20'''
|'''Purchase Orders - Module Features'''
|Pedidos de Proveedor - Características del Módulo
|-
|21
|You can use the list view to view the list of Purchase Orders. The list is categorized based on the status of the Purchase Orders such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Ordered, Partially Received, All products received, Canceled and Refused.
|Puede utilizar la vista de lista para ver la lista de Pedidos de Proveedor. La lista se clasifica en función del estado de los Pedidos de Proveedor, como Borrador, Validado, Aprobado, Pedido, Recibido parcialmente, Todos los productos recibidos, Anulado y Rechazado.
|-
|22
|The Contacts and Addresses tab can be used to define explicit contacts - either business entities or people - to the Purchase Order, but this is optional.
|La pestaña Contactos/Direcciones se puede utilizar para definir contactos explícitos - ya sea entidades comerciales o personas - para el Pedido de Proveedor, pero esto es opcional.
|-
|23
|The "Item Receipts" tab lists all the items dispatched and received as part of the purchase order.
|La pestaña "Recepción de Productos" enumera todos los artículos enviados y recibidos como parte de la orden de compra.
|-
|24
|Use the "Linked files" section to add any file attachments to the Purchase Order.
|Utilice la sección "Documentos" para agregar cualquier archivo adjunto al Pedido de Proveedor.
|-
|25
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the purchase order, such as creation, update, reception, etc.
|La pestaña "Eventos" le ofrecerá una lista completa de todos los eventos pasados y futuros relacionados conel Pedido de Proveedor, tales como la creación, actualización, recepción, etc.
|-
|26
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Purchase Order with all the details pre-filled.
|Utilice el botón "Copiar" para crear un Pedido de Proveedor similar con todos los detalles ya rellenados.
|-
|27
|You can create a reception or invoice from the purchase order by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Invoices are covered in detail in the video tutorial 'Vendor invoices'.
|Puede crear una recepción o factura a partir del Pedido de Proveedor haciendo clic en los botones correspondientes. Las facturas se tratan en detalle en el video tutorial "Facturas de Proveedores".
|-
|28
|You must decide, based to your own internal workflow, the order of events according to which you make the reception from the purchase order, you create and send the invoice, and you set the purchase order as billed. Like most other Dolibarr modules, the Dolibarr process can be customized to work according to how your existing company process works. So, you need not change your company process according to Dolibarr!
|Debe decidir, en función de su propio flujo de trabajo interno, el orden de los eventos según el cual realiza la recepción desde el Pedido de Proveedor, crea y envía la factura, y establece un Pedido de Proveedor como facturado. Como la mayoría de los otros módulos de Dolibarr, el procedimiento de Dolibarr puede ser personalizado para funcionar según el funcionamiento del proceso de su empresa. Por lo tanto, ¡no necesita cambiar su proceso de empresa de acuerdo a Dolibarr!
|-
|29
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the purchase orders are being fulfilled. Use the filters such as Company and Vendor to view detailed statistics.
|Las "estadísticas" permiten ver a simple vista cómo se realizan los Pedido de Proveedor. Utilice los filtros como Empresa y Proveedor para ver las estadísticas detalladas.
|-
|30
|In any page of the application, for example on the main dashboard, when the reference of a Purchase Order is mentioned, an orange flag alerts you when a Purchase Order is delayed. You can setup an offset - the number of days before or after the expiration date - to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|En cualquier página de la aplicación, por ejemplo en el tablero principal, cuando se menciona la referencia de un pedido de compra, una bandera naranja le avisa cuando un pedido de compra se retrasa. Puede configurar una compensación - el número de días antes o después de la fecha de vencimiento - para decidir cuándo debe mostrarse la alerta visual de "Retraso".
|-
|31
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup, for example, to generate an invoice automatically on purchase order validation or to set a Purchase order automatically to the paid status when an invoice is generated thanks to the Workflow module or to add a second approver if the amount is higher than a certain value.
|También hay muchas otras funciones que pueden activarse desde la configuración, por ejemplo, para generar una factura automáticamente al validar un pedido de proveedor o para establecer un pedido de proveedor automáticamente al estado pagado cuando se genera una factura gracias al módulo de flujo de trabajo o para añadir un segundo autorizador si el importe es superior a un valor determinado.
|-
|32
|Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your Purchase Orders, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your database of Purchase Orders.
|Además, como la mayoría de los módulos de Dolibarr, puede añadir sus propios campos personalizados para describir sus Pedidos de Proveedor, definir valores por defecto o campos obligatorios y puede utilizar el módulo de exportación para exportar su base de datos de Pedidos de Proveedor.
|-
|33
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Gracias por ver este video tutorial. Visite www.dolibarr.org para obtener más información.
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Invoices and Payments

2021-01-18T15:39:07Z

Pradeepv: Added FR and ES translations

{{TemplateAssoEn}}
{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

'''Story board for Module Invoices and Payments:'''

'''Video Title:''' Invoices and Payments in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Invoices and Payments module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Invoices" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable the "Banks and Cash" module.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Financial Modules and enable the Invoices module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the "Banks and Cash" module.
|-
|-
|Grant permission on the Invoices module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating an Invoice'''
|
|-
|Let us explore the various ways in which you can create an invoice. You can create an invoice from a commercial proposal that is in the "accepted" status by clicking on the appropriate button. Information available in the commercial proposal such as third party, payment terms and project are copied automatically into the invoice.
|Navigate to a commercial proposal and click on the create invoice button. Show the fields being pre-filled.
|-
|Similarly, you can create an invoice from a sales order that has been validated, from a purchase order, from a contract or subscription as well as from an intervention.
|<s>Show the invoice creation button in a sales order, contract, and then intervention.</s>
|-
|You can also create an invoice or credit note from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|You can also create an invoice directly from the Billing and Payments tab. Choose the third party you are creating the invoice for.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|'''Choosing the invoice type'''
|
|-
|A down payment invoice is created when a down payment has been received. You will be able to include it into another draft invoice later, to reduce the amount of this draft invoice.
Credit note invoices can be created to replace or correct previously issued invoices, and they can only be issued from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab or from the invoice you want to correct. You will be able to consume this credit note later to reduce the amount to be paid for a validated invoice.
Template invoices are a way to create recurring invoices, which we will cover later on in this video.
|Show the various invoice types in the combo button list.
|-
|Choose the invoice date, payment terms, payment type and bank account. If the module "Project" is enabled, you will be able to choose a project. Choose the currency and add any public or private notes.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Once the invoice is created, you can add products and services along with pricing information for the same. You can add multiple products and services. You can choose from existing products and services to pre-fill the pricing information.
|Add products or services and choose from pre-filled product or service during the second time.
|-
|Use the linked files menu to add any attachments to the invoice.
|Attach a file.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Invoice'''
|
|-
|Click on "Validate" to validate the invoice.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the invoice is ready to be sent to your customer. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Click on the PDF in section "Generated document" to show the PDF.
|-
|You can now use the "Send Email" button to send the invoice to your customer. Note that all the invoice details are automatically attached to the email.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details, show the email being sent.
|-
|'''Invoices - Payments'''
|
|-
|If you have received payment for an invoice, click on the "Enter Payment" button to record the payment in the system. Choose the date, payment type and account to credit. Enter the transaction number and any comments. Enter the payment amount and confirm the payment. Note that if you received a partial payment, you will be able to enter a payment again. Once the full payment due for the invoice has been received and recorded, the invoice is automatically closed.
|Show multiple payments being entered and the invoice getting closed automatically once full payment has been received.
|-
|For invoice payment, you can also request a direct debit payment order, which can then be managed from the "Banks" menu under "Payment by direct debit".
|Show direct debit payment order.
|-
|If you receive only a partial payment for an invoice, and do not expect to receive the balance payment, use the appropriate button to record such a payment. Choose a reason and enter any notes. The invoice will be closed and will change into the "Paid" status.
|Show partial payment being recorded.
|-
|If you do not expect to receive any payment for an invoice, you can classify the invoice as "Abandoned". Choose a reason and enter any notes. The invoice will be canceled and moved to the "Abandoned" status.
|Show invoice being abandoned.
|-
|If you have received payments in excess, click on the appropriate button to issue a refund. Provide the payment details, enter the payment amount and confirm the refund.
|Show entering a refund.
|-
|On a down payment, once the payment has been entered, the down payment is automaticaly closed and converted into an "available discount" so you will be able to consume the discount into another draft invoice.
|Show the page "Absolute Discounts" to show that the credit is available for a later use for this customer. Consume the discount into another validated invoice to show that amount of other invoice has been reduced.
|-
|For validated credit notes, you can enter a refund instead of a payment, but you can also decide to convert the credit notes into a "Credit available" for this customer. So, you will be able to consume the discount available later, reducing the amount payable on another validated invoice.
|Show converting a credit note into a "credit available". Show the page "Absolute Discounts" to show that the credit is available for a later use for this customer. Consume the discount into another validated invoice to show the remain to pay has been reduced.
|-
|'''Invoices - Module Features'''
|
|-
|Use the "Clone" button if you want to create a similar invoice in the future.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|Invoices in the "Draft" status can be converted into a template invoice, which is a way for issuing recurring invoices. For more information on how to issue a Recurring Invoice, refer to the video on Recurring Invoices.
|Show the button and click it to show the invoice creation screen. Show a recurring invoice being created in fast forward motion.
|-
|You can view the list of invoices with the relevant payment status in the list view. You can also view the list based on invoice status such as Draft, Not Paid, Paid and Abandoned.
|Show the list view and the list views based on status.
|-
|Payments are available under the payments list view.
|Show the payments list view.
|-
|You can create reports for payments received on a monthly basis. The report is instantly available for download in the PDF format.
|Show report generation and show the PDF report.
|-
|Statistics gives a birds-eye-view of all customer invoices. You can filter the statistics based on the available parameters.
|Show statistics and one of the filters.
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to your invoices and you will be able to export your database of invoices and payments.
|Show custom field generation and the invoice creation screen where it is available.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}''' FRENCH TRANSLATION:'''

'''Video Title:''' Invoices and Payments in Dolibarr

'''Translated Video Title:'''

{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over'''
|
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Invoices and Payments module in Dolibarr.
|

Bienvenue à ce tutoriel vidéo sur le système ERP et CRM Dolibarr. Cette vidéo explique comment utiliser le module Factures et avoirs et Paiements de Dolibarr.
|-
|'''2'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|

'''Pré-requis'''
|-
|3
|Activate the module "Invoices" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable the "Banks and Cash" module.
|

Activez le module "Factures et Avoirs" à partir du menu Accueil - Configuration - Modules. Vous devez également activer le module "Banques et caisse".
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the Invoices module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|

Accordez à vos utilisateurs l'autorisation d'utiliser le module "Factures et Avoirs". Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration des autorisations pour les utilisateurs, vous pouvez regarder notre vidéo "Utilisateurs, groupes et autorisations".
|-
|'''5'''
|'''Creating an Invoice'''
|

'''Création d'une facture et avoir'''
|-
|6
|Let us explore the various ways in which you can create an invoice. You can create an invoice from a commercial proposal that is in the "accepted" status by clicking on the appropriate button. Information available in the commercial proposal such as third party, payment terms and project are copied automatically into the invoice.
|

Permettez-nous d'explorer les différentes façons dont vous pouvez créer une facture et avoir. Vous pouvez créer une facture et avoir à partir d'une proposition commerciale dont le statut est "accepté" en cliquant sur le bouton qui convient. En effet, les informations disponibles dans la proposition commerciale, telles que le tiers, les conditions de paiement et le projet, sont automatiquement copiées dans la facture et avoir.
|-
|7
|Similarly, you can create an invoice from a sales order that has been validated, from a purchase order, from a contract or subscription as well as from an intervention.
|

De même, vous pouvez créer une facture et avoir à partir d'une commande qui a été validée, d'une commande, d'un contrat ou d'un abonnement ainsi que d'une intervention.
|-
|8
|You can also create an invoice or credit note from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab.
|

Vous pouvez également créer une facture et avoir ou une note de crédit à partir d'un tiers en naviguant dans l'onglet "Client".
|-
|9
|You can also create an invoice directly from the Billing and Payments tab. Choose the third party you are creating the invoice for.
|

Il est également possible de créer une facture et avoir directement à partir de l'onglet "Facturation et paiements". Choisissez le tiers pour lequel vous créez la facture et avoir.
|-
|'''10'''
|'''Choosing the invoice type'''
|

'''Choix du type de facture et avoir'''
|-
|11
|A down payment invoice is created when a down payment has been received. You will be able to include it into another draft invoice later, to reduce the amount of this draft invoice.
|

Une facture et avoir d'acompte est créée lorsqu'un acompte a été reçu. Il est possible de l'inclure dans un autre projet de facture et avoir plus tard, afin de réduire le montant de ce projet de facture et avoir.
|-
|12
|Credit note invoices can be created to replace or correct previously issued invoices, and they can only be issued from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab or from the invoice you want to correct. You will be able to consume this credit note later to reduce the amount to be paid for a validated invoice. Template invoices are a way to create recurring invoices, which we will cover later on in this video.
|Les factures et avoirs de notes de crédit peuvent être créées pour remplacer ou corriger des factures et avoirs émises précédemment, et ne peuvent être émises que par un tiers en naviguant dans l'onglet "Client" ou à partir de la facture et avoir que vous souhaitez corriger. Vous pourrez consommer cette note de crédit ultérieurement pour réduire le montant à payer pour une facture et avoir validée. Les modèles de factures et avoirs sont un moyen de créer des factures et avoirs récurrentes, dont nous parlerons plus loin dans cette vidéo.
|-
|13
|Choose the invoice date, payment terms, payment type and bank account. If the module "Project" is enabled, you will be able to choose a project. Choose the currency and add any public or private notes.
|Choisissez la date de la facture et avoir, les modalités de paiement, le type de paiement et le compte bancaire. Si le module "Projet" est activé, vous pourrez choisir un projet. Choisissez la devise et ajoutez les éventuels billets publics ou privés.
|-
|14
|Once the invoice is created, you can add products and services along with pricing information for the same. You can add multiple products and services. You can choose from existing products and services to pre-fill the pricing information.
|Une fois la facture et avoir créée, vous pouvez ajouter des produits et des services ainsi que des informations sur leur prix. Vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs produits et services. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les produits et services existants afin de pré-remplir les informations sur les prix.
|-
|15
|Use the linked files menu to add any attachments to the invoice.
|Utilisez le menu des fichiers liés pour ajouter des pièces jointes à la facture et avoir.
|-
|'''16'''
|'''Validating and Sending the Invoice'''
|'''Validation et envoi de la facture et avoir'''
|-
|17
|Click on "Validate" to validate the invoice.
|Cliquez sur "Valider" pour valider la facture et avoir.
|-
|18
|Now, the invoice is ready to be sent to your customer. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Maintenant, la facture et avoir est prête à être envoyée à votre client. Un modèle par défaut est utilisé pour le fichier PDF généré.
|-
|19
|You can now use the "Send Email" button to send the invoice to your customer. Note that all the invoice details are automatically attached to the email.
|Pour envoyer la facture et avoir à votre client, vous pouvez maintenant utiliser le bouton "Envoyer un e-mail". Notez que tous les détails de la facture et avoir sont automatiquement joints à l'e-mail.
|-
|'''20'''
|'''Invoices - Payments'''
|Factures et Avoirs - Paiements
|-
|21
|If you have received payment for an invoice, click on the "Enter Payment" button to record the payment in the system. Choose the date, payment type and account to credit. Enter the transaction number and any comments. Enter the payment amount and confirm the payment. Note that if you received a partial payment, you will be able to enter a payment again. Once the full payment due for the invoice has been received and recorded, the invoice is automatically closed.
|Si vous avez reçu le paiement d'une facture et avoir, cliquez sur le bouton "Saisir le paiement" pour enregistrer le paiement dans le système. Indiquez la date, le type de paiement et le compte à créditer. Saisissez le numéro de transaction et les éventuels commentaires. Entrez le montant du paiement et confirmez le paiement. Sachez que si vous avez reçu un paiement partiel, vous pourrez à nouveau saisir un paiement. Une fois que le paiement intégral dû pour la facture et avoir a été reçu et enregistré, cette dernière est automatiquement clôturée.
|-
|22
|For invoice payment, you can also request a direct debit payment order, which can then be managed from the "Banks" menu under "Payment by direct debit".
|

Pour le paiement des factures et avoirs, il est également possible de demander un ordre de paiement par prélèvement automatique, qui peut ensuite être géré à partir du menu "Banques" sous "Paiement par prélèvement automatique".
|-
|23
|If you receive only a partial payment for an invoice, and do not expect to receive the balance payment, use the appropriate button to record such a payment. Choose a reason and enter any notes. The invoice will be closed and will change into the "Paid" status.
|En cas de paiement partiel d'une facture et avoir, et si vous ne pensez pas recevoir le paiement du solde, utilisez le bouton qui convient pour enregistrer un tel paiement. Choisissez un motif et entrez les notes éventuelles. La facture et avoir sera fermée et passera au statut "Payé".
|-
|24
|If you do not expect to receive any payment for an invoice, you can classify the invoice as "Abandoned". Choose a reason and enter any notes. The invoice will be canceled and moved to the "Abandoned" status.
|Si vous ne prévoyez pas de recevoir de paiement pour une facture et avoir, vous pouvez classer la facture et avoir comme "Abandonnée". Veuillez choisir un motif et saisir les notes éventuelles. La facture et avoir sera annulée et passera au statut "Abandonné".
|-
|25
|If you have received payments in excess, click on the appropriate button to issue a refund. Provide the payment details, enter the payment amount and confirm the refund.
|Si vous avez reçu des paiements en trop, cliquez sur le bouton qui convient pour effectuer un remboursement. Indiquez les détails du paiement, saisissez le montant du paiement et confirmez le remboursement.
|-
|26
|On a down payment, once the payment has been entered, the down payment is automaticaly closed and converted into an "available discount" so you will be able to consume the discount into another draft invoice.
|En ce qui concerne les acomptes, une fois le paiement saisi, l'acompte est automatiquement clôturé et converti en "escompte disponible", de sorte que vous pouvez utiliser l'escompte pour une autre facture et avoir.
|-
|27
|For validated credit notes, you can enter a refund instead of a payment, but you can also decide to convert the credit notes into a "Credit available" for this customer. So, you will be able to consume the discount available later, reducing the amount payable on another validated invoice.
|Dans le cas d'une note de crédit validée, vous pouvez saisir un remboursement au lieu d'un paiement, mais vous pouvez également décider de convertir les notes de crédit en un "crédit disponible" pour ce client. Ainsi, vous pourrez consommer l'escompte disponible plus tard, en réduisant le montant à payer sur une autre facture et avoir validée.
|-
|'''28'''
|'''Invoices - Module Features'''
|'''Factures et Avoirs - Caractéristiques du module'''
|-
|29
|Use the "Clone" button if you want to create a similar invoice in the future.
|Utilisez le bouton "Cloner" si vous souhaitez créer une facture et avoir similaire à l'avenir.
|-
|30
|Invoices in the "Draft" status can be converted into a template invoice, which is a way for issuing recurring invoices. For more information on how to issue a Recurring Invoice, refer to the video on Recurring Invoices.
|Les factures et avoirs ayant le statut de "brouillon" peuvent être convertis en une facture et avoir type, ce qui permet d'émettre des factures et avoirs récurrentes. Pour plus d'informations sur la procédure d'émission d'une facture et avoir récurrente, regardez la vidéo sur les factures et avoirs récurrentes.
|-
|31
|You can view the list of invoices with the relevant payment status in the list view. You can also view the list based on invoice status such as Draft, Not Paid, Paid and Abandoned.
|Vous pouvez consulter la liste des factures et avoirs avec le statut de paiement correspondant dans la vue en liste.
|-
|32
|Payments are available under the payments list view.
|De plus, vous pouvez consulter cette liste en fonction du statut de la facture et avoir, par exemple : en attente, non payée, payée et abandonnée.
|-
|33
|You can create reports for payments received on a monthly basis. The report is instantly available for download in the PDF format.
|Les paiements sont disponibles dans la vue de liste des paiements.
|-
|34
|Statistics gives a birds-eye-view of all customer invoices. You can filter the statistics based on the available parameters.
|Il est possible de créer des rapports pour les paiements reçus sur une base mensuelle. Le rapport est instantanément disponible pour téléchargement au format PDF.
|-
|35
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to your invoices and you will be able to export your database of invoices and payments.
|Les statistiques donnent un aperçu de toutes les factures et avoirs des clients. Vous pouvez filtrer les statistiques en fonction des paramètres disponibles.
|-
|36
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Nous vous remercions de regarder ce tutoriel vidéo. Visitez le site www.dolibarr.org pour en savoir plus.
|}

'''SPANISH TRANSLATION:'''

'''Video Title:''' Invoices and Payments in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over'''
|
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Invoices and Payments module in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenido a este video tutorial sobre el sistema ERP y CRM Dolibarr. En este vídeo, veremos cómo utilizar el módulo Facturas y Abonos de Dolibarr.
|-
|'''2'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|Requisitos Previos
|-
|3
|Activate the module "Invoices" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable the "Banks and Cash" module.
|Activar el módulo "Facturas y Abonos" en el menú Inicio - Configuración - Módulos. También debe activar el módulo "Bancos y Caja".
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the Invoices module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Conceda permiso al módulo "Facturas y Abonos" a sus usuarios. Para obtener información más avanzada sobre cómo configurar los permisos de los usuarios, puede ver nuestro vídeo "Usuarios, grupos y permisos".
|-
|'''5'''
|'''Creating an Invoice'''
|Creación de una Factura
|-
|6
|Let us explore the various ways in which you can create an invoice. You can create an invoice from a commercial proposal that is in the "accepted" status by clicking on the appropriate button. Information available in the commercial proposal such as third party, payment terms and project are copied automatically into the invoice.
|Exploremos las diversas formas en que puede crear una factura. Puede crear una factura a partir de un presupuesto que se encuentre en estado "Aceptado" haciendo clic en el botón correspondiente. La información disponible en la presupuesto como los terceros, condiciones de pago y proyecto se copian automáticamente en la factura.
|-
|7
|Similarly, you can create an invoice from a sales order that has been validated, from a purchase order, from a contract or subscription as well as from an intervention.
|Del mismo modo, se puede crear una factura a partir de un pedido de venta validado, de un pedido de compra, de un contrato o de una suscripción, así como de una intervención.
|-
|8
|You can also create an invoice or credit note from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab.
|También puede crear una factura o un abono a un tercero navegando a la pestaña "Cliente".
|-
|9
|You can also create an invoice directly from the Billing and Payments tab. Choose the third party you are creating the invoice for.
|También puede crear una factura directamente desde la pestaña "Financiera". Seleccione el tercero para el que está creando la factura.
|-
|'''10'''
|'''Choosing the invoice type'''
|Seleccionar el tipo de factura
|-
|11
|A down payment invoice is created when a down payment has been received. You will be able to include it into another draft invoice later, to reduce the amount of this draft invoice.
|Una factura de anticipo se crea cuando se ha recibido un anticipo. Podrá incluirla en otra factura borrador más tarde, para reducir el importe de esta factura borrador.
|-
|12
|Credit note invoices can be created to replace or correct previously issued invoices, and they can only be issued from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab or from the invoice you want to correct. You will be able to consume this credit note later to reduce the amount to be paid for a validated invoice. Template invoices are a way to create recurring invoices, which we will cover later on in this video.
|Las facturas de anticipos pueden crearse para reemplazar o corregir facturas emitidas anteriormente, y sólo pueden ser emitidas por un tercero navegando a la pestaña "Cliente" o desde la factura que desea corregir. Podrá utilizar esta nota de crédito más adelante para reducir el importe a pagar por una factura validada. Las facturas modelo son una forma de crear facturas recurrentes, que trataremos más adelante en este vídeo.
|-
|13
|Choose the invoice date, payment terms, payment type and bank account. If the module "Project" is enabled, you will be able to choose a project. Choose the currency and add any public or private notes.
|Elija la fecha de la factura, las condiciones de pago, el tipo de pago y la cuenta bancaria. Si el módulo "Proyecto" está activado, podrá elegir un proyecto. Elija la moneda y añada cualquier nota pública o privada.
|-
|14
|Once the invoice is created, you can add products and services along with pricing information for the same. You can add multiple products and services. You can choose from existing products and services to pre-fill the pricing information.
|Una vez creada la factura, puede añadir productos y servicios junto con la información sobre los precios de los mismos. Puede añadir varios productos y servicios. Puede elegir entre los productos y servicios existentes para rellenar de antemano la información de precios.
|-
|15
|Use the linked files menu to add any attachments to the invoice.
|Utilice el menú de documentos para agregar cualquier archivo adjunto a la factura.
|-
|'''16'''
|'''Validating and Sending the Invoice'''
|Validación y Envío de la Factura
|-
|17
|Click on "Validate" to validate the invoice.
|Haga clic en "Validar" para validar la factura.
|-
|18
|Now, the invoice is ready to be sent to your customer. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Ahora, la factura está lista para ser enviada a su cliente. Se utiliza una plantilla predeterminada para el archivo PDF generado.
|-
|19
|You can now use the "Send Email" button to send the invoice to your customer. Note that all the invoice details are automatically attached to the email.
|Ahora puede utilizar el botón "Enviar E-mail" para enviar la factura a su cliente. Tenga en cuenta que todos los detalles de la factura se adjuntan automáticamente al correo electrónico.
|-
|'''20'''
|'''Invoices - Payments'''
|Facturas - Pagos
|-
|21
|If you have received payment for an invoice, click on the "Enter Payment" button to record the payment in the system. Choose the date, payment type and account to credit. Enter the transaction number and any comments. Enter the payment amount and confirm the payment. Note that if you received a partial payment, you will be able to enter a payment again. Once the full payment due for the invoice has been received and recorded, the invoice is automatically closed.
|Si ha recibido el pago de una factura, haga clic en el botón "Añadir Pago" para registrar el pago en el sistema. Elija la fecha, el tipo de pago y la cuenta a la que se debe abonar. Introduzca el número de transacción y cualquier comentario. Introduzca el importe del pago y confirme el pago. Tenga en cuenta que si ha recibido un pago parcial, podrá volver a introducir un pago. Una vez que se haya recibido y registrado el pago completo de la factura, ésta se cerrará automáticamente.
|-
|22
|For invoice payment, you can also request a direct debit payment order, which can then be managed from the "Banks" menu under "Payment by direct debit".
|<nowiki>Para el pago de facturas, también puede solicitar una orden de pago por domiciliación bancaria, que se puede gestionar desde el menú "Bancos | Cajas" en "Domiciliaciones".</nowiki>
|-
|23
|If you receive only a partial payment for an invoice, and do not expect to receive the balance payment, use the appropriate button to record such a payment. Choose a reason and enter any notes. The invoice will be closed and will change into the "Paid" status.
|Si recibe un pago parcial de una factura y no espera recibir el pago del saldo, utilice el botón correspondiente para registrar dicho pago. Elija un motivo e introduzca las notas que considere oportunas. La factura se cerrará y pasará al estado "Pagado".
|-
|24
|If you do not expect to receive any payment for an invoice, you can classify the invoice as "Abandoned". Choose a reason and enter any notes. The invoice will be canceled and moved to the "Abandoned" status.
|Si no se espera recibir ningún pago de una factura, se puede clasificar la factura como "Abandonada". Elija una razón e introduzca cualquier nota. La factura se cancelará y pasará al estado "Abandonado".
|-
|25
|If you have received payments in excess, click on the appropriate button to issue a refund. Provide the payment details, enter the payment amount and confirm the refund.
|Si ha recibido pagos en exceso, haga clic en el botón apropiado para emitir un abono. Proporcione los detalles del pago, introduzca el importe del pago y confirme el abono.
|-
|26
|On a down payment, once the payment has been entered, the down payment is automaticaly closed and converted into an "available discount" so you will be able to consume the discount into another draft invoice.
|En un anticipo, una vez introducido el pago, el anticipo se cierra automáticamente y se convierte en un "creduito disponible", de modo que podrá consumir el descuento en otra factura de proyecto.
|-
|27
|For validated credit notes, you can enter a refund instead of a payment, but you can also decide to convert the credit notes into a "Credit available" for this customer. So, you will be able to consume the discount available later, reducing the amount payable on another validated invoice.
|En el caso de las notas de crédito validadas, puede introducir un reembolso en lugar de un pago, pero también puede decidir convertir las notas de crédito en "Crédito disponible" para este cliente. Así, podrá consumir el descuento disponible más adelante, reduciendo el importe a pagar en otra factura validada.
|-
|'''28'''
|'''Invoices - Module Features'''
|Facturas - Características del Módulo
|-
|29
|Use the "Clone" button if you want to create a similar invoice in the future.
|Use el botón "Copiar" si quiere crear una factura similar en el futuro.
|-
|30
|Invoices in the "Draft" status can be converted into a template invoice, which is a way for issuing recurring invoices. For more information on how to issue a Recurring Invoice, refer to the video on Recurring Invoices.
|Las facturas en estado "Borrador" pueden convertirse en una factura modelo, que es una forma de emitir facturas recurrentes. Para obtener más información sobre cómo emitir una factura recurrente, consulte el vídeo sobre Facturas Recurrentes.
|-
|31
|You can view the list of invoices with the relevant payment status in the list view. You can also view the list based on invoice status such as Draft, Not Paid, Paid and Abandoned.
|Puede ver la lista de facturas con el estado de pago correspondiente en la vista de lista. También puede ver la lista en función del estado de la factura, como Borrador, Pte. Pago, Pagada y Abandonada.
|-
|32
|Payments are available under the payments list view.
|Los pagos están disponibles en la vista de lista de pagos.
|-
|33
|You can create reports for payments received on a monthly basis. The report is instantly available for download in the PDF format.
|Puede crear informes para los pagos recibidos mensualmente. El informe está disponible instantáneamente para su descarga en formato PDF.
|-
|34
|Statistics gives a birds-eye-view of all customer invoices. You can filter the statistics based on the available parameters.
|Las estadísticas dan una vista general de todas las facturas de los clientes. Puede filtrar las estadísticas en base a los parámetros disponibles.
|-
|35
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to your invoices and you will be able to export your database of invoices and payments.
|Hay muchas otras características que pueden ser habilitadas desde la configuración. Además, como la mayoría de los módulos de Dolibarr, puede añadir sus propios campos personalizados a sus facturas y podrá exportar su base de datos de facturas y pagos.
|-
|36
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Gracias por ver este video tutorial. Visite www.dolibarr.org para obtener más información.
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Contracts

2020-12-28T17:05:05Z

Pradeepv: Added FR and ES translations

{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

'''Story board for Module Contracts / Subscriptions:'''

'''Video Title:''' Contracts, Subscriptions in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Contracts and Subscriptions module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Contracts and Subscriptions" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you will also need to enable dependent modules such as Proposals, Invoices etc. in order to be able to use the relevant features.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll down and enable the Contracts and Subscriptions module. Show that the modules Proposals and Invoices have also been enabled.
|-
|-
|Grant permission on the "Contracts and Subscriptions" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Contract'''
|
|-
|A contract is usually created from a commercial proposal or sales order that has been accepted by your customer. Navigate to the commercial proposal and click on the "Create Contract" button which is available only for commercial proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|Navigate to the commercial proposals list view. Choose a proposal. Click on the "Create Contract" button.
|-
|In this case, the products or services defined in the proposal are copied into the contract automatically. For more details on how to work with commercial proposals and quotes, refer to the video about Commercial Proposals and Quotes.
|Highlight and show that the services have been copied over into the contract.
|-
|You can also create a contract by clicking on "New Contract / Subscription" and entering all the details manually.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Provide the customer or vendor reference. Choose the third party for whom you are creating the contract. Choose the sales representatives who will follow up on the contract and sign the contract. Choose the contract date and project. Enter notes, both public and private. Click the "create" button to create the contract.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|You can now start adding the actual service and pricing information to your contract. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple services to the contract. Note that the goal of the contract is above all to follow if a service is active or expired and to renew the service, so the price is not mandatory. But if it is already defined in the contract, it will save you time if you request payment at a later time for your contract.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Contract'''
|
|-
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the contract.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the contract is ready to be sent to your customer or vendor. Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the contract are automatically included.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details. Show the email being sent.
|-
|'''Contracts - Module Features'''
|
|-
|You can use the list view to view the list of contracts.
|Show the list of contracts. Click on a contract to open the detailed view.
|-
|The Contacts and Addresses tab captures all the relevant business entities and people involved in the contract.
|Show the contacts tab.
|-
|Use the "linked files" section to add any file attachments to the contract.
|Show the linked files tab and upload an attachment.
|-
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the contract, such as creation, update, invoicing, emails sent, phone calls, etc.
|Show the Events tab.
|-
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar contract with all the details pre-filled.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|You can create an invoice or sales order from the contract by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Invoices and Sales Orders are covered in detail in the relevant video tutorials of these modules.
Note that an invoice can also be a recurring invoice, for example, for a yearly contract that needs monthly payments, so an invoice will be generated automatically each month, 12 times.
|Show the appropriate buttons. Click on one of them to show the invoice or sales order creation screen.
|-
|'''Managing Services'''
|
|-
|Services that are part of your contract are in the inactive, running, expired or closed state. Click the appropriate buttons to activate or close all the services that are part of the contract.
To renew a service of a contract, just update the end date of the service.
|Show the appropriate buttons. Click them to show the popups. Show updating the end date.
|-
|Click on the "Services" list view to view the list of services associated with your contracts. You can view the list of services based on their current status such as inactive, running, expired and closed.
|Show the list views.
|-
|In any page of the application, for example, on the main dashboard, when the reference of a contract is mentioned, you can also have an orange flag to alert you when at least one service has expired. You can setup an offset that is the number of days before or after the expiration date to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|Go on main My dashboard page to show the widget "Latest 5 contracted products" or "Latest 5 modified contract" to show a contract with the exclamation flag and put the mouse on the flag so the tooltip "Late" appears.
|-
|There is also a lot of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your contracts, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your contract database.
|
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}
'''FRENCH TRANSLATION'''

'''Video Title in English:''' Contracts & Subscriptions in Dolibarr

'''Translated Video Title: ??'''

{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over in English'''
|'''Translated Voice Over'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Contracts and Subscriptions module in Dolibarr.
|

Bienvenue à ce tutoriel vidéo sur le système ERP et CRM Dolibarr. Cette vidéo explique comment utiliser le module Contrats et abonnements de Dolibarr.
|-
|'''2'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|

Pré-requis
|-
|3
|Activate the module "Contracts and Subscriptions" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you will also need to enable dependent modules such as Proposals, Invoices etc. in order to be able to use the relevant features.
|

Activez le module "Contrats et abonnements" à partir du menu Accueil - Configuration - Modules. Sachez que vous devrez également activer les modules dépendants tels que Propositions, Factures, etc. pour pouvoir utiliser les fonctionnalités correspondantes.
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the "Contracts and Subscriptions" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|

Accordez à vos utilisateurs une autorisation sur le module "Contrats et abonnements". Pour plus d'informations sur comment configurer les autorisations pour les utilisateurs, vous pouvez regardez notre vidéo "Utilisateurs, groupes et autorisations".
|-
|'''5'''
|'''Creating a Contract'''
|

'''Création d'un contrat'''
|-
|6
|A contract is usually created from a commercial proposal or sales order that has been accepted by your customer. Navigate to the commercial proposal and click on the "Create Contract" button which is available only for commercial proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|Un contrat est généralement créé à partir d'une proposition commerciale ou d'une commande qui a été acceptée par votre client. Accédez à la proposition commerciale et cliquez sur le bouton "Créer un contrat" qui est uniquement disponible pour les propositions commerciales qui ont été validées et acceptées.
|-
|7
|In this case, the products or services defined in the proposal are copied into the contract automatically. For more details on how to work with commercial proposals and quotes, refer to the video about Commercial Proposals and Quotes.
|Dans ce cas, les produits ou services qui ont été définis dans la proposition sont automatiquement copiés dans le contrat. Pour plus de détails sur la méthode de travail avec les propositions et devis commerciaux, consultez la vidéo sur les propositions et devis commerciaux.
|-
|8
|You can also create a contract by clicking on "New Contract / Subscription" and entering all the details manually.
|

Vous pouvez également créer un contrat en cliquant sur "Nouveau contrat / Abonnement" et en entrant tous les détails manuellement.
|-
|9
|Provide the customer or vendor reference. Choose the third party for whom you are creating the contract. Choose the sales representatives who will follow up on the contract and sign the contract. Choose the contract date and project. Enter notes, both public and private. Click the "create" button to create the contract.
|

Indiquez la référence du client ou du fournisseur. Choisissez le tiers pour lequel vous créez le contrat. Choisissez les représentants commerciaux qui suivront le contrat et signeront le contrat. Choisissez la date du contrat et le projet. Saisissez des notes, tant publiques que privées. Cliquez sur le bouton "créer" pour créer le contrat.
|-
|10
|You can now start adding the actual service and pricing information to your contract. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple services to the contract. Note that the goal of the contract is above all to follow if a service is active or expired and to renew the service, so the price is not mandatory. But if it is already defined in the contract, it will save you time if you request payment at a later time for your contract.
|A partir de là, vous pouvez commencer à ajouter à votre contrat les informations relatives aux services et aux prix. Ajoutez le nom du service ou choisissez l'un de vos services prédéfinis. Choisissez une tranche de taxe, le cas échéant. Saisissez le coût net, la quantité et toute remise applicable. Vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs services au contrat. Gardez à l'esprit que le but du contrat est avant tout de suivre si un service est actif ou a expiré et de le renouveler, le prix n'est donc pas obligatoire. Mais s'il est déjà défini dans le contrat, il vous fera gagner du temps si vous demandez le paiement de votre contrat à une date ultérieure.
|-
|'''11'''
|'''Validating and Sending the Contract'''
|

'''Validation et envoi du contrat'''
|-
|12
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the contract.
|

Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur "Valider" pour finaliser le contrat.
|-
|13
|Now, the contract is ready to be sent to your customer or vendor. Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the contract are automatically included.
|Maintenant, le contrat est prêt à être envoyé à votre client ou fournisseur. Cliquez sur le bouton "Envoyer un courriel". Ensuite, vous pouvez remplir les coordonnées du destinataire. Tous les autres détails du contrat sont automatiquement inclus.
|-
|'''14'''
|'''Contracts - Module Features'''
|

'''Contrats - Caractéristiques du module'''
|-
|15
|You can use the list view to view the list of contracts.
|

Vous pouvez utiliser la vue en liste pour consulter la liste des contrats.
|-
|16
|The Contacts and Addresses tab captures all the relevant business entities and people involved in the contract.
|

L'onglet "Contacts et adresses" vous permet d'accéder à toutes les entités commerciales et personnes concernées par le contrat.
|-
|17
|Use the "linked files" section to add any file attachments to the contract.
|

Utilisez la section "Fichiers liés" pour ajouter des fichiers joints au contrat.
|-
|18
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the contract, such as creation, update, invoicing, emails sent, phone calls, etc.
|

L'onglet "Événements ou agenda" vous permet d'obtenir une liste complète de tous les événements passés et à venir liés au contrat, tels que la création, la mise à jour, la facturation, les courriels envoyés, les appels téléphoniques, etc.
|-
|19
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar contract with all the details pre-filled.
|

Utilisez le bouton "Cloner" pour créer un contrat similaire avec tous les détails pré-remplis.
|-
|20
|You can create an invoice or sales order from the contract by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Invoices and Sales Orders are covered in detail in the relevant video tutorials of these modules.Note that an invoice can also be a recurring invoice, for example, for a yearly contract that needs monthly payments, so an invoice will be generated automatically each month, 12 times.
|

Vous pouvez créer une facture et avoir ou une commande à partir du contrat en cliquant sur les boutons qui conviennent. Il faut savoir qu'une facture et avoir peut également être une facture et avoir récurrente, par exemple, pour un contrat annuel nécessitant des paiements mensuels, de sorte qu'une facture et avoir sera générée automatiquement chaque mois, 12 fois.
|-
|'''21'''
|'''Managing Services'''
|'''Gestion des services'''
|-
|22
|Services that are part of your contract are in the inactive, running, expired or closed state. Click the appropriate buttons to activate or close all the services that are part of the contract.To renew a service of a contract, just update the end date of the service.
|Les services qui font partie de votre contrat sont inactifs, en cours, expirés ou fermés. Cliquez sur les boutons qui conviennent pour activer ou fermer tous les services faisant partie du contrat. Le renouvellement d'un service d'un contrat se fait en mettant simplement à jour la date de fin du service.
|-
|23
|Click on the "Services" list view to view the list of services associated with your contracts. You can view the list of services based on their current status such as inactive, running, expired and closed.
|Cliquez sur la vue "Services" pour afficher la liste des services associés à vos contrats. Cette liste peut être consultée en fonction de leur statut actuel, par exemple inactif, en cours, expiré ou fermé.
|-
|24
|In any page of the application, for example, on the main dashboard, when the reference of a contract is mentioned, you can also have an orange flag to alert you when at least one service has expired. You can setup an offset that is the number of days before or after the expiration date to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|Dans n'importe quelle page de l'application, par exemple, sur le tableau de bord principal, lorsque la référence d'un contrat est mentionnée, vous disposez également d'un drapeau orange pour vous alerter lorsqu'au moins un service a expiré. Il est possible de définir un décalage qui correspond au nombre de jours avant ou après la date d'expiration pour décider du moment où l'alerte visuelle "Retard" doit être affichée.
|-
|25
|There is also a lot of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your contracts, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your contract database.
|Il existe également de nombreuses autres fonctionnalités qui peuvent être activées à partir de la configuration. De plus, comme la plupart des modules Dolibarr, vous pouvez ajouter vos propres champs personnalisés pour décrire vos contrats, définir des valeurs par défaut ou des champs obligatoires et vous pouvez utiliser le module d'exportation pour exporter votre base de données de contrats.
|-
|26
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Nous vous remercions de regarder ce tutoriel vidéo. Visitez le site www.dolibarr.org pour en savoir plus.
|}

'''SPANISH TRANSLATION'''

'''Video Title in English:''' Contracts & Subscriptions in Dolibarr

{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over in English'''
|'''Translated Voice Over'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Contracts and Subscriptions module in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenido a este video tutorial sobre el sistema ERP y CRM Dolibarr. En este vídeo, veremos cómo utilizar el módulo de Contratos y Suscripciones en Dolibarr.
|-
|'''2'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|Requisitos Previos
|-
|3
|Activate the module "Contracts and Subscriptions" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you will also need to enable dependent modules such as Proposals, Invoices etc. in order to be able to use the relevant features.
|Activar el módulo "Contratos/Suscripciones" en el menú Inicio - Configuración - Módulos. Tenga en cuenta que también tendrá que activar los módulos dependientes tales como Presupuestos, Facturas, etc. para poder utilizar las características correspondientes.
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the "Contracts and Subscriptions" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Conceda permiso al módulo "Contratos/Suscripciones" a sus usuarios. Para obtener información más avanzada sobre cómo configurar los permisos de los usuarios, puede ver nuestro vídeo "Usuarios, Grupos y Permisos".
|-
|'''5'''
|'''Creating a Contract'''
|Creación de un Contrato
|-
|6
|A contract is usually created from a commercial proposal or sales order that has been accepted by your customer. Navigate to the commercial proposal and click on the "Create Contract" button which is available only for commercial proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|Un contrato suele crearse a partir de un presupuesto o un pedido de venta que ha sido aceptado por su cliente. Navegue hasta el presupuesto y haga clic en el botón "Crear Contrato", que sólo está disponible para presupuestos que han sido validados y aceptados.
|-
|7
|In this case, the products or services defined in the proposal are copied into the contract automatically. For more details on how to work with commercial proposals and quotes, refer to the video about Commercial Proposals and Quotes.
|En este caso, los productos o servicios definidos en el presupuesto se copian en el contrato de forma automática. Para más detalles sobre cómo trabajar con presupuestos y cotizaciones, consulte el vídeo sobre Presupuestos y Prupuestas Comerciales.
|-
|8
|You can also create a contract by clicking on "New Contract / Subscription" and entering all the details manually.
|También puede crear un contrato haciendo clic en "Nuevo contrato/suscripción" e introduciendo todos los detalles manualmente.
|-
|9
|Provide the customer or vendor reference. Choose the third party for whom you are creating the contract. Choose the sales representatives who will follow up on the contract and sign the contract. Choose the contract date and project. Enter notes, both public and private. Click the "create" button to create the contract.
|Proporcione la referencia del cliente o proveedor. Elija el tercero para el que está creando el contrato. Elija el comercial de ventas que harán el seguimiento del contrato y lo firmará. Seleccione la fecha del contrato y el proyecto. Introduzca las notas, tanto públicas como privadas. Haga clic en el botón "Crear" para crear el contrato.
|-
|10
|You can now start adding the actual service and pricing information to your contract. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple services to the contract. Note that the goal of the contract is above all to follow if a service is active or expired and to renew the service, so the price is not mandatory. But if it is already defined in the contract, it will save you time if you request payment at a later time for your contract.
|Ahora puede empezar a agregar la información real de servicio y precios a su contrato. Añada el nombre del servicio o elija uno de sus servicios predefinidos. Elija una tabla de impuestos si es pertinente. Introduzca el precio unitario, la cantidad y cualquier descuento aplicable. Puede agregar varios servicios al contrato. Tenga en cuenta que el objetivo del contrato es, sobre todo, saber si un servicio está activo o ha caducado y renovarlo, por lo que el precio no es obligatorio. Pero si ya está definido en el contrato, le ahorrará tiempo si solicita el pago posterior de su contrato.
|-
|'''11'''
|'''Validating and Sending the Contract'''
|Validación y Envío del Contrato
|-
|12
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the contract.
|Una vez que haya terminado, haga clic en "Validar" para finalizar el contrato.
|-
|13
|Now, the contract is ready to be sent to your customer or vendor. Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the contract are automatically included.
|Ahora, el contrato está listo para ser enviado a su cliente o proveedor. Haga clic en el botón "Enviar E-mail". Ahora puede rellenar los datos del receptor. Todos el resto de los detalles del contrato se incluyen de forma automática.
|-
|'''14'''
|'''Contracts - Module Features'''
|Contratos - Características del Módulo
|-
|15
|You can use the list view to view the list of contracts.
|Puede utilizar la vista de lista para ver la lista de contratos.
|-
|16
|The Contacts and Addresses tab captures all the relevant business entities and people involved in the contract.
|La pestaña Contactos/Direcciones contiene todas las entidades comerciales y personas relevantes involucradas en el contrato.
|-
|17
|Use the "linked files" section to add any file attachments to the contract.
|Utilice la sección "Documentos" para agregar cualquier archivo adjunto al contrato.
|-
|18
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the contract, such as creation, update, invoicing, emails sent, phone calls, etc.
|La pestaña "Eventos" le ofrecerá una lista completa de todos los eventos pasados y futuros relacionados con el contrato, como la creación, actualización, facturación, correos electrónicos enviados, llamadas telefónicas, etc.
|-
|19
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar contract with all the details pre-filled.
|Utilice el botón "Copiar" para crear un contrato similar con todos los detalles ya rellenados.
|-
|20
|You can create an invoice or sales order from the contract by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Invoices and Sales Orders are covered in detail in the relevant video tutorials of these modules. Note that an invoice can also be a recurring invoice, for example, for a yearly contract that needs monthly payments, so an invoice will be generated automatically each month, 12 times.
|Puede crear una factura o pedido de venta a partir del contrato haciendo clic en los botones correspondientes. Las facturas y los pedidos de venta se tratan en detalle en los correspondientes video tutoriales de dichos módulos. Tenga en cuenta que una factura también puede ser una factura recurrente, por ejemplo, para un contrato anual que necesite pagos mensuales, por lo que se generará una factura automáticamente cada mes, 12 veces.
|-
|'''21'''
|'''Managing Services'''
|Gestión de Servicios
|-
|22
|Services that are part of your contract are in the inactive, running, expired or closed state. Click the appropriate buttons to activate or close all the services that are part of the contract. To renew a service of a contract, just update the end date of the service.
|Los servicios que forman parte de su contrato están en estado inactivo, activo, expirado o cerrado. Haga clic en los botones correspondientes para activar o cerrar todos los servicios que forman parte del contrato. Para renovar un servicio de un contrato, basta con actualizar la fecha de finalización del servicio.
|-
|23
|Click on the "Services" list view to view the list of services associated with your contracts. You can view the list of services based on their current status such as inactive, running, expired and closed.
|Haga clic en la vista de lista de "Servicios" para ver la lista de servicios asociados a sus contratos. Puede ver la lista de servicios en función de su estado actual, como inactivo, en servicio, expirado y cerrado.
|-
|24
|In any page of the application, for example, on the main dashboard, when the reference of a contract is mentioned, you can also have an orange flag to alert you when at least one service has expired. You can setup an offset that is the number of days before or after the expiration date to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|En cualquier página de la aplicación, por ejemplo, en el Panel Principal, cuando se menciona la referencia de un contrato, también puede haber una bandera naranja que le avise cuando al menos un servicio haya caducado. Puede configurar una indicación que sea el número de días antes o después de la fecha de vencimiento para decidir cuándo debe mostrarse la alerta visual "Retraso".
|-
|25
|There is also a lot of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your contracts, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your contract database.
|También hay muchas otras características que se pueden activar desde la configuración. Además, como la mayoría de los módulos de Dolibarr, puede añadir sus propios campos personalizados para describir sus contratos, definir los valores por defecto o los campos obligatorios y puede utilizar el módulo de exportación para exportar su base de datos de contratos.
|-
|26
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Gracias por ver este video tutorial. Visite www.dolibarr.org para obtener más información.
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Supplier invoices

2020-12-28T17:02:07Z

Pradeepv: Added FR and ES translations

{{TemplateAssoEn}}
{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

'''Story board for Module Vendor Invoices:'''

'''Video Title:''' Vendor Invoices in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Vendor Invoices module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Invoices" and "Vendors" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You can also enable the "Banks and Cash" module to record payments on dedicated bank accounts.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Financial Modules and enable the Invoices and Vendors module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the "Banks and Cash" module.
|-
|Grant permission on the Invoices and Vendors module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Vendor Invoice'''
|
|-
|Let us explore the various ways in which you can create a vendor invoice. You can create a vendor invoice from a purchase order that has been validated and approved by clicking on the appropriate button. Information available in the purchase order such as vendor, payment terms and project are copied automatically into the vendor invoice.
|Navigate to a purchase order and click on the create invoice button. Show the fields being pre-filled.
|-
|You can also create a vendor invoice or credit note from a third party who is a vendor by navigating to the "Vendor" tab.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|You can also create a vendor invoice directly from the "Vendor Invoices" menu under the "Billing and Payments" tab. Choose the vendor you are creating the invoice for.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|'''Choosing the Invoice Type'''
|
|-
|Credit note invoices can be created to replace or correct previously issued invoices, and they can only be issued from a third party by navigating to the "Vendor" tab or from the invoice you want to correct. You will be able to consume this credit note later to reduce the amount to be paid for a validated invoice.
|Show the various invoice types in the combo button list.
|-
|Choose the invoice date, payment due date, payment terms, payment type, bank account and currency. If the module "Project" is enabled, you will be able to choose a project. Add any public or private notes.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Once the invoice is created, you can add products and services along with the pricing information for the same. You can add multiple products and services. You can choose from existing products and services in order to pre-fill the pricing information.
|Add products or services and choose from pre-filled product or service during the second time.
|-
|Use the linked files menu to add any attachments to the vendor invoice.
|Attach a file.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Vendor Invoice'''
|
|-
|Click on "Validate" to validate the vendor invoice.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the invoice is ready to be sent to your vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Click on the PDF in section "Generated document" to show the PDF.
|-
|You can now use the "Send Email" button to send the invoice to your vendor. Note that all the invoice details are automatically attached to the email.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details, show the email being sent.
|-
|'''Vendor Invoices - Payments'''
|
|-
|If you have received payment for a vendor invoice, click on the "Enter Payment" button to record the payment in the system. Choose the date, payment type and account to credit. Enter the transaction number and any comments. Enter the payment amount and confirm the payment. Note that if you received a partial payment, you will be able to enter a payment again. Once the full payment due for the vendor invoice has been received and recorded, the vendor invoice is automatically closed.
|Show multiple payments being entered and the invoice getting closed automatically once full payment has been received.
|-
|If you wish to mark an invoice as paid, click on the appropriate button. The vendor invoice is automatically closed with the "paid" status.
|Show "Classify Paid" button and click it.
|-
|You can issue a "credit note" for a vendor invoice by clicking on the appropriate button. Note that the invoice type has been set to "credit note" with the invoice which is to be revised being automatically chosen. Fill in the required fields in order to create the "credit note".
|Show issuing of credit note.
|-
|If you have made payments in excess, click on the appropriate button to convert excess paid into an available discount. The discount can now be consumed in another draft invoice.
|Show converting the invoice into discount. Show the discount being consumed in another draft invoice.
|-
|For validated credit notes, you can enter a refund instead of a payment, but you can also decide to convert the credit notes into a "Credit available" for this vendor. So, you will be able to consume the discount available later, reducing the amount payable on another validated invoice.
|Show converting a credit note into a "credit available". Show the page "Absolute Discounts" to show that the credit is available for a later use for this vendor. Consume the discount into another validated invoice to show the remain to pay has been reduced.
|-
|'''Vendor Invoices - Module Features'''
|
|-
|Use the "Clone" button if you want to create a similar vendor invoice in the future.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|You can view the list of vendor invoices with the relevant payment status in the list view. You can also view the list based on vendor invoice status such as Draft, Not Paid and Paid.
|Show the list view and the list views based on status.
|-
|Payments received from vendors are available under the payments list view.
|Show the payments list view.
|-
|You can create reports for payments received on a monthly basis. The report is instantly available for download in the PDF format.
|Show report generation and show the PDF report.
|-
|Statistics gives a birds-eye-view of all vendor invoices. You can filter the statistics based on the available parameters.
|Show statistics and one of the filters.
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to your vendor invoices and you will be able to export your database of vendor invoices and vendor payments.
|Show custom field generation and the invoice creation screen where it is available.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

TODO Add chapter to payment by "Credit Transfer" like it is with payment by "Direct Debit" on customer invoices.

TODO Add chapter to recurring payment for vendor invoice when this will be available in Dolibarr.

'''FRENCH TRANSLATION'''

'''Video Title:''' Vendor Invoices in Dolibarr

'''Translated Video Title: ??'''

{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Translated Voice Over'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Vendor Invoices module in Dolibarr.
|

Bienvenue à ce tutoriel vidéo sur le système ERP et CRM Dolibarr. Cette vidéo explique comment utiliser le module Factures et Avoirs Fournisseurs de Dolibarr.
|-
|'''2'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|

'''Pré-requis'''
|-
|3
|Activate the modules "Invoices"and “Vendors” from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You can also enable the "Banks and Cash" moduleto record payments on dedicated bank accounts.
|

Activez les modules "Factures et Avoirs" et "Fournisseurs" à partir du menu Accueil - Configuration - Modules. Il est également possible d'activer le module "Banques et espèces" pour enregistrer les paiements sur des comptes bancaires dédiés.
|-
|4
|Grant permissions on the Invoices and Vendors modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|

Accordez à vos utilisateurs des autorisations sur les modules "Factures et Avoirs" et "Fournisseurs". Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration des autorisations pour les utilisateurs, vous pouvez regarder notre vidéo "Utilisateurs, groupes et autorisations".
|-
|'''5'''
|'''Creating a Vendor Invoice'''
|

'''Création d'une facture fournisseur'''
|-
|6
|Let us explore the various ways in which you can create a vendor invoice. You can create a vendor invoice from a purchase order that has been validated and approved by clicking on the appropriate button. Information available in the purchase order such as vendor, payment terms and project are copied automatically into the vendor invoice.
|

Permettez-nous d'explorer les différentes façons dont vous pouvez créer une facture et avoir de fournisseur. A partir d'une commande validé et approuvé, vous pouvez créer une facture et avoir fournisseur en cliquant sur le bouton qui convient. Les informations disponibles dans la commande telles que le fournisseur, les conditions de paiement et le projet sont automatiquement copiées dans la facture et avoir fournisseur.
|-
|7
|You can also create a vendor invoice or credit note from a third party who is a vendor by navigating to the "Vendor" tab.
|

Vous pouvez également créer une facture et avoir ou une note de crédit d'un tiers qui est un fournisseur en naviguant dans l'onglet "Fournisseur".
|-
|8
|You can also create a vendor invoice directly from the "Vendor Invoices" menu under the "Billing and Payments" tab. Choose the vendor you are creating the invoice for.
|

Il est également possible de créer une facture et avoir fournisseur directement à partir du menu "Factures et avoirs Fournisseurs" sous l'onglet "Facturation et paiements". Veuillez choisir le fournisseur pour lequel vous créez la facture et avoir.
|-
|'''9'''
|'''Choosing the Invoice Type'''
|

'''Choix du type de facture et avoir'''
|-
|10
|Credit note invoices can be created to replace or correct previously issued invoices, and they can only be issued from a third party by navigating to the "Vendor" tab or from the invoice you want to correct. You will be able to consume this credit note later to reduce the amount to be paid for a validated invoice.
|

Les factures et avoirs de notes de crédit peuvent être créées pour remplacer ou corriger des factures et avoirs émises précédemment. Pour les émettre, il faut passer par l'onglet "Fournisseur" ou par la facture et avoir que vous souhaitez corriger. Vous pourrez ensuite exploiter cette note de crédit pour réduire le montant à payer pour une facture et avoir validée.
|-
|11
|Choose the invoice date, payment due date, payment terms, payment type, bank account and currency. If the module "Project" is enabled, you will be able to choose a project. Add any public or private notes.
|

Choisissez la date de la facture et avoir, l'échéance du paiement, les conditions de paiement, le type de paiement, le compte bancaire et la devise. Si le module "Projet" est activé, vous pourrez choisir un projet. Ajoutez des notes publiques ou privées.
|-
|12
|Once the invoice is created, you can add products and services along with the pricing information for the same. You can add multiple products and services. You can choose from existing products and services in order to pre-fill the pricing information.
|

Une fois que la facture et avoir créée, vous pouvez ajouter des produits et des services avec les informations de prix pour ceux-ci. Vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs produits et services. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les produits et services existants afin de pré-remplir les informations sur les prix.
|-
|13
|Use the linked files menu to add any attachments to the vendor invoice.
|

Utilisez le menu de fichiers en lien pour ajouter des pièces jointes à la facture et avoir du fournisseur.
|-
|'''14'''
|'''Validating and Sending the Vendor Invoice'''
|

'''Validation et envoi de la facture et avoir du fournisseur'''
|-
|15
|Click on "Validate" to validate the vendor invoice.
|

Cliquez sur "Valider" pour valider la facture et avoir du fournisseur.
|-
|16
|Now, the invoice is ready to be sent to your vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|

Maintenant, la facture et avoir envoyée à votre fournisseur. Un modèle par défaut est utilisé pour le fichier PDF généré.
|-
|17
|You can now use the "Send Email" button to send the invoice to your vendor. Note that all the invoice details are automatically attached to the email.
|

Vous pouvez maintenant utiliser le bouton "Envoyer un e-mail" pour envoyer la facture et avoir à votre fournisseur. Sachez que tous les détails de la facture et avoir sont automatiquement joints à l'e-mail.
|-
|'''18'''
|'''Vendor Invoices - Payments'''
|

'''Factures et avoirs des fournisseurs - Paiements'''
|-
|19
|If you have received payment for a vendor invoice, click on the "Enter Payment" button to record the payment in the system. Choose the date, payment type and account to credit. Enter the transaction number and any comments. Enter the payment amount and confirm the payment. Note that if you received a partial payment, you will be able to enter a payment again. Once the full payment due for the vendor invoice has been received and recorded, the vendor invoice is automatically closed.
|

Après réception du paiement d'une facture et avoir de fournisseur, cliquez sur le bouton "Saisir le paiement" pour enregistrer le paiement dans le système. Choisissez la date, le type de paiement et le compte à créditer. Saisissez le numéro de transaction et les éventuels commentaires. Entrez le montant du paiement et confirmez le paiement. Sachez que si vous avez reçu un paiement partiel, il vous sera possible de saisir à nouveau un paiement. Une fois que le paiement total dû pour la facture et avoir du fournisseur a été reçu et enregistré, la facture et avoir du fournisseur est automatiquement clôturée.
|-
|20
|If you wish to mark an invoice as paid, click on the appropriate button. The vendor invoice is automatically closed with the "paid" status.
|

Si vous désirez marquer une facture et avoir comme payée, cliquez sur le bouton qui convient. La facture et avoir du fournisseur est automatiquement clôturée avec le statut "payé".
|-
|21
|You can issue a "credit note" for a vendor invoice by clicking on the appropriate button. Note that the invoice type has been set to "credit note" with the invoice which is to be revised being automatically chosen. Fill in the required fields in order to create the "credit note".
|

Vous pouvez créer une "note de crédit" pour une facture et avoir fournisseur en cliquant sur le bouton qui convient. Sachez que le type de facture et avoir réglé sur "note de crédit", la facture et avoir à réviser étant automatiquement sélectionnée. Remplissez les champs obligatoires afin de créer la "note de crédit".
|-
|22
|If you have made payments in excess, click on the appropriate button to convert excess paid into an available discount. The discount can now be consumed in another draft invoice.
|

Lorsque vous avez effectué des paiements excédentaires, cliquez sur le bouton qui convient pour convertir l'excédent payé en une remise disponible. L'escompte peut maintenant être consommé dans une autre facture et avoir provisoire.
|-
|23
|For validated credit notes, you can enter a refund instead of a payment, but you can also decide to convert the credit notes into a "Credit available" for this vendor. So, you will be able to consume the discount available later, reducing the amount payable on another validated invoice.
|

Pour les notes de crédit validées, vous pouvez saisir un remboursement au lieu d'un paiement, c'est-à-dire que vous pouvez également décider de convertir les notes de crédit en un "Crédit disponible" pour ce fournisseur. Ainsi, vous pourrez consommer l'escompte disponible plus tard, en réduisant le montant à payer sur une autre facture et avoir validée.
|-
|'''24'''
|'''Vendor Invoices - Module Features'''
|

'''Factures et Avoirs des fournisseurs - Caractéristiques du module'''
|-
|25
|Use the "Clone" button if you want to create a similar vendor invoice in the future.
|

Utilisez le bouton "Cloner" si vous souhaitez créer une facture et avoir fournisseur similaire à l'avenir.
|-
|26
|You can view the list of vendor invoices with the relevant payment status in the list view. You can also view the list based on vendor invoice status such as Draft, Not Paid and Paid.
|

Vous pouvez consulter la liste des factures et avoirs fournisseurs avec le statut de paiement correspondant dans la vue de liste. Vous pouvez également consulter la liste en fonction du statut de la facture et avoir fournisseur, par exemple : en cours de paiement, non payée et payée.
|-
|27
|Payments received from vendors are available under the payments list view.
|

Les paiements reçus des fournisseurs sont disponibles dans la vue de la liste des paiements.
|-
|28
|You can create reports for payments received on a monthly basis. The report is instantly available for download in the PDF format.
|

Il est possible de créer des rapports pour les paiements reçus sur une base mensuelle. Le rapport est instantanément disponible pour téléchargement au format PDF.
|-
|29
|Statistics gives a birds-eye-view of all vendor invoices. You can filter the statistics based on the available parameters.
|

Les statistiques donnent un aperçu détaillé de toutes les factures et avoirs des fournisseurs. Vous pouvez filtrer les statistiques en fonction des paramètres disponibles.
|-
|30
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to your vendor invoices and you will be able to export your database of vendor invoices and vendor payments.
|

Plusieurs autres fonctions peuvent être activées à partir de la configuration. De plus, comme la plupart des modules de Dolibarr, il vous est possible d'ajouter vos propres champs personnalisés à vos factures et avoirs fournisseurs et vous pourrez exporter votre base de données de factures et avoirs fournisseurs et de paiements fournisseurs.
|-
|31
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|

Nous vous remercions de regarder ce tutoriel vidéo. Visitez le site www.dolibarr.org pour en savoir plus.
|}

'''SPANISH TRANSLATION'''

'''Video Title:''' Vendor Invoices in Dolibarr

{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Translated Voice Over'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Vendor Invoices module in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenido a este video tutorial sobre el sistema ERP y CRM Dolibarr. En este vídeo, veremos cómo utilizar el módulo de Facturas de Proveedor en Dolibarr.
|-
|'''2'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|Requisitos previos
|-
|3
|Activate the module "Invoices" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable the "Banks and Cash" module.
|Activar el módulo "Facturas" del menú Inicio - Configuración - Módulos. También debe activar el módulo "Bancos y Caja".
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the Invoices module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Conceda permiso al módulo "Facturas" a sus usuarios. Para obtener información más avanzada sobre cómo configurar los permisos de los usuarios, puede ver nuestro vídeo "Usuarios, grupos y permisos".
|-
|'''5'''
|'''Creating a Vendor Invoice'''
|Creación de una Factura de Proveedor
|-
|6
|Let us explore the various ways in which you can create a vendor invoice. You can create a vendor invoice from a purchase order that has been validated and approved by clicking on the appropriate button. Information available in the purchase order such as vendor, payment terms and project are copied automatically into the vendor invoice.
|Exploremos las diversas formas en que puede crear una factura de proveedor. Puede crear una factura de proveedor a partir de una pedido de proveedor que haya sido validado y aprobado haciendo clic en el botón correspondiente. La información disponible en el pedido de proveedor, como el proveedor, las condiciones de pago y el proyecto se copian automáticamente en la factura de proveedor.
|-
|7
|You can also create a vendor invoice or credit note from a third party who is a vendor by navigating to the "Vendor" tab.
|También puede crear una factura de proveedor o un abono de un tercero que sea proveedor, navegando a la pestaña "Proveedor".
|-
|8
|You can also create a vendor invoice directly from the "Vendor Invoices" menu under the "Billing and Payments" tab. Choose the vendor you are creating the invoice for.
|También puede crear una factura de proveedor directamente desde el menú "Facturas proveedor" en la pestaña "Financiera". Seleccione el proveedor para el que está creando la factura.
|-
|'''9'''
|'''Choosing the Invoice Type'''
|Seleccionar el Tipo de Factura
|-
|10
|Credit note invoices can be created to replace or correct previously issued invoices, and they can only be issued from a third party by navigating to the "Vendor" tab or from the invoice you want to correct. You will be able to consume this credit note later to reduce the amount to be paid for a validated invoice.
|Se pueden crear facturas de abono para sustituir o corregir facturas emitidas anteriormente, y sólo pueden ser emitidas por un tercero navegando a la pestaña "Proveedor" o desde la factura que se desea corregir. Podrá consumir este abono más adelante para reducir el importe a pagar por una factura validada.
|-
|11
|Choose the invoice date, payment due date, payment terms, payment type, bank account and currency. If the module "Project" is enabled, you will be able to choose a project. Add any public or private notes.
|Elija la fecha de la factura, la fecha de vencimiento del pago, las condiciones de pago, el tipo de pago, la cuenta bancaria y la moneda. Si el módulo "Proyecto" está activado, podrá elegir un proyecto. Añada cualquier nota pública o privada.
|-
|12
|Once the invoice is created, you can add products and services along with the pricing information for the same. You can add multiple products and services. You can choose from existing products and services in order to pre-fill the pricing information.
|Una vez creada la factura, podrá añadir productos y servicios junto con la información de precios de los mismos. Puede añadir varios productos y servicios. Puede elegir entre los productos y servicios existentes para rellenar de antemano la información de precios.
|-
|13
|Use the linked files menu to add any attachments to the vendor invoice.
|Utilice el menú de documentos para añadir archivos adjuntos a la factura de proveedor.
|-
|'''14'''
|'''Validating and Sending the Vendor Invoice'''
|Validación y Envío de la Factura de Proveedor
|-
|15
|Click on "Validate" to validate the vendor invoice.
|Haga clic en "Validar" para validar la factura del proveedor.
|-
|16
|Now, the invoice is ready to be sent to your vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Ahora, la factura está lista para ser enviada a su proveedor. Se utiliza una plantilla por defecto para el archivo PDF generado.
|-
|17
|You can now use the "Send Email" button to send the invoice to your vendor. Note that all the invoice details are automatically attached to the email.
|Ahora puede utilizar el botón "Enviar e-mail" para enviar la factura a su proveedor. Tenga en cuenta que todos los detalles de la factura se adjuntan automáticamente al correo electrónico.
|-
|'''18'''
|'''Vendor Invoices - Payments'''
|Facturas de Proveedores - Pagos
|-
|19
|If you have received payment for a vendor invoice, click on the "Enter Payment" button to record the payment in the system. Choose the date, payment type and account to credit. Enter the transaction number and any comments. Enter the payment amount and confirm the payment. Note that if you received a partial payment, you will be able to enter a payment again. Once the full payment due for the vendor invoice has been received and recorded, the vendor invoice is automatically closed.
|Si ha recibido el pago de una factura de un proveedor, haga clic en el botón "Añadir Pago" para registrar el pago en el sistema. Elija la fecha, el tipo de pago y la cuenta a acreditar. Introduzca el número de transacción y cualquier comentario. Introduzca el importe del pago y confirme el pago. Tenga en cuenta que si ha recibido un pago parcial, podrá volver a introducir un pago. Una vez que se haya recibido y registrado el pago total adeudado por la factura de proveedor, ésta se cerrará automáticamente.
|-
|20
|If you wish to mark an invoice as paid, click on the appropriate button. The vendor invoice is automatically closed with the "paid" status.
|Si desea marcar una factura como pagada, haga clic en el botón correspondiente. La factura de proveedor se cierra automáticamente con el estado "pagado".
|-
|21
|You can issue a "credit note" for a vendor invoice by clicking on the appropriate button. Note that the invoice type has been set to "credit note" with the invoice which is to be revised being automatically chosen. Fill in the required fields in order to create the "credit note".
|Puede emitir un "Abono" para una factura de proveedor haciendo clic en el botón apropiado. Tenga en cuenta que el tipo de factura se ha configurado como "Abono" y que se elige automáticamente la factura que se va a corregir. Rellene los campos necesarios para crear el "abono ".
|-
|22
|If you have made payments in excess, click on the appropriate button to convert excess paid into an available discount. The discount can now be consumed in another draft invoice.
|Si ha realizado pagos en exceso, haga clic en el botón apropiado para convertir el exceso pagado en un descuento disponible. El descuento puede ser consumido en otra factura de proyecto.
|-
|23
|For validated credit notes, you can enter a refund instead of a payment, but you can also decide to convert the credit notes into a "Credit available" for this vendor. So, you will be able to consume the discount available later, reducing the amount payable on another validated invoice.
|En el caso de los abonos validados, puede introducir un reembolso en lugar de un pago, pero también puede decidir convertir los abonos en un "Crédito disponible" para este proveedor. Así, podrá consumir el descuento disponible más adelante, reduciendo el importe a pagar en otra factura validada.
|-
|'''24'''
|'''Vendor Invoices - Module Features'''
|Facturas de Proveedores - Características del módulo
|-
|25
|Use the "Clone" button if you want to create a similar vendor invoice in the future.
|Utilice el botón "Copiar" si desea crear una factura de proveedor similar en el futuro.
|-
|26
|You can view the list of vendor invoices with the relevant payment status in the list view. You can also view the list based on vendor invoice status such as Draft, Not Paid and Paid.
|Puede ver la lista de facturas de proveedores con el estado de pago correspondiente en la vista de lista. También puede ver la lista según el estado de las facturas de proveedor como Borrador, Pendiente o Pagado.
|-
|27
|Payments received from vendors are available under the payments list view.
|Los pagos recibidos de los proveedores están disponibles en la vista de lista de pagos.
|-
|28
|You can create reports for payments received on a monthly basis. The report is instantly available for download in the PDF format.
|Se pueden crear informes para los pagos recibidos mensualmente. El informe está disponible instantáneamente para su descarga en el formato PDF.
|-
|29
|Statistics gives a birds-eye-view of all vendor invoices. You can filter the statistics based on the available parameters.
|Las estadísticas ofrecen una vista de pájaro de todas las facturas de proveedores. Puede filtrar las estadísticas en función de los parámetros disponibles.
|-
|30
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to your vendor invoices and you will be able to export your database of vendor invoices and vendor payments.
|Hay muchas otras características que pueden ser activadas desde la configuración. Además, como la mayoría de los módulos de Dolibarr, puede añadir sus propios campos personalizados a sus facturas de proveedores y podrá exportar su base de datos de facturas y pagos de proveedores.
|-
|31
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Gracias por ver este video tutorial. Visite www.dolibarr.org para obtener más información.
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Sale Orders

2020-12-28T16:52:25Z

Pradeepv: Added FR and ES translations

{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

'''Story board for Module Sales Orders:'''

'''Video Title:''' Sales Orders

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Sales Orders module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Sales Orders" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you may be interested in enabling other modules that interact with the sales order module such as the modules Proposals, Invoices, etc, even if these are not required.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll down and enable the Sales Orders module. Enable also the Proposals and Invoices modules.
|-
|Grant permission on the "Sales Orders" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Sales Order'''
|
|-
|A Sales Order is usually created from a commercial proposal that has been accepted by your customer or from a contract. Navigate to the commercial proposal and click on the "Create Order" button which is available only for commercial proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|Navigate to the commercial proposals list view. Choose a proposal. Click on the "Create Order" button.
|-
|In this case, the products or services defined in the proposal are copied into the Sales Order automatically. For more details on how to work with commercial proposals and quotes, refer to the video about Commercial Proposals and Quotes.
|Highlight and show that the products have been copied over into the Sales Order.
|-
|When a sales order is created from a proposal, like any other object created from another one in Dolibarr, the sales order and the commercial proposal remain linked with each other. You can switch at any time from the sales order to the proposal by using the links visible in the section "Related Objects".
|Show the automatically generated link under "Related Objects".
|-
|You can also make some links manually with any other object by using the "Link to" menu and choosing the object type and object to which the link must be created.
|Create a link manually.
|-
|You can also create a Sales Order from scratch by clicking on "New Order" and entering all the details manually.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Provide the customer reference. Choose the third party for whom you are creating the Sales Order. Choose the planned date of delivery, payment terms, payment type, availability delay, shipping method, acquisition channel, project. Add any public or private notes. Click the "create" button to create the Sales Order.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|You can now start adding the actual product or service and pricing information to your Sales Order. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple products or services to the Sales Order.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Sales Order'''
|
|-
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the Sales Order.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the Sales Order is ready to be sent to your customer. Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the Sales Order are automatically included.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details. Show the email being sent.
|-
|'''Sales Orders - Module Features'''
|
|-
|You can use the list view to view the list of Sales Orders. The list is categorized based on the status of the Sales Orders such as Draft, Validated, In Process, Delivered and Cancelled
|Show the list of Sales Orders. Show the various list views. Click on a Sales Order to open the detailed view.
|-
|The Contacts and Addresses tab can be used to define explicit contacts - either business entities or people - to the Sale Order, but this is optional.
|Show the contacts tab. Add a contact.
|-
|Use the "Shipments" tab to choose a source warehouse and send shipments to your customers.
|Click and demo the shipments tab and create shipment.
|-
|Use the "Linked files" section to add any file attachments to the Sales Order.
|Show the linked files tab and upload an attachment.
|-
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Sales Order with all the details pre-filled.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|You can create a contract, shipment or invoice from the sales order by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Contracts and Invoices are covered in detail in the relevant video tutorials of these modules.
|Show the appropriate buttons. Click on one of them to show the contract or invoice creation screen.
|-
|You must decide, based to your own internal workflow, the order of events according to which you make the shipment from the order, you create and send the invoice, and you set the order as delivered. Like most other Dolibarr modules, the Dolibarr process can be customised to work according to how your existing company process works. So, you need not change your company process according to Dolibarr!
|Show an Invoice, shipment for the same and the order being marked as delivered.
|-
|Note that the generated invoice can also be a recurring invoice. For example, for a Sales Order that need monthly payments for 1 year, an invoice will be generated automatically each month, 12 times. More information on the invoicing process is covered in the videos about Invoices and Recurring Invoices.
|Show a recurring invoice.
|-
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the orders are being fulfilled. Use the filters such as Company and Customer to view detailed statistics.
|Show the Statistics and fill in a filter.
|-
|In any page of the application, for example on the main dashboard, when the reference of a Sales Order is mentioned, an orange flag alerts you when a Sales Order is delayed. You can setup an offset - the number of days before or after the expiration date - to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|Go on main My dashboard page to show the widget "Orders" to show a contract with the exclamation flag and put the mouse on the flag so the tooltip "Late" appears.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup, for example, to generate an invoice automatically on order validation or to set a Sales order automatically to the paid status when an invoice is generated thanks to the Workflow module.
|Navigate to the module settings for Sales Orders.
|-
|Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your Sales Orders, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your database of Sales Orders.
|Show adding a custom field on sale order
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}
'''FRENCH TRANSLATION'''

'''Video Title in English:''' Sales Orders in Dolibarr

'''Video Title Translation: ??'''

{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over in English'''
|'''Voice Over Translation'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Sales Orders module in Dolibarr.
|

Bienvenue à ce tutoriel vidéo sur le système ERP et CRM Dolibarr. Cette vidéo explique comment utiliser le module "Commandes" de Dolibarr.
|-
|2
|'''Prerequisites'''
|

'''Pré-requis'''
|-
|3
|Activate the module "Sales Orders" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you may be interested in enabling other modules that interact with the sales order module such as the modules Proposals, Invoices, etc, even if these are not required.
|

Activez le module "Commandes" à partir du menu Accueil - Configuration - Modules. Sachez que vous pouvez être intéressé par l'activation d'autres modules qui entrent en interaction avec le module "Commandes", tels que les modules "Propositions", "Factures et Avoirs", etc, même si ceux-ci ne sont pas nécessaires.
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the "Sales Orders" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|

Accordez à vos utilisateurs une autorisation sur le module "Commandes". Pour plus d'informations sur la manière de configurer les autorisations pour les utilisateurs, vous pouvez regarder notre vidéo "Utilisateurs, groupes et autorisations".
|-
|5
|'''Creating a Sales Order'''
|

'''Création d'une commande'''
|-
|6
|A Sales Order is usually created from a commercial proposal that has been accepted by your customer or from a contract. Navigate to the commercial proposal and click on the "Create Order" button which is available only for commercial proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|

Une commande est généralement créée sur la base d'une proposition commerciale qui a été acceptée par votre client ou d'un contrat. Accédez à la proposition commerciale et cliquez sur le bouton "Créer une commande" qui n'est disponible que pour les propositions commerciales qui ont été validées et acceptées.
|-
|7
|In this case, the products or services defined in the proposal are copied into the Sales Order automatically. For more details on how to work with commercial proposals and quotes, refer to the video about Commercial Proposals and Quotes.
|

Dans ce cas, les produits ou services définis dans la proposition sont automatiquement copiés dans la commande. Pour plus de détails sur la manière de travailler avec les propositions commerciales et les devis, regardez la vidéo sur les propositions commerciales et les devis.
|-
|8
|When a sales order is created from a proposal, like any other object created from another one in Dolibarr, the sales order and the commercial proposal remain linked with each other. You can switch at any time from the sales order to the proposal by using the links visible in the section "Related Objects".
|

Lors de la création d'une commande client à partir d'une proposition, comme tout autre objet créé à partir d'une autre dans Dolibarr, la commande client et la proposition commerciale restent liées entre elles. Vous pouvez changer à tout moment de la commande client à la proposition commerciale en utilisant les liens visibles dans la section "Objets connexes".
|-
|9
|You can also make some links manually with any other object by using the "Link to" menu and choosing the object type and object to which the link must be created.
|

Il est également possible de créer vous-même des liens avec tout autre objet en utilisant le menu "Lien vers" et en choisissant le type d'objet et l'objet vers lequel le lien doit être créé.
|-
|10
|You can also create a Sales Order from scratch by clicking on "New Order" and entering all the details manually.
|

Il est aussi possible de créer une commande à partir de zéro en cliquant sur "Nouvelle commande" et en entrant tous les détails manuellement.
|-
|11
|Provide the customer reference. Choose the third party for whom you are creating the Sales Order. Choose the planned date of delivery, payment terms, payment type, availability delay, shipping method, acquisition channel, project. Add any public or private notes. Click the "create" button to create the Sales Order.
|

Indiquez la référence du client. Choisissez le tiers pour lequel vous créez la commande client. Choisissez la date de livraison prévue, les conditions de paiement, le type de paiement, le délai de disponibilité, le mode d'expédition, le canal d'acquisition, le projet. Ajoutez toutes notes publiques ou privées. Cliquez sur le bouton "créer" pour créer la commande client.
|-
|12
|You can now start adding the actual product or service and pricing information to your Sales Order. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple products or services to the Sales Order.
|

Vous pouvez maintenant commencer à ajouter le produit ou service réel et les informations tarifaires à votre commande. Ajoutez le nom du service ou choisissez l'un de vos services prédéfinis. Choisissez une tranche de taxe, le cas échéant. Saisissez le coût net, la quantité et toute remise applicable. Il vous est possible d'ajouter plusieurs produits ou services à la commande.
|-
|'''13'''
|'''Validating and Sending the Sales Order'''
|

'''Validation et envoi de la commande'''
|-
|14
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the Sales Order.
|

Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur "Valider" pour finaliser la commande.
|-
|15
|Now, the Sales Order is ready to be sent to your customer. Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the Sales Order are automatically included.
|

Maintenant, la commande est prête à être envoyée à votre client. Cliquez sur le bouton "Envoyer un courriel". Vous pouvez maintenant remplir les détails du destinataire. Tous les autres détails de la commande sont automatiquement inclus.
|-
|16
|'''Sales Orders - Module Features'''
|

'''Commandes - Caractéristiques du module'''
|-
|17
|You can use the list view to view the list of Sales Orders. The list is categorized based on the status of the Sales Orders such as Draft, Validated, In Process, Delivered and Cancelled
|

Vous pouvez utiliser la vue en liste pour afficher la liste des commandes. La liste est classée par catégorie en fonction du statut des commandes clients, par exemple : projet, validé, en cours de traitement, livré et annulé
|-
|18
|The Contacts and Addresses tab can be used to define explicit contacts - either business entities or people - to the Sale Order, but this is optional.
|

L'onglet Contacts et adresses peut être utilisé pour définir des contacts explicites - soit des entités commerciales, soit des personnes - avec l'ordre de commande, mais cela est facultatif.
|-
|19
|Use the "Shipments" tab to choose a source warehouse and send shipments to your customers.
|

Utilisez l'onglet "Expéditions" pour choisir un entrepôt source et envoyer des expéditions à vos clients.
|-
|20
|Use the "Linked files" section to add any file attachments to the Sales Order.
|

Utilisez la section "Fichiers liés" pour ajouter tout fichier joint à la commande.
|-
|21
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Sales Order with all the details pre-filled.
|

Utilisez le bouton "Cloner" pour créer une commande similaire avec tous les détails pré-remplis.
|-
|22
|You can create a contract, shipment or invoice from the sales order by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Contracts and Invoices are covered in detail in the relevant video tutorials of these modules.
|

A partir de la commande client, vous pouvez créer un contrat, une expédition ou une facture et avoir en cliquant sur les boutons qui conviennent. Les contrats et les factures et avoirs sont traités en détail dans les tutoriels vidéo correspondants de ces modules.
|-
|23
|You must decide, based to your own internal workflow, the order of events according to which you make the shipment from the order, you create and send the invoice, and you set the order as delivered. Like most other Dolibarr modules, the Dolibarr process can be customised to work according to how your existing company process works. So, you need not change your company process according to Dolibarr!
|

En fonction de votre propre flux de travail interne, vous devez décider l'ordre des événements selon lequel vous effectuez l'expédition à partir de la commande, vous créez et envoyez la facture et avoir, et vous définissez la commande comme livrée. Comme la plupart des autres modules Dolibarr, le processus Dolibarr peut être personnalisé pour fonctionner selon le fonctionnement de votre processus d'entreprise existant. Ainsi, vous n'avez pas besoin de changer votre processus d'entreprise selon Dolibarr !
|-
|24
|Note that the generated invoice can also be a recurring invoice. For example, for a Sales Order that need monthly payments for 1 year, an invoice will be generated automatically each month, 12 times. More information on the invoicing process is covered in the videos about Invoices and Recurring Invoices.
|

Notez que la facture et avoir générée peut également être une facture et avoir récurrente. Par exemple, pour une commande qui nécessite des paiements mensuels pendant 1 an, une facture et avoir générée automatiquement chaque mois, 12 fois. Pour plus d'informations sur le processus de facturation, regardez les vidéos sur les factures et avoirs et les factures et avoirs récurrentes.
|-
|25
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the orders are being fulfilled. Use the filters such as Company and Customer to view detailed statistics.
|

Les "Statistiques" offrent une vue d'ensemble de la manière dont les commandes sont exécutées. Utilisez les filtres tels que "Société" et "Client" pour afficher des statistiques détaillées.
|-
|26
|In any page of the application, for example on the main dashboard, when the reference of a Sales Order is mentioned, an orange flag alerts you when a Sales Order is delayed. You can setup an offset - the number of days before or after the expiration date - to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|

Dans n'importe quelle page de l'application, par exemple sur le tableau de bord principal, lorsque la référence d'une commande est mentionnée, on vous signale par un drapeau orange qu'une commande est retardée.
|-
|27
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup, for example, to generate an invoice automatically on order validation or to set a Sales order automatically to the paid status when an invoice is generated thanks to the Workflow module.
|

Vous pouvez définir un décalage - à savoir le nombre de jours avant ou après la date d'expiration - pour décider quand l'alerte visuelle "Retard" doit être affichée.
|-
|28
|Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your Sales Orders, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your database of Sales Orders.
|

De plus, comme la plupart des modules Dolibarr, vous pouvez ajouter vos propres champs personnalisés pour décrire vos Commandes, définir des valeurs par défaut ou des champs obligatoires et vous pouvez utiliser le module d'exportation pour exporter votre base de données de Commandes.
|-
|29
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|

Nous vous remercions de regarder ce tutoriel vidéo. Visitez le site www.dolibarr.org pour en savoir plus.
|}

'''SPANISH TRANSLATION'''

'''Video Title in English:''' Sales Orders in Dolibarr

{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over in English'''
|'''Voice Over Translation'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Sales Orders module in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenido a este video tutorial sobre el sistema ERP y CRM Dolibarr. En este vídeo, veremos cómo utilizar el módulo de Pedidos de Venta en Dolibarr.
|-
|2
|'''Prerequisites'''
|Requisitos previos
|-
|3
|Activate the module "Sales Orders" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you may be interested in enabling other modules that interact with the sales order module such as the modules Proposals, Invoices, etc, even if these are not required.
|Activar el módulo "Pedidos" del menú Inicio - Configuración - Módulos. Tenga en cuenta que podría ser interesante activar otros módulos que interactúan con el módulo de pedidos, como los módulos Presupuestos, Facturas y Abonos, etc., aunque no sean necesarios.
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the "Sales Orders" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Conceda permiso al módulo "Pedidos" a sus usuarios. Para obtener información más avanzada sobre cómo configurar los permisos de los usuarios, puede ver nuestro video "Usuarios, Grupos y Permisos".
|-
|5
|'''Creating a Sales Order'''
|Creación de un Pedido
|-
|6
|A Sales Order is usually created from a commercial proposal that has been accepted by your customer or from a contract. Navigate to the commercial proposal and click on the "Create Order" button which is available only for commercial proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|Un pedido se crea normalmente a partir de un presupuesto aceptado por el cliente o de un contrato. Navegue hasta el presupuesto y haga clic en el botón "Crear pedido", que sólo está disponible para las propuestas comerciales que han sido validadas y aceptadas.
|-
|7
|In this case, the products or services defined in the proposal are copied into the Sales Order automatically. For more details on how to work with commercial proposals and quotes, refer to the video about Commercial Proposals and Quotes.
|En este caso, los productos o servicios definidos en la propuesta se copian automáticamente en el Pedido. Para más detalles sobre cómo trabajar con prespuestos y cotizaciones, consulte el video sobre Presupuestos y Cotizaciones.
|-
|8
|When a sales order is created from a proposal, like any other object created from another one in Dolibarr, the sales order and the commercial proposal remain linked with each other. You can switch at any time from the sales order to the proposal by using the links visible in the section "Related Objects".
|Cuando se crea un pedido a partir de un presupuesto, como cualquier otro objeto creado a partir de otro en Dolibarr, el pedido y el presupuesto permanecen unidos entre sí. Puede pasar en cualquier momento del pedido de venta a la propuesta utilizando los enlaces visibles en la sección "Objetos relacionados".
|-
|9
|You can also make some links manually with any other object by using the "Link to" menu and choosing the object type and object to which the link must be created.
|También puede realizar algunos enlaces manualmente con cualquier otro objeto utilizando el menú "Enlazar a..." y eligiendo el tipo de objeto y el objeto con el que se debe crear el enlace.
|-
|10
|You can also create a Sales Order from scratch by clicking on "New Order" and entering all the details manually.
|También puede crear un pedido desde cero haciendo clic en "Nuevo pedido" e introduciendo todos los detalles manualmente.
|-
|11
|Provide the customer reference. Choose the third party for whom you are creating the Sales Order. Choose the planned date of delivery, payment terms, payment type, availability delay, shipping method, acquisition channel, project. Add any public or private notes. Click the "create" button to create the Sales Order.
|Proporcione la referencia del cliente. Elija el tercero para el cual está creando el Pedido. Seleccione la fecha prevista de entrega, las condiciones de pago, el tipo de pago, el tiempo de entrega, el método de envío, el canal de adquisición, el proyecto. Añada cualquier nota pública o privada. Haga clic en el botón "Crear borrador" para crear el Pedido.
|-
|12
|You can now start adding the actual product or service and pricing information to your Sales Order. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple products or services to the Sales Order.
|Ahora puede comenzar a agregar los productos o servicios reales y la información de precios a su Pedido. Añada el nombre del servicio o elija uno de sus servicios predefinidos. Elija una tabla de impuestos si es pertinente. Ingrese el precio unitario, la cantidad y cualquier descuento correspondiente. Puede agregar varios productos o servicios al pedido.
|-
|'''13'''
|'''Validating and Sending the Sales Order'''
|Validación y Envío del Pedido
|-
|14
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the Sales Order.
|Una vez que haya terminado, haga clic en "Validar" para finalizar el pedido.
|-
|15
|Now, the Sales Order is ready to be sent to your customer. Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the Sales Order are automatically included.
|Ahora, el Pedido está listo para ser enviado a su cliente. Haga clic en el botón "Enviar e-mail". Ahora puede rellenar los datos del receptor. Todos los demás detalles del Pedido se incluyen de forma automática.
|-
|16
|'''Sales Orders - Module Features'''
|Pedidos - Características del módulo
|-
|17
|You can use the list view to view the list of Sales Orders. The list is categorized based on the status of the Sales Orders such as Draft, Validated, In Process, Delivered and Cancelled
|Puede utilizar la vista de lista para ver la lista de pedidos de venta. La lista se clasifica en función del estado de los pedidos de cliente, como Borrador, Validado, Expedición en curso, Emitido y Anulado.
|-
|18
|The Contacts and Addresses tab can be used to define explicit contacts - either business entities or people - to the Sale Order, but this is optional.
|La pestaña Contactos/Direcciones puede ser usada para definir contactos explícitos - ya sea entidades comerciales o personas - para el Pedido, pero esto es opcional.
|-
|19
|Use the "Shipments" tab to choose a source warehouse and send shipments to your customers.
|Utilice la pestaña "Envíos" para elegir un almacén de origen y enviar los pedidos a sus clientes.
|-
|20
|Use the "Linked files" section to add any file attachments to the Sales Order.
|Utilice la sección "Documentos" para añadir cualquier archivo adjunto al Pedido.
|-
|21
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Sales Order with all the details pre-filled.
|Utilice el botón "Copiar" para crear un Pedido de Venta similar con todos los detalles prellenados.
|-
|22
|You can create a contract, shipment or invoice from the sales order by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Contracts and Invoices are covered in detail in the relevant video tutorials of these modules.
|Puede crear un contrato, un envío o una factura a partir del pedido haciendo clic en los botones correspondientes. Los contratos y las facturas se tratan en detalle en los correspondientes video tutoriales de estos módulos.
|-
|23
|You must decide, based to your own internal workflow, the order of events according to which you make the shipment from the order, you create and send the invoice, and you set the order as delivered. Like most other Dolibarr modules, the Dolibarr process can be customised to work according to how your existing company process works. So, you need not change your company process according to Dolibarr!
|Debe decidir, en función de su propio flujo de trabajo interno, el orden de los eventos según los cuales realiza el envío desde el pedido, crea y envía la factura y establece el pedido como entregado. Como la mayoría de los otros módulos de Dolibarr, el proceso Dolibarr puede ser personalizado para funcionar según el funcionamiento interno de su empresa. Por lo tanto, ¡no es necesario que cambie su proceso de empresa según Dolibarr!
|-
|24
|Note that the generated invoice can also be a recurring invoice. For example, for a Sales Order that need monthly payments for 1 year, an invoice will be generated automatically each month, 12 times. More information on the invoicing process is covered in the videos about Invoices and Recurring Invoices.
|Tenga en cuenta que la factura generada también puede ser una factura recurrente. Por ejemplo, para un pedido de venta que necesita pagos mensuales durante 1 año, se generará una factura automáticamente cada mes, 12 veces. Más información sobre el proceso de facturación en los vídeos sobre Facturas y Facturas Recurrentes.
|-
|25
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the orders are being fulfilled. Use the filters such as Company and Customer to view detailed statistics.
|"Estadísticas" da una visión a vista de pájaro de cómo están evolucionando los pedidos. Utilice los filtros como Tercero y Cliente para ver las estadísticas detalladas.
|-
|26
|In any page of the application, for example on the main dashboard, when the reference of a Sales Order is mentioned, an orange flag alerts you when a Sales Order is delayed. You can setup an offset - the number of days before or after the expiration date - to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|En cualquier página de la aplicación, por ejemplo en el Panel Principal, cuando se menciona la referencia de un Pedido, una bandera naranja le avisa cuando un Pedido se retrasa. Puede configurar un aviso - el número de días antes o después de la fecha de vencimiento - para decidir cuándo debe mostrarse la alerta visual de "Tardío".
|-
|27
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup, for example, to generate an invoice automatically on order validation or to set a Sales order automatically to the paid status when an invoice is generated thanks to the Workflow module.
|También hay muchas otras características que se pueden activar desde la configuración, por ejemplo, generar una factura automáticamente al validar un pedido o poner un Pedido automáticamente en estado pagado cuando se genera una factura gracias al módulo Flujo de Trabajo.
|-
|28
|Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your Sales Orders, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your database of Sales Orders.
|Además, como la mayoría de los módulos Dolibarr, puede añadir sus propios campos personalizados para describir sus Pedidos, definir los valores por defecto o los campos obligatorios y puede utilizar el módulo de exportación para exportar su base de datos de Pedidos.
|-
|29
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Gracias por ver este video tutorial. Visite www.dolibarr.org para obtener más información.
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Stock

2020-12-28T16:48:48Z

Pradeepv: Added FR and ES translations

{{TemplateAssoEn}}
{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

'''Story board for Module Stocks:'''

'''Video Title:''' Stocks in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Stocks module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module Stocks from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You may also want to activate the module "Product Lots". The Products module is activated automatically when the Stocks module is activated.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Stocks module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the module "Stock" and "Product Lots".
|-
|Grant permission on the "Stocks" and "Products" modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Stock Allocation'''
|
|-
|The Stock management module saves the current quantity, status and movement of products that are stocked in warehouses. Apply the "Stock too low" filter to view products having stock less than the desired stock.
|Show the list view of stocks.
|-
|You can create a warehouse from the respective menu. A warehouse is a location where products are received at; or stocked and shipped from.
|Show creating a warehouse.
|-
|While creating a product, the stock allocation parameters are also captured. Choose a default warehouse where the product is usually stocked. Specify a stock limit if you want to be notified when the stock limit is reached. Specify the desired quantity you want to get when performing automatic replenishment.
|Demo product creation screen and input the fields mentioned in the voice over.
|-
|For any product, the stocking information is available under the "Stock" tab. This includes all stocking parameters as well as warehouses.
|Show a product detail screen. Click on the Stock tab to show it.
|-
|Each product has 2 values of sock. Real stock, which is also known as physical stock, and virtual stock.
Real stock is the real quantity you have in your warehouse.
Virtual stock is the stock you will have once all pending operations that influence the stock will be processeed, such as pending orders, shipments, manufacturing orders etc.
|Show the 2 fields on a given product
|-
|Purchase orders, sales orders, shipments, and invoices can automatically update the virtual product stock or the real stock when the orders, shipments or invoices are fulfilled. The processes that change stocks depends on your setup of the "Stock: module. You must choose the setup according to your needs.
|Show the setup page of module Stock to list all option to increase and decrease stock.
|-
|'''Stocks - Module Features'''
|
|-
|When new stock arrives, or when any stock leaves the warehouse, click on the appropriate button to update the stock by means of stock correction. Choose the warehouse, and choose whether to add or delete stock. Enter the number of units and unit purchase price. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Finally, enter a label and inventory code for capturing the stock movement.
|Demo Stock Correction using the "Correct Stock" button.
|-
|You can transfer stock from one warehouse to another by clicking on the appropriate button. Choose the source warehouse, the target warehouse and the number of units to be transferred.
|Demo Stock Transfer.
|-
|Note that if you have created product variants, then the stock correction and stock transfer options are available only on those product variants and not on the original product.
|Show the buttons disabled for a product which has variants defined.
|-
|Stock correction and stock transfer are considered as stock movements and can be tracked from the "Movements" list view.
|Show the previous entry showing up in the Movements list view.
|-
|The "Mass stock transfer" menu option allows you to move stock from one warehouse to another.
|Show mass stock transfer. Click on record transfer and demo the feature.
|-
|"Replenishment" is a list of all products that have stock that is lower than the desired stock. Choose a product by ticking the checkbox to create a purchase order to fill the difference.
|Demo the replenishment feature.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module "Setup". Also, like most other Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your product stock, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the import or export modules to import or export your product stock database.
|Show custom field creation
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

TODO: Add inventory features when available in stable version (ignored for the moment).

TODO: Add feature stock at date (ignored for the moment).

'''FRENCH TRANSLATION:'''

'''Video Title:''' Stocks in Dolibarr

'''Translated Video Title: ??'''
 
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over in English'''
|'''Translated Voice Over'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Stocks module in Dolibarr.
|

Bienvenue à ce tutoriel vidéo sur le système ERP et CRM Dolibarr. Cette vidéo explique comment utiliser le module Stocks dans Dolibarr.
|-
|'''2'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|

'''Pré-requis'''
|-
|3
|Activate the module Stocks from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You may also want to activate the module "Product Lots". The Products module is activated automatically when the Stocks module is activated.
|

Activez le module Stocks à partir du menu Accueil - Configuration - Modules. Il est également possible d'activer le module "Lots de produits". En effet, le module "Produits" est automatiquement activé lorsque le module "Stocks" est activé.
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the "Stocks" and "Products" modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|

Accordez à vos utilisateurs les autorisations sur les modules "Stocks" et "Produits". Pour plus d'informations sur la manière de configurer les autorisations pour les utilisateurs, vous pouvez regarder notre vidéo "Utilisateurs, groupes et autorisations".
|-
|'''5'''
|'''Stock Allocation'''
|

'''Allocation des stocks'''
|-
|6
|The Stock management module saves the current quantity, status and movement of products that are stocked in warehouses. Apply the "Stock too low" filter to view products having stock less than the desired stock.
|

Le module de gestion des stocks enregistre la quantité actuelle, le statut et le mouvement des produits stockés dans les entrepôts. Appliquez le filtre "Stock trop faible" pour consulter les produits dont le stock est inférieur au stock souhaité.
|-
|7
|You can create a warehouse from the respective menu. A warehouse is a location where products are received at; or stocked and shipped from.
|

Vous pouvez créer un entrepôt à partir du menu correspondant. Un entrepôt est un endroit où les produits sont reçus ou stockés et expédiés.
|-
|8
|While creating a product, the stock allocation parameters are also captured. Choose a default warehouse where the product is usually stocked. Specify a stock limit if you want to be notified when the stock limit is reached. Specify the desired quantity you want to get when performing automatic replenishment.
|

Lors de la création d'un produit, les paramètres de répartition des stocks sont également saisis. Choisissez un entrepôt par défaut où le produit est habituellement stocké. Précisez une limite de stock si vous souhaitez être averti lorsque la limite de stock est atteinte. Précisez la quantité souhaitée que vous souhaitez obtenir lors du réapprovisionnement automatique.
|-
|9
|For any product, the stocking information is available under the "Stock" tab. This includes all stocking parameters as well as warehouses.
|

Pour tout produit, les informations de stockage sont disponibles sous l'onglet "Stock". Cela englobe tous les paramètres de stockage ainsi que les entrepôts.
|-
|10
|Each product has 2 values of sock. Real stock, which is also known as physical stock, and virtual stock.Real stock is the real quantity you have in your warehouse. Virtual stock is the stock you will have once all pending operations that influence the stock will be processed, such as pending orders, shipments, manufacturing orders etc.
|

Chaque produit dispose de 2 valeurs de stock. Le stock réel, également appelé stock physique, et le stock virtuel. Le stock réel est la quantité réelle disponible dans votre entrepôt. Le stock virtuel est le stock qui sera disponible une fois que toutes les opérations en attente qui influencent le stock seront traitées, comme les commandes en attente, les expéditions, les ordres de fabrication, etc.
|-
|11
|Purchase orders, sales orders, shipments, and invoices can automatically update the virtual product stock or the real stock when the orders, shipments or invoices are fulfilled. The processes that change stocks depends on your setup of the "Stock: module. You must choose the setup according to your needs.
|Les commandes d'achat, les commandes, les factures et avoirs peuvent entraîner une mise à jour automatique du stock virtuel de produits ou du stock réel lorsque les commandes, les factures et avoirs sont exécutées. Les processus qui modifient les stocks sont liés à la configuration du module "Stock :". Choisissez la configuration en fonction de vos besoins.
|-
|'''12'''
|'''Stocks - Module Features'''
|'''Stocks - Caractéristiques du module'''
|-
|13
|When new stock arrives, or when any stock leaves the warehouse, click on the appropriate button to update the stock by means of stock correction. Choose the warehouse, and choose whether to add or delete stock. Enter the number of units and unit purchase price. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Finally, enter a label and inventory code for capturing the stock movement.
|Lorsqu'un nouveau stock arrive, ou lorsqu'un stock quitte l'entrepôt, cliquez sur le bouton de mise à jour du stock par le biais de la correction du stock. Choisissez l'entrepôt, puis décidez si vous voulez ajouter ou supprimer du stock. Saisissez le nombre d'unités et le prix d'achat unitaire. Si le module "Projet" est activé, vous pouvez choisir un projet. Enfin, entrez un label et un code d'inventaire pour saisir le mouvement de stock.
|-
|14
|You can transfer stock from one warehouse to another by clicking on the appropriate button. Choose the source warehouse, the target warehouse and the number of units to be transferred.
|Il est possible de transférer le stock d'un entrepôt à l'autre en cliquant sur le bouton qui correspond. Choisissez l'entrepôt source, l'entrepôt cible et le nombre d'unités à transférer.
|-
|15
|Note that if you have created product variants, then the stock correction and stock transfer options are available only on those product variants and not on the original product.
|Sachez que si vous avez créé des variantes de produit, les options de correction de stock et de transfert de stock ne sont disponibles que pour ces variantes de produit et non pour le produit d'origine.
|-
|16
|Stock correction and stock transfer are considered as stock movements and can be tracked from the "Movements" list view.
|La correction de stock et le transfert de stock sont considérés comme des mouvements de stock et peuvent être suivis à partir de la vue de liste "Mouvements".
|-
|17
|The "Mass stock transfer" menu option allows you to move stock from one warehouse to another.
|L'option de menu "Transfert de stock en masse" vous permet de déplacer le stock d'un entrepôt à un autre.
|-
|18
|"Replenishment" is a list of all products that have stock that is lower than the desired stock. Choose a product by ticking the checkbox to create a purchase order to fill the difference.
|Le "Réapprovisionnement" est une liste de tous les produits dont le stock est inférieur au stock recherché. Choisissez un produit en cochant la case pour créer une commande afin de combler la différence.
|-
|19
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module "Setup". Also, like most other Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your product stock, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the import or export modules to import or export your product stock database.
|Il existe également de nombreuses autres fonctionnalités qui peuvent être activées à partir du module "Configuration". De plus, comme la plupart des autres modules de Dolibarr, vous disposez de champs personnalisés pour décrire votre stock de produits, définir des valeurs par défaut ou des champs obligatoires et vous pouvez utiliser les modules d'importation ou d'exportation afin d'importer ou d'exporter votre base de données de stock de produits.
|-
|20
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Nous vous remercions de regarder ce tutoriel vidéo. Visitez le site www.dolibarr.org pour en savoir plus.
|}

'''SPANISH TRANSLATION'''

'''Video Title:''' Stocks in Dolibarr
 
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over in English'''
|'''Translated Voice Over'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Stocks module in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenido a este video tutorial sobre el sistema ERP y CRM Dolibarr. En este vídeo, veremos cómo utilizar el módulo Stocks de Productos en Dolibarr.
|-
|'''2'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|Requisitos previos
|-
|3
|Activate the module Stocks from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You may also want to activate the module "Product Lots". The Products module is activated automatically when the Stocks module is activated.
|Activar el módulo Stocks de Productos desde el menú Inicio - Configuración - Módulos. También puede activar el módulo "Lotes de productos". El módulo "Productos" se activa automáticamente cuando se activa el módulo "Stocks de Productos".
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the "Stocks" and "Products" modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Conceda permiso a sus usuarios para utilizar los módulos "Stocks de Productos" y "Productos". Para obtener información más avanzada sobre cómo configurar los permisos de los usuarios, puede ver nuestro video "Usuarios, Grupos y Permisos".
|-
|'''5'''
|'''Stock Allocation'''
|Asignación de Existencias
|-
|6
|The Stock management module saves the current quantity, status and movement of products that are stocked in warehouses. Apply the "Stock too low" filter to view products having stock less than the desired stock.
|El módulo de Stocks de Productos guarda la cantidad, el estado y el movimiento de los productos que están almacenados en los almacenes. Aplique el filtro "Stock insuficiente" para ver los productos que tienen un stock inferior al deseado.
|-
|7
|You can create a warehouse from the respective menu. A warehouse is a location where products are received at; or stocked and shipped from.
|Puede crear un almacén desde el menú correspondiente. Un almacén es un lugar donde se reciben productos, almacenan y desde donde se envían.
|-
|8
|While creating a product, the stock allocation parameters are also captured. Choose a default warehouse where the product is usually stocked. Specify a stock limit if you want to be notified when the stock limit is reached. Specify the desired quantity you want to get when performing automatic replenishment.
|Al crear un producto, también se capturan los parámetros de asignación de existencias. Elija un almacén predeterminado donde el producto se almacene habitualmente. Especifique un límite de existencias si desea que se le notifique cuando se alcance el límite de existencias. Especifique la cantidad deseada que desea obtener al realizar el reabastecimiento automático.
|-
|9
|For any product, the stocking information is available under the "Stock" tab. This includes all stocking parameters as well as warehouses.
|Para cualquier producto, la información de stock está disponible en la pestaña "Stock". Esto incluye todos los parámetros de almacenamiento, así como los almacenes.
|-
|10
|Each product has 2 values of sock. Real stock, which is also known as physical stock, and virtual stock. Real stock is the real quantity you have in your warehouse. Virtual stock is the stock you will have once all pending operations that influence the stock will be processed, such as pending orders, shipments, manufacturing orders etc.
|Cada producto tiene 2 valores de stock. Stock real, que también se conoce como stock físico, y stock virtual. El stock real es la cantidad real que tienes en tu almacén. El stock virtual es el stock que tendrás una vez que se procesen todas las operaciones pendientes que influyen en el stock, tales como pedidos pendientes, envíos, órdenes de fabricación, etc.
|-
|11
|Purchase orders, sales orders, shipments, and invoices can automatically update the virtual product stock or the real stock when the orders, shipments or invoices are fulfilled. The processes that change stocks depends on your setup of the "Stock: module. You must choose the setup according to your needs.
|Los pedidos de compra, los pedidos de venta, los envíos y las facturas pueden actualizar automáticamente el stock virtual de productos o el stock real cuando se realicen los pedidos, los envíos o las facturas. Los procesos que modifican las existencias dependen de la configuración del módulo "Stocks de Productos". Debe elegir la configuración según sus necesidades.
|-
|'''12'''
|'''Stocks - Module Features'''
|Stocks - Características del Módulo
|-
|13
|When new stock arrives, or when any stock leaves the warehouse, click on the appropriate button to update the stock by means of stock correction. Choose the warehouse, and choose whether to add or delete stock. Enter the number of units and unit purchase price. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Finally, enter a label and inventory code for capturing the stock movement.
|Cuando lleguen nuevas existencias, o cuando alguna de ellas salga del almacén, haga clic en el botón correspondiente para actualizar las existencias mediante la corrección de las mismas. Elija el almacén y elija si desea añadir o eliminar existencias. Introduzca el número de unidades y el precio de compra de las mismas. Si el módulo "Proyecto" está habilitado, puede elegir un proyecto. Finalmente, introduzca una etiqueta y un código de inventario para capturar el movimiento de stock.
|-
|14
|You can transfer stock from one warehouse to another by clicking on the appropriate button. Choose the source warehouse, the target warehouse and the number of units to be transferred.
|Puede transferir el stock de un almacén a otro haciendo clic en el botón correspondiente. Seleccione el almacén de origen, el almacén de destino y el número de unidades a transferir.
|-
|15
|Note that if you have created product variants, then the stock correction and stock transfer options are available only on those product variants and not on the original product.
|Tenga en cuenta que si ha creado variantes de producto, entonces las opciones de corrección de stock y de transferencia sólo están disponibles en esas variantes de producto y no en el producto original.
|-
|16
|Stock correction and stock transfer are considered as stock movements and can be tracked from the "Movements" list view.
|La Corrección de Stock y el Transferir se consideran movimientos de stock y se pueden seguir desde la vista de lista "Movimientos".
|-
|17
|The "Mass stock transfer" menu option allows you to move stock from one warehouse to another.
|La opción de menú "Transferencia de stock en masa" permite trasladar stock de un almacén a otro.
|-
|18
|"Replenishment" is a list of all products that have stock that is lower than the desired stock. Choose a product by ticking the checkbox to create a purchase order to fill the difference.
|"Reaprovisionamiento" es una lista de todos los productos que tienen un stock inferior al stock deseado. Elija un producto marcando la casilla de verificación para crear un pedido de compra que llene la diferencia.
|-
|19
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module "Setup". Also, like most other Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your product stock, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the import or export modules to import or export your product stock database.
|También hay muchas otras funciones que pueden activarse desde el módulo "Configuración". Además, como la mayoría de los otros módulos de Dolibarr, puede añadir sus propios campos personalizados para describir el stock de sus productos, definir los valores por defecto o los campos obligatorios y puede utilizar los módulos de importación o exportación para importar o exportar su base de datos de stock de productos.
|-
|20
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Gracias por ver este video tutorial. Visite www.dolibarr.org para obtener más información.
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Purchase Orders

2020-08-22T14:49:07Z

Pradeepv: Language Changes

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Supplier invoices

2020-08-17T05:38:29Z

Pradeepv: Modifying in line with the changes made to Invoices and Payments storyboard

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Invoices and Payments

2020-08-17T05:23:00Z

Pradeepv: Spell error

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Invoices and Payments

2020-08-15T08:32:39Z

Pradeepv: Language changes

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Stock

2020-08-15T04:38:50Z

Pradeepv: Language changes

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Expense Reports

2020-08-05T04:45:43Z

Pradeepv:

{{TemplateAssoEn}}
{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

'''Story board for Module Expense Report:'''

'''Video Title:''' Expense Reports

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use Expense reports in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module Expense Report from menu Home - Setup - Modules
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Expense Report module and show you can switch on/off the module.
|-
|Grant permission on the modules for your users.
For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Open the record of the current user, tab Permissions and show the list of permissions for the Expense reports module.
|-
| colspan="2" |'''Title Slide: Creating an Expense Report'''
|-
|Expense reports are available under the HRM menu and are a key tool for capturing project expenses.
|Click on the HRM menu. Click on the "Expense Reports" menu to show the dashboard view of the same.
|-
|Expense reports can be created by clicking on the "New" menu. The menu option is available as long as the user has the appropriate permission to create expense reports.
|Click on the menu item.
|-
|Provide a start date and end date for the expense report.
|Fill in a start and end date.
|-
|If you are a supervisor or administrator, you will be able to choose a user who is your subordinate, if not, user is automatically filled to yourself.
|Choose the user.
|-
|You also need to choose the user who is responsible for approving the expense report. For employees, it will be automatically set to the supervisor of the user.
|Choose the approval user.
|-
|You can use the notes fields to capture any additional information, public or private.
|Fill in information into the notes fields.
|-
|Once created, you can add actual expenses to the report. Choose a date and the project which is to be billed. Choose type, enter a description and enter the amount. Choose the quantity and click on "Add".
|Add an entry and click "Add".
|-
|You can upload documents such as scanned bills or receipts.
|Show document upload (upload an image file of a restaurant note for example).
|-
|Note that you can add several lines in the same expense report, so you can make only 1 expense report per week or month.
Once the expense report is created, click on "Validate and Submit for approval" to submit the expense report for approval. Note that an email is automatically sent to the expected approver.
|Click on the button and confirm to submit for approval.
|-
| colspan="2" |'''Title Slide: Approval Workflow'''
|-
|Expense reports thus created and submitted for approval will be waiting for action in the appropriate supervisor or administrator's dashboard.
|Show the dashboard of the supervisor and click on the "Expense Report" which is awaiting action.
|-
|The supervisor or administrator can now review the expense report and take appropriate action such as approval or rejection. Note that an email will be automaticaly sent to the requester to inform him of choice.
|Show the expense report which was created in the previous step being approved by the supervisor or administrator.
|-
|Users can also modify expense reports. To create a new expense report based on an existing one, use the clone option.
|Show the modify and clone buttons.
|-
| colspan="2" |'''Title Slide: Viewing Expense Reports and Statistics'''
|-
|Use the appropriate menus to view the list of expense reports. Expense reports can be reviewed based on the status of each report such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Paid, Canceled and Refused.
|Show the list views of expense reports.
|-
|Statistics gives a graphical birds eye view of all the expense reports. Fill in the required filters if you are looking for specific expense reports. You can view the statistics in a tabular as well as graphical format.
|Show the search fields filled in and the statistics being shown.
|-
|There is a lot of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your expense reports and you will be able to export your expense report database.
|
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|-
|}

'''Storyboard in French: Notes de Frais'''
 
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''English Text'''
|'''Translation in the French Language'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use Expense reports in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenue dans ce tutoriel vidéo sur le système ERP et CRM Dolibarr. Dans cette vidéo, nous allons voir comment utiliser les notes de frais dans Dolibarr.
|-
|2
|Prerequisites
|Pré-requis
|-
|3
|Activate the module Expense Report from menu Home -> Setup -> Modules
|Activez le module Note de frais à partir du menu Accueil -> Configuration -> Modules
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Autorisez vos utilisateurs à utiliser le module. Pour des informations plus détaillées sur la manière de configurer les autorisations pour les utilisateurs, vous pouvez regarder notre vidéo "Utilisateurs, groupes et autorisations".
|-
|5
|Creating an Expense Report
|Création d'une note de frais
|-
|6
|Expense reports are available under the HRM menu and are a key tool for capturing project expenses.
|Les notes de frais sont disponibles dans le menu GRH et constituent un outil essentiel pour saisir les dépenses des projets.
|-
|7
|Expense reports can be created by clicking on the "New" menu. The menu option is available as long as the user has the appropriate permission to create expense reports.
|Les notes de frais peuvent être créées en cliquant sur le menu "Nouveau". L'option de menu est disponible à condition que l'utilisateur ait la permission appropriée pour créer des notes de frais.
|-
|8
|Provide a start date and end date for the expense report.
|Indiquez une date de début et une date de fin pour la note de frais.
|-
|9
|If you are a supervisor or administrator, you will be able to choose a user who is your subordinate, if not, user is automatically filled to yourself.
|Si vous êtes un chef d'équipe ou un administrateur, vous pourrez choisir un utilisateur qui est votre subordonné, sinon, l'utilisateur sera automatiquement renseigné pour vous-même.
|-
|10
|You also need to choose the user who is responsible for approving the expense report. For employees, it will be automatically set to the supervisor of the user.
|Vous devez également choisir l'utilisateur qui est responsable de l'approbation de la note de frais. Pour les employés, il sera automatiquement attribué au supérieur hierarchique de l'utilisateur.
|-
|11
|You can use the notes fields to capture any additional information, public or private.
|Vous pouvez utiliser les champs de notes pour saisir toute information supplémentaire, publique ou privée.
|-
|12
|Once created, you can add actual expenses to the report. Choose a date and the project which is to be billed.
|Une fois créée, vous pouvez ajouter les dépenses réelles à la note de frais. Choisissez une date et éventuellement le projet sur lequel imputer les frais.
|-
|13
|Choose type, enter a description and enter the amount. Choose the quantity and click on "Add".
|Choisissez le type, saisissez une description et entrez le montant. Choisissez la quantité et cliquez sur "Ajouter".
|-
|14
|You can upload documents such as scanned bills or receipts.
|Vous pouvez téléverser des documents tels que des factures ou des reçus scannés.
|-
|15
|Note that you can add several lines in the same expense report, so you can make only 1 expense report per week or month.
|Notez que vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs lignes dans la même note de frais, de sorte que vous ne pouvez faire qu'une seule note de frais globale par semaine ou par mois.
|-
|16
|Once the expense report is created, click on "Validate and Submit for approval" to submit the expense report for approval. Note that an email is automatically sent to the approver.
|Une fois la note de frais créée, cliquez sur "Valider et soumettre pour approbation" pour soumettre la note de frais pour approbation. Notez qu'un courriel est automatiquement envoyé à l'approbateur.
|-
|17
|Approval Workflow
|Processus d'approbation
|-
|18
|Expense reports thus created and submitted for approval will be waiting for action in the appropriate supervisor or administrator's dashboard.
|Les notes de frais ainsi créées et soumises pour approbation seront en attente d'action dans le tableau de bord du supérieur ou de l'administrateur concerné.
|-
|19
|The supervisor or administrator can now review the expense report and take appropriate action such as approval or rejection. Note that an email will be automatically sent to the requester to inform him of choice.
|Le supérieur ou l'administrateur peut maintenant examiner la note de frais et prendre les mesures appropriées, telles que l'approbation ou le rejet. Notez qu'un courriel sera automatiquement envoyé au demandeur pour l'informer du choix.
|-
|20
|Users can also modify expense reports.
|Les utilisateurs peuvent également modifier les notes de frais.
|-
|21
|To create a new expense report based on an existing one, use the clone option.
|Pour créer une nouvelle note de frais à partir d'une note de frais existante, utilisez l'option de clonage.
|-
|22
|Viewing Expense Reports and Statistics
|Visualisation des notes de frais et des statistiques
|-
|23
|Use the appropriate menus to view the list of expense reports.
|Utilisez les menus appropriés pour consulter la liste des notes de frais.
|-
|24
|Expense reports can be reviewed based on the status of each report such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Paid, Canceled and Refused.
|Les notes de frais peuvent être examinées en fonction de l'état de chaque note, par exemple : brouillon, validé, approuvé, payé, annulé et refusé.
|-
|25
|Statistics gives a graphical birds-eye view of all the expense reports.
|Les statistiques donnent une vue d'ensemble graphique de toutes les notes de frais.
|-
|26
|Fill in the required filters if you are looking for specific expense reports. You can view the statistics in a tabular as well as graphical format.
|Remplissez les filtres requis si vous recherchez des notes de frais spécifiques. Vous pouvez consultez les statistiques sous forme de tableau ou de graphique.
|-
|27
|There is also a lot of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to describe your expense reports and you will be able to export your expense report database.
|De nombreuses autres fonctionnalités peuvent être activées à partir de la configuration. Ainsi, comme dans la plupart des modules de Dolibarr, vous pouvez aussi ajouter vos propres champs personnalisés pour décrire vos notes de frais et vous pourrez exporter votre base de données de notes de frais.
|-
|28
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Merci d'avoir regarder ce tutoriel vidéo. Visitez le site www.dolibarr.org pour en savoir plus.
|}
'''German Translation'''
 
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''English Text'''
|'''Translation in the German Language'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use Expense reports in Dolibarr.
|Willkommen zu diesem Video-Tutorial über das Dolibarr ERP- und CRM-System. In diesem Video sehen wir uns an, wie Spesenabrechnungen in Dolibarr verwendet werden.
|-
|2
|Prerequisites
|Voraussetzungen
|-
|3
|Activate the module Expense Report from menu Home -> Setup -> Modules
|Aktivieren Sie das Modul Spesenabrechnung über das Menü Startseite -> Einstellungen -> Module
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Erteilen Sie Ihren Benutzern die Berechtigung für die Module. Weitere Informationen zum Einrichten von Berechtigungen für Benutzer finden Sie in unserem Video „Benutzer, Gruppen und Berechtigungen“.
|-
|5
|Creating an Expense Report
|Spesenabrechnung erstellen
|-
|6
|Expense reports are available under the HRM menu and are a key tool for capturing project expenses.
|Spesenabrechnungen sind im Personnel-Menü verfügbar und ein wichtiges Werkzeug zur Erfassung von Projektkosten.
|-
|7
|Expense reports can be created by clicking on the "New" menu. The menu option is available as long as the user has the appropriate permission to create expense reports.
|Spesenabrechnungen können durch Klicken auf die Menüoption „Neu" erstellt werden. Die Menüoption ist verfügbar, solange der Benutzer über die entsprechende Berechtigung zum Erstellen von Spesenabrechnungen verfügt.
|-
|8
|Provide a start date and end date for the expense report.
|Geben Sie ein Start- und Enddatum für die Spesenabrechnung an.
|-
|9
|If you are a supervisor or administrator, you will be able to choose a user who is your subordinate, if not, user is automatically filled to yourself.
|Wenn Sie ein Vorgesetzter oder Administrator sind, können Sie einen Benutzer auswählen, der Ihnen untergeordnet ist. Wenn nicht, wird der Benutzer automatisch als Sie selbst befüllt.
|-
|10
|You also need to choose the user who is responsible for approving the expense report. For employees, it will be automatically set to the supervisor of the user.
|Sie müssen auch den Benutzer auswählen, der für die Genehmigung der Spesenabrechnung verantwortlich ist. Für Mitarbeiter wird es automatisch auf den Vorgesetzten des Benutzers eingestellt.
|-
|11
|You can use the notes fields to capture any additional information, public or private.
|Sie können die Notizfelder verwenden, um zusätzliche öffentliche oder private Informationen zu erfassen.
|-
|12
|Once created, you can add actual expenses to the report. Choose a date and the project which is to be billed.
|Nach der Erstellung können Sie die Ausgaben zu dem Bericht hinzufügen. Wählen Sie ein Datum und das Projekt, zu dem die Rechnung gehört.
|-
|13
|Choose type, enter a description and enter the amount. Choose the quantity and click on "Add".
|Wählen Sie Typ, geben Sie eine Beschreibung ein und geben Sie den Betrag ein. Wählen Sie die Menge und klicken Sie auf „Hinzufügen".
|-
|14
|You can upload documents such as scanned bills or receipts.
|Sie können Dokumente wie gescannte Rechnungen oder Quittungen hochladen.
|-
|15
|Note that you can add several lines in the same expense report, so you can make only 1 expense report per week or month.
|Beachten Sie, dass Sie in derselben Spesenabrechnung mehrere Zeilen hinzufügen können, sodass Sie nur eine Spesenabrechnung pro Woche oder Monat erstellen können.
|-
|16
|Once the expense report is created, click on "Validate and Submit for approval" to submit the expense report for approval. Note that an email is automatically sent to the approver.
|Klicken Sie nach dem Erstellen der Spesenabrechnung auf „Validieren und zur Genehmigung einreichen", um die Spesenabrechnung zur Genehmigung einzureichen. Beachten Sie, dass eine E-Mail automatisch an den Genehmigenden gesendet wird.
|-
|17
|Approval Workflow
|Genehmigungsworkflow
|-
|18
|Expense reports thus created and submitted for approval will be waiting for action in the appropriate supervisor or administrator's dashboard.
|Auf diese Weise erstellte und zur Genehmigung eingereichte Spesenabrechnungen warten im entsprechenden Dashboard des Vorgesetzten oder Administrators auf die entsprechenden Maßnahmen.
|-
|19
|The supervisor or administrator can now review the expense report and take appropriate action such as approval or rejection. Note that an email will be automatically sent to the requester to inform him of choice.
|Der Vorgesetzte oder Administrator kann jetzt die Spesenabrechnung überprüfen und geeignete Maßnahmen wie Genehmigung oder Ablehnung ergreifen. Beachten Sie, dass automatisch eine E-Mail an den Anforderer gesendet wird, um ihn über die Genehmigung oder Ablenkung zu informieren.
|-
|20
|Users can also modify expense reports.
|Benutzer können Spesenabrechnungen auch ändern.
|-
|21
|To create a new expense report based on an existing one, use the clone option.
|Verwenden Sie die Option Duplizieren, um eine neue Spesenabrechnung basierend auf einer Vorhandenen zu erstellen.
|-
|22
|Viewing Expense Reports and Statistics
|Anzeigen von Spesenabrechnungen und Statistiken
|-
|23
|Use the appropriate menus to view the list of expense reports.
|Verwenden Sie die entsprechenden Menüs, um die Liste der Spesenabrechnungen anzuzeigen.
|-
|24
|Expense reports can be reviewed based on the status of each report such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Paid, Canceled and Refused.
|Spesenabrechnungen können basierend auf dem Status jedes Berichts überprüft werden, z. B. Entwurf, Validiert, Genehmigt, Bezahlt, Storniert und Abgelehnt.
|-
|25
|Statistics gives a graphical birds-eye view of all the expense reports.
|Die Statistik bietet eine grafische Vogelperspektive aller Spesenabrechnungen.
|-
|26
|Fill in the required filters if you are looking for specific expense reports. You can view the statistics in a tabular as well as graphical format.
|Wählen Sie die erforderlichen Filter aus, wenn Sie nach bestimmten Spesenabrechnungen suchen. Sie können die Statistiken sowohl in tabellarischer als auch in grafischer Form anzeigen lassen.
|-
|27
|There is also a lot of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can also add you own custom fields to describe your expense reports and you will be able to export your expense report database.
|Es gibt auch viele andere Funktionen, die über das Einstellungen aktiviert werden können. Wie bei den meisten Dolibarr-Modulen können Sie auch eigene benutzerdefinierte Felder hinzufügen, um Ihre Spesenabrechnungen zu beschreiben. Sie können Ihre Spesenabrechnungsdatenbanken außerdem exportieren.
|-
|28
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Vielen Dank, dass Sie sich dieses Video-Tutorial angesehen haben. Besuchen Sie www.dolibarr.org, um mehr zu erfahren.
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Expense Reports

2020-08-05T04:43:29Z

Pradeepv: Changes as requested to German script

{{TemplateAssoEn}}
{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

'''Story board for Module Expense Report:'''

'''Video Title:''' Expense Reports

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use Expense reports in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module Expense Report from menu Home - Setup - Modules
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Expense Report module and show you can switch on/off the module.
|-
|Grant permission on the modules for your users.
For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Open the record of the current user, tab Permissions and show the list of permissions for the Expense reports module.
|-
| colspan="2" |'''Title Slide: Creating an Expense Report'''
|-
|Expense reports are available under the HRM menu and are a key tool for capturing project expenses.
|Click on the HRM menu. Click on the "Expense Reports" menu to show the dashboard view of the same.
|-
|Expense reports can be created by clicking on the "New" menu. The menu option is available as long as the user has the appropriate permission to create expense reports.
|Click on the menu item.
|-
|Provide a start date and end date for the expense report.
|Fill in a start and end date.
|-
|If you are a supervisor or administrator, you will be able to choose a user who is your subordinate, if not, user is automatically filled to yourself.
|Choose the user.
|-
|You also need to choose the user who is responsible for approving the expense report. For employees, it will be automatically set to the supervisor of the user.
|Choose the approval user.
|-
|You can use the notes fields to capture any additional information, public or private.
|Fill in information into the notes fields.
|-
|Once created, you can add actual expenses to the report. Choose a date and the project which is to be billed. Choose type, enter a description and enter the amount. Choose the quantity and click on "Add".
|Add an entry and click "Add".
|-
|You can upload documents such as scanned bills or receipts.
|Show document upload (upload an image file of a restaurant note for example).
|-
|Note that you can add several lines in the same expense report, so you can make only 1 expense report per week or month.
Once the expense report is created, click on "Validate and Submit for approval" to submit the expense report for approval. Note that an email is automatically sent to the expected approver.
|Click on the button and confirm to submit for approval.
|-
| colspan="2" |'''Title Slide: Approval Workflow'''
|-
|Expense reports thus created and submitted for approval will be waiting for action in the appropriate supervisor or administrator's dashboard.
|Show the dashboard of the supervisor and click on the "Expense Report" which is awaiting action.
|-
|The supervisor or administrator can now review the expense report and take appropriate action such as approval or rejection. Note that an email will be automaticaly sent to the requester to inform him of choice.
|Show the expense report which was created in the previous step being approved by the supervisor or administrator.
|-
|Users can also modify expense reports. To create a new expense report based on an existing one, use the clone option.
|Show the modify and clone buttons.
|-
| colspan="2" |'''Title Slide: Viewing Expense Reports and Statistics'''
|-
|Use the appropriate menus to view the list of expense reports. Expense reports can be reviewed based on the status of each report such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Paid, Canceled and Refused.
|Show the list views of expense reports.
|-
|Statistics gives a graphical birds eye view of all the expense reports. Fill in the required filters if you are looking for specific expense reports. You can view the statistics in a tabular as well as graphical format.
|Show the search fields filled in and the statistics being shown.
|-
|There is a lot of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your expense reports and you will be able to export your expense report database.
|
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|-
|}

'''Storyboard in French: Notes de Frais'''
 
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''English Text'''
|'''Translation in the French Language'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use Expense reports in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenue dans ce tutoriel vidéo sur le système ERP et CRM Dolibarr. Dans cette vidéo, nous allons voir comment utiliser les notes de frais dans Dolibarr.
|-
|2
|Prerequisites
|Pré-requis
|-
|3
|Activate the module Expense Report from menu Home -> Setup -> Modules
|Activez le module Note de frais à partir du menu Accueil -> Configuration -> Modules
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Autorisez vos utilisateurs à utiliser le module. Pour des informations plus détaillées sur la manière de configurer les autorisations pour les utilisateurs, vous pouvez regarder notre vidéo "Utilisateurs, groupes et autorisations".
|-
|5
|Creating an Expense Report
|Création d'une note de frais
|-
|6
|Expense reports are available under the HRM menu and are a key tool for capturing project expenses.
|Les notes de frais sont disponibles dans le menu GRH et constituent un outil essentiel pour saisir les dépenses des projets.
|-
|7
|Expense reports can be created by clicking on the "New" menu. The menu option is available as long as the user has the appropriate permission to create expense reports.
|Les notes de frais peuvent être créées en cliquant sur le menu "Nouveau". L'option de menu est disponible à condition que l'utilisateur ait la permission appropriée pour créer des notes de frais.
|-
|8
|Provide a start date and end date for the expense report.
|Indiquez une date de début et une date de fin pour la note de frais.
|-
|9
|If you are a supervisor or administrator, you will be able to choose a user who is your subordinate, if not, user is automatically filled to yourself.
|Si vous êtes un chef d'équipe ou un administrateur, vous pourrez choisir un utilisateur qui est votre subordonné, sinon, l'utilisateur sera automatiquement renseigné pour vous-même.
|-
|10
|You also need to choose the user who is responsible for approving the expense report. For employees, it will be automatically set to the supervisor of the user.
|Vous devez également choisir l'utilisateur qui est responsable de l'approbation de la note de frais. Pour les employés, il sera automatiquement attribué au supérieur hierarchique de l'utilisateur.
|-
|11
|You can use the notes fields to capture any additional information, public or private.
|Vous pouvez utiliser les champs de notes pour saisir toute information supplémentaire, publique ou privée.
|-
|12
|Once created, you can add actual expenses to the report. Choose a date and the project which is to be billed.
|Une fois créée, vous pouvez ajouter les dépenses réelles à la note de frais. Choisissez une date et éventuellement le projet sur lequel imputer les frais.
|-
|13
|Choose type, enter a description and enter the amount. Choose the quantity and click on "Add".
|Choisissez le type, saisissez une description et entrez le montant. Choisissez la quantité et cliquez sur "Ajouter".
|-
|14
|You can upload documents such as scanned bills or receipts.
|Vous pouvez téléverser des documents tels que des factures ou des reçus scannés.
|-
|15
|Note that you can add several lines in the same expense report, so you can make only 1 expense report per week or month.
|Notez que vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs lignes dans la même note de frais, de sorte que vous ne pouvez faire qu'une seule note de frais globale par semaine ou par mois.
|-
|16
|Once the expense report is created, click on "Validate and Submit for approval" to submit the expense report for approval. Note that an email is automatically sent to the approver.
|Une fois la note de frais créée, cliquez sur "Valider et soumettre pour approbation" pour soumettre la note de frais pour approbation. Notez qu'un courriel est automatiquement envoyé à l'approbateur.
|-
|17
|Approval Workflow
|Processus d'approbation
|-
|18
|Expense reports thus created and submitted for approval will be waiting for action in the appropriate supervisor or administrator's dashboard.
|Les notes de frais ainsi créées et soumises pour approbation seront en attente d'action dans le tableau de bord du supérieur ou de l'administrateur concerné.
|-
|19
|The supervisor or administrator can now review the expense report and take appropriate action such as approval or rejection. Note that an email will be automatically sent to the requester to inform him of choice.
|Le supérieur ou l'administrateur peut maintenant examiner la note de frais et prendre les mesures appropriées, telles que l'approbation ou le rejet. Notez qu'un courriel sera automatiquement envoyé au demandeur pour l'informer du choix.
|-
|20
|Users can also modify expense reports.
|Les utilisateurs peuvent également modifier les notes de frais.
|-
|21
|To create a new expense report based on an existing one, use the clone option.
|Pour créer une nouvelle note de frais à partir d'une note de frais existante, utilisez l'option de clonage.
|-
|22
|Viewing Expense Reports and Statistics
|Visualisation des notes de frais et des statistiques
|-
|23
|Use the appropriate menus to view the list of expense reports.
|Utilisez les menus appropriés pour consulter la liste des notes de frais.
|-
|24
|Expense reports can be reviewed based on the status of each report such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Paid, Canceled and Refused.
|Les notes de frais peuvent être examinées en fonction de l'état de chaque note, par exemple : brouillon, validé, approuvé, payé, annulé et refusé.
|-
|25
|Statistics gives a graphical birds-eye view of all the expense reports.
|Les statistiques donnent une vue d'ensemble graphique de toutes les notes de frais.
|-
|26
|Fill in the required filters if you are looking for specific expense reports. You can view the statistics in a tabular as well as graphical format.
|Remplissez les filtres requis si vous recherchez des notes de frais spécifiques. Vous pouvez consultez les statistiques sous forme de tableau ou de graphique.
|-
|27
|There is also a lot of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to describe your expense reports and you will be able to export your expense report database.
|De nombreuses autres fonctionnalités peuvent être activées à partir de la configuration. Ainsi, comme dans la plupart des modules de Dolibarr, vous pouvez aussi ajouter vos propres champs personnalisés pour décrire vos notes de frais et vous pourrez exporter votre base de données de notes de frais.
|-
|28
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Merci d'avoir regarder ce tutoriel vidéo. Visitez le site www.dolibarr.org pour en savoir plus.
|}
'''German Translation'''
 
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''English Text'''
|'''Translation in the German Language'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use Expense reports in Dolibarr.
|Willkommen zu diesem Video-Tutorial über das Dolibarr ERP- und CRM-System. In diesem Video sehen wir uns an, wie Spesenabrechnungen in Dolibarr verwendet werden.
|-
|2
|Prerequisites
|Voraussetzungen
|-
|3
|Activate the module Expense Report from menu Home -> Setup -> Modules
|Aktivieren Sie das Modul Kostenabrechnung über das Menü Startseite -> Einstellungen -> Module
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Erteilen Sie Ihren Benutzern die Berechtigung für die Module. Weitere Informationen zum Einrichten von Berechtigungen für Benutzer finden Sie in unserem Video „Benutzer, Gruppen und Berechtigungen“.
|-
|5
|Creating an Expense Report
|Kostenabrechnung erstellen
|-
|6
|Expense reports are available under the HRM menu and are a key tool for capturing project expenses.
|Spesenabrechnungen sind im Personnel-Menü verfügbar und ein wichtiges Werkzeug zur Erfassung von Projektkosten.
|-
|7
|Expense reports can be created by clicking on the "New" menu. The menu option is available as long as the user has the appropriate permission to create expense reports.
|Spesenabrechnungen können durch Klicken auf die Menüoption „Neu" erstellt werden. Die Menüoption ist verfügbar, solange der Benutzer über die entsprechende Berechtigung zum Erstellen von Spesenabrechnungen verfügt.
|-
|8
|Provide a start date and end date for the expense report.
|Geben Sie ein Start- und Enddatum für die Kostenabrechnung an.
|-
|9
|If you are a supervisor or administrator, you will be able to choose a user who is your subordinate, if not, user is automatically filled to yourself.
|Wenn Sie ein Vorgesetzter oder Administrator sind, können Sie einen Benutzer auswählen, der Ihnen untergeordnet ist. Wenn nicht, wird der Benutzer automatisch als Sie selbst befüllt.
|-
|10
|You also need to choose the user who is responsible for approving the expense report. For employees, it will be automatically set to the supervisor of the user.
|Sie müssen auch den Benutzer auswählen, der für die Genehmigung der Kostenabrechnung verantwortlich ist. Für Mitarbeiter wird es automatisch auf den Vorgesetzten des Benutzers eingestellt.
|-
|11
|You can use the notes fields to capture any additional information, public or private.
|Sie können die Notizfelder verwenden, um zusätzliche öffentliche oder private Informationen zu erfassen.
|-
|12
|Once created, you can add actual expenses to the report. Choose a date and the project which is to be billed.
|Nach der Erstellung können Sie die Ausgaben zu dem Bericht hinzufügen. Wählen Sie ein Datum und das Projekt, zu dem die Rechnung gehört.
|-
|13
|Choose type, enter a description and enter the amount. Choose the quantity and click on "Add".
|Wählen Sie Typ, geben Sie eine Beschreibung ein und geben Sie den Betrag ein. Wählen Sie die Menge und klicken Sie auf „Hinzufügen".
|-
|14
|You can upload documents such as scanned bills or receipts.
|Sie können Dokumente wie gescannte Rechnungen oder Quittungen hochladen.
|-
|15
|Note that you can add several lines in the same expense report, so you can make only 1 expense report per week or month.
|Beachten Sie, dass Sie in derselben Spesenabrechnung mehrere Zeilen hinzufügen können, sodass Sie nur eine Spesenabrechnung pro Woche oder Monat erstellen können.
|-
|16
|Once the expense report is created, click on "Validate and Submit for approval" to submit the expense report for approval. Note that an email is automatically sent to the approver.
|Klicken Sie nach dem Erstellen der Spesenabrechnung auf „Validieren und zur Genehmigung einreichen", um die Spesenabrechnung zur Genehmigung einzureichen. Beachten Sie, dass eine E-Mail automatisch an den Genehmigenden gesendet wird.
|-
|17
|Approval Workflow
|Genehmigungsworkflow
|-
|18
|Expense reports thus created and submitted for approval will be waiting for action in the appropriate supervisor or administrator's dashboard.
|Auf diese Weise erstellte und zur Genehmigung eingereichte Spesenabrechnungen warten im entsprechenden Dashboard des Vorgesetzten oder Administrators auf die entsprechenden Maßnahmen.
|-
|19
|The supervisor or administrator can now review the expense report and take appropriate action such as approval or rejection. Note that an email will be automatically sent to the requester to inform him of choice.
|Der Vorgesetzte oder Administrator kann jetzt die Spesenabrechnung überprüfen und geeignete Maßnahmen wie Genehmigung oder Ablehnung ergreifen. Beachten Sie, dass automatisch eine E-Mail an den Anforderer gesendet wird, um ihn über die Genehmigung oder Ablenkung zu informieren.
|-
|20
|Users can also modify expense reports.
|Benutzer können Spesenabrechnungen auch ändern.
|-
|21
|To create a new expense report based on an existing one, use the clone option.
|Verwenden Sie die Option Duplizieren, um eine neue Spesenabrechnung basierend auf einer Vorhandenen zu erstellen.
|-
|22
|Viewing Expense Reports and Statistics
|Anzeigen von Spesenabrechnungen und Statistiken
|-
|23
|Use the appropriate menus to view the list of expense reports.
|Verwenden Sie die entsprechenden Menüs, um die Liste der Spesenabrechnungen anzuzeigen.
|-
|24
|Expense reports can be reviewed based on the status of each report such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Paid, Canceled and Refused.
|Spesenabrechnungen können basierend auf dem Status jedes Berichts überprüft werden, z. B. Entwurf, Validiert, Genehmigt, Bezahlt, Storniert und Abgelehnt.
|-
|25
|Statistics gives a graphical birds-eye view of all the expense reports.
|Die Statistik bietet eine grafische Vogelperspektive aller Spesenabrechnungen.
|-
|26
|Fill in the required filters if you are looking for specific expense reports. You can view the statistics in a tabular as well as graphical format.
|Wählen Sie die erforderlichen Filter aus, wenn Sie nach bestimmten Spesenabrechnungen suchen. Sie können die Statistiken sowohl in tabellarischer als auch in grafischer Form anzeigen lassen.
|-
|27
|There is also a lot of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can also add you own custom fields to describe your expense reports and you will be able to export your expense report database.
|Es gibt auch viele andere Funktionen, die über das Einstellungen aktiviert werden können. Wie bei den meisten Dolibarr-Modulen können Sie auch eigene benutzerdefinierte Felder hinzufügen, um Ihre Spesenabrechnungen zu beschreiben. Sie können Ihre Spesenabrechnungsdatenbanken außerdem exportieren.
|-
|28
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Vielen Dank, dass Sie sich dieses Video-Tutorial angesehen haben. Besuchen Sie www.dolibarr.org, um mehr zu erfahren.
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Expense Reports

2020-08-05T04:11:22Z

Pradeepv: Added German translation

{{TemplateAssoEn}}
{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

'''Story board for Module Expense Report:'''

'''Video Title:''' Expense Reports

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use Expense reports in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module Expense Report from menu Home - Setup - Modules
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Expense Report module and show you can switch on/off the module.
|-
|Grant permission on the modules for your users.
For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Open the record of the current user, tab Permissions and show the list of permissions for the Expense reports module.
|-
| colspan="2" |'''Title Slide: Creating an Expense Report'''
|-
|Expense reports are available under the HRM menu and are a key tool for capturing project expenses.
|Click on the HRM menu. Click on the "Expense Reports" menu to show the dashboard view of the same.
|-
|Expense reports can be created by clicking on the "New" menu. The menu option is available as long as the user has the appropriate permission to create expense reports.
|Click on the menu item.
|-
|Provide a start date and end date for the expense report.
|Fill in a start and end date.
|-
|If you are a supervisor or administrator, you will be able to choose a user who is your subordinate, if not, user is automatically filled to yourself.
|Choose the user.
|-
|You also need to choose the user who is responsible for approving the expense report. For employees, it will be automatically set to the supervisor of the user.
|Choose the approval user.
|-
|You can use the notes fields to capture any additional information, public or private.
|Fill in information into the notes fields.
|-
|Once created, you can add actual expenses to the report. Choose a date and the project which is to be billed. Choose type, enter a description and enter the amount. Choose the quantity and click on "Add".
|Add an entry and click "Add".
|-
|You can upload documents such as scanned bills or receipts.
|Show document upload (upload an image file of a restaurant note for example).
|-
|Note that you can add several lines in the same expense report, so you can make only 1 expense report per week or month.
Once the expense report is created, click on "Validate and Submit for approval" to submit the expense report for approval. Note that an email is automatically sent to the expected approver.
|Click on the button and confirm to submit for approval.
|-
| colspan="2" |'''Title Slide: Approval Workflow'''
|-
|Expense reports thus created and submitted for approval will be waiting for action in the appropriate supervisor or administrator's dashboard.
|Show the dashboard of the supervisor and click on the "Expense Report" which is awaiting action.
|-
|The supervisor or administrator can now review the expense report and take appropriate action such as approval or rejection. Note that an email will be automaticaly sent to the requester to inform him of choice.
|Show the expense report which was created in the previous step being approved by the supervisor or administrator.
|-
|Users can also modify expense reports. To create a new expense report based on an existing one, use the clone option.
|Show the modify and clone buttons.
|-
| colspan="2" |'''Title Slide: Viewing Expense Reports and Statistics'''
|-
|Use the appropriate menus to view the list of expense reports. Expense reports can be reviewed based on the status of each report such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Paid, Canceled and Refused.
|Show the list views of expense reports.
|-
|Statistics gives a graphical birds eye view of all the expense reports. Fill in the required filters if you are looking for specific expense reports. You can view the statistics in a tabular as well as graphical format.
|Show the search fields filled in and the statistics being shown.
|-
|There is a lot of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your expense reports and you will be able to export your expense report database.
|
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|-
|}

'''Storyboard in French: Notes de Frais'''
 
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''English Text'''
|'''Translation in the French Language'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use Expense reports in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenue dans ce tutoriel vidéo sur le système ERP et CRM Dolibarr. Dans cette vidéo, nous allons voir comment utiliser les notes de frais dans Dolibarr.
|-
|2
|Prerequisites
|Pré-requis
|-
|3
|Activate the module Expense Report from menu Home -> Setup -> Modules
|Activez le module Note de frais à partir du menu Accueil -> Configuration -> Modules
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Autorisez vos utilisateurs à utiliser le module. Pour des informations plus détaillées sur la manière de configurer les autorisations pour les utilisateurs, vous pouvez regarder notre vidéo "Utilisateurs, groupes et autorisations".
|-
|5
|Creating an Expense Report
|Création d'une note de frais
|-
|6
|Expense reports are available under the HRM menu and are a key tool for capturing project expenses.
|Les notes de frais sont disponibles dans le menu GRH et constituent un outil essentiel pour saisir les dépenses des projets.
|-
|7
|Expense reports can be created by clicking on the "New" menu. The menu option is available as long as the user has the appropriate permission to create expense reports.
|Les notes de frais peuvent être créées en cliquant sur le menu "Nouveau". L'option de menu est disponible à condition que l'utilisateur ait la permission appropriée pour créer des notes de frais.
|-
|8
|Provide a start date and end date for the expense report.
|Indiquez une date de début et une date de fin pour la note de frais.
|-
|9
|If you are a supervisor or administrator, you will be able to choose a user who is your subordinate, if not, user is automatically filled to yourself.
|Si vous êtes un chef d'équipe ou un administrateur, vous pourrez choisir un utilisateur qui est votre subordonné, sinon, l'utilisateur sera automatiquement renseigné pour vous-même.
|-
|10
|You also need to choose the user who is responsible for approving the expense report. For employees, it will be automatically set to the supervisor of the user.
|Vous devez également choisir l'utilisateur qui est responsable de l'approbation de la note de frais. Pour les employés, il sera automatiquement attribué au supérieur hierarchique de l'utilisateur.
|-
|11
|You can use the notes fields to capture any additional information, public or private.
|Vous pouvez utiliser les champs de notes pour saisir toute information supplémentaire, publique ou privée.
|-
|12
|Once created, you can add actual expenses to the report. Choose a date and the project which is to be billed.
|Une fois créée, vous pouvez ajouter les dépenses réelles à la note de frais. Choisissez une date et éventuellement le projet sur lequel imputer les frais.
|-
|13
|Choose type, enter a description and enter the amount. Choose the quantity and click on "Add".
|Choisissez le type, saisissez une description et entrez le montant. Choisissez la quantité et cliquez sur "Ajouter".
|-
|14
|You can upload documents such as scanned bills or receipts.
|Vous pouvez téléverser des documents tels que des factures ou des reçus scannés.
|-
|15
|Note that you can add several lines in the same expense report, so you can make only 1 expense report per week or month.
|Notez que vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs lignes dans la même note de frais, de sorte que vous ne pouvez faire qu'une seule note de frais globale par semaine ou par mois.
|-
|16
|Once the expense report is created, click on "Validate and Submit for approval" to submit the expense report for approval. Note that an email is automatically sent to the approver.
|Une fois la note de frais créée, cliquez sur "Valider et soumettre pour approbation" pour soumettre la note de frais pour approbation. Notez qu'un courriel est automatiquement envoyé à l'approbateur.
|-
|17
|Approval Workflow
|Processus d'approbation
|-
|18
|Expense reports thus created and submitted for approval will be waiting for action in the appropriate supervisor or administrator's dashboard.
|Les notes de frais ainsi créées et soumises pour approbation seront en attente d'action dans le tableau de bord du supérieur ou de l'administrateur concerné.
|-
|19
|The supervisor or administrator can now review the expense report and take appropriate action such as approval or rejection. Note that an email will be automatically sent to the requester to inform him of choice.
|Le supérieur ou l'administrateur peut maintenant examiner la note de frais et prendre les mesures appropriées, telles que l'approbation ou le rejet. Notez qu'un courriel sera automatiquement envoyé au demandeur pour l'informer du choix.
|-
|20
|Users can also modify expense reports.
|Les utilisateurs peuvent également modifier les notes de frais.
|-
|21
|To create a new expense report based on an existing one, use the clone option.
|Pour créer une nouvelle note de frais à partir d'une note de frais existante, utilisez l'option de clonage.
|-
|22
|Viewing Expense Reports and Statistics
|Visualisation des notes de frais et des statistiques
|-
|23
|Use the appropriate menus to view the list of expense reports.
|Utilisez les menus appropriés pour consulter la liste des notes de frais.
|-
|24
|Expense reports can be reviewed based on the status of each report such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Paid, Canceled and Refused.
|Les notes de frais peuvent être examinées en fonction de l'état de chaque note, par exemple : brouillon, validé, approuvé, payé, annulé et refusé.
|-
|25
|Statistics gives a graphical birds-eye view of all the expense reports.
|Les statistiques donnent une vue d'ensemble graphique de toutes les notes de frais.
|-
|26
|Fill in the required filters if you are looking for specific expense reports. You can view the statistics in a tabular as well as graphical format.
|Remplissez les filtres requis si vous recherchez des notes de frais spécifiques. Vous pouvez consultez les statistiques sous forme de tableau ou de graphique.
|-
|27
|There is also a lot of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to describe your expense reports and you will be able to export your expense report database.
|De nombreuses autres fonctionnalités peuvent être activées à partir de la configuration. Ainsi, comme dans la plupart des modules de Dolibarr, vous pouvez aussi ajouter vos propres champs personnalisés pour décrire vos notes de frais et vous pourrez exporter votre base de données de notes de frais.
|-
|28
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Merci d'avoir regarder ce tutoriel vidéo. Visitez le site www.dolibarr.org pour en savoir plus.
|}
'''German Translation'''
 
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''English Text'''
|'''Translation in the German Language'''
|-
|1
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use Expense reports in Dolibarr.
|Willkommen zu diesem Video-Tutorial über das Dolibarr ERP- und CRM-System. In diesem Video sehen wir uns an, wie Kostenabrechnungen in Dolibarr verwendet werden.
|-
|2
|Prerequisites
|Voraussetzungen
|-
|3
|Activate the module Expense Report from menu Home -> Setup -> Modules
|Aktivieren Sie das Modul Kostenabrechnung über das Menü Startseite -> Setup -> Module
|-
|4
|Grant permission on the modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Erteilen Sie Ihren Benutzern die Berechtigung für die Module. Weitere Informationen zum Einrichten von Berechtigungen für Benutzer finden Sie in unserem Video „Benutzer, Gruppen und Berechtigungen“.
|-
|5
|Creating an Expense Report
|Kostenabrechnung erstellen
|-
|6
|Expense reports are available under the HRM menu and are a key tool for capturing project expenses.
|Kostenabrechnungen sind im HRM-Menü verfügbar und ein wichtiges Werkzeug zur Erfassung von Projektkosten.
|-
|7
|Expense reports can be created by clicking on the "New" menu. The menu option is available as long as the user has the appropriate permission to create expense reports.
|Kostenabrechnungen können durch Klicken auf die Menüoption „Neu" erstellt werden. Die Menüoption ist verfügbar, solange der Benutzer über die entsprechende Berechtigung zum Erstellen von Kostenabrechnungen verfügt.
|-
|8
|Provide a start date and end date for the expense report.
|Geben Sie ein Start- und Enddatum für die Kostenabrechnung an.
|-
|9
|If you are a supervisor or administrator, you will be able to choose a user who is your subordinate, if not, user is automatically filled to yourself.
|Wenn Sie ein Vorgesetzter oder Administrator sind, können Sie einen Benutzer auswählen, der Ihnen untergeordnet ist. Wenn nicht, wird der Benutzer automatisch als Sie selbst befüllt.
|-
|10
|You also need to choose the user who is responsible for approving the expense report. For employees, it will be automatically set to the supervisor of the user.
|Sie müssen auch den Benutzer auswählen, der für die Genehmigung der Kostenabrechnung verantwortlich ist. Für Mitarbeiter wird es automatisch auf den Vorgesetzten des Benutzers eingestellt.
|-
|11
|You can use the notes fields to capture any additional information, public or private.
|Sie können die Notizfelder verwenden, um zusätzliche öffentliche oder private Informationen zu erfassen.
|-
|12
|Once created, you can add actual expenses to the report. Choose a date and the project which is to be billed.
|Nach der Erstellung können Sie die Ausgaben zu dem Bericht hinzufügen. Wählen Sie ein Datum und das Projekt, zu dem die Rechnung gehört.
|-
|13
|Choose type, enter a description and enter the amount. Choose the quantity and click on "Add".
|Wählen Sie Typ, geben Sie eine Beschreibung ein und geben Sie den Betrag ein. Wählen Sie die Menge und klicken Sie auf „Hinzufügen".
|-
|14
|You can upload documents such as scanned bills or receipts.
|Sie können Dokumente wie gescannte Rechnungen oder Quittungen hochladen.
|-
|15
|Note that you can add several lines in the same expense report, so you can make only 1 expense report per week or month.
|Beachten Sie, dass Sie in derselben Kostenabrechnung mehrere Zeilen hinzufügen können, sodass Sie nur eine Kostenabrechnung pro Woche oder Monat erstellen können.
|-
|16
|Once the expense report is created, click on "Validate and Submit for approval" to submit the expense report for approval. Note that an email is automatically sent to the approver.
|Klicken Sie nach dem Erstellen der Kostenabrechnung auf „Validieren und zur Genehmigung einreichen", um die Kostenabrechnung zur Genehmigung einzureichen. Beachten Sie, dass eine E-Mail automatisch an den Genehmigenden gesendet wird.
|-
|17
|Approval Workflow
|Genehmigungsworkflow
|-
|18
|Expense reports thus created and submitted for approval will be waiting for action in the appropriate supervisor or administrator's dashboard.
|Auf diese Weise erstellte und zur Genehmigung eingereichte Kostenabrechnungen warten im entsprechenden Dashboard des Vorgesetzten oder Administrators auf die entsprechenden Maßnahmen.
|-
|19
|The supervisor or administrator can now review the expense report and take appropriate action such as approval or rejection. Note that an email will be automatically sent to the requester to inform him of choice.
|Der Vorgesetzte oder Administrator kann jetzt die Kostenabrechnung überprüfen und geeignete Maßnahmen wie Genehmigung oder Ablehnung ergreifen. Beachten Sie, dass automatisch eine E-Mail an den Anforderer gesendet wird, um ihn über die Genehmigung oder Ablenkung zu informieren.
|-
|20
|Users can also modify expense reports.
|Benutzer können Kostenabrechnungen auch ändern.
|-
|21
|To create a new expense report based on an existing one, use the clone option.
|Verwenden Sie die Option Klonen, um eine neue Kostenabrechnung basierend auf einer Vorhandenen zu erstellen.
|-
|22
|Viewing Expense Reports and Statistics
|Anzeigen von Kostenabrechnungen und Statistiken
|-
|23
|Use the appropriate menus to view the list of expense reports.
|Verwenden Sie die entsprechenden Menüs, um die Liste der Kostenabrechnungen anzuzeigen.
|-
|24
|Expense reports can be reviewed based on the status of each report such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Paid, Canceled and Refused.
|Kostenabrechnungen können basierend auf dem Status jedes Berichts überprüft werden, z. B. Entwurf, Validiert, Genehmigt, Bezahlt, Storniert und Abgelehnt.
|-
|25
|Statistics gives a graphical birds-eye view of all the expense reports.
|Die Statistik bietet eine grafische Vogelperspektive aller Kostenabrechnungen.
|-
|26
|Fill in the required filters if you are looking for specific expense reports. You can view the statistics in a tabular as well as graphical format.
|Wählen Sie die erforderlichen Filter aus, wenn Sie nach bestimmten Kostenabrechnungen suchen. Sie können die Statistiken sowohl in tabellarischer als auch in grafischer Form anzeigen lassen.
|-
|27
|There is also a lot of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can also add you own custom fields to describe your expense reports and you will be able to export your expense report database.
|Es gibt auch viele andere Funktionen, die über das Setup aktiviert werden können. Wie bei den meisten Dolibarr-Modulen können Sie auch eigene benutzerdefinierte Felder hinzufügen, um Ihre Kostenabrechnungen zu beschreiben. Sie können Ihre Kostenabrechnungsdatenbanken außerdem exportieren.
|-
|28
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Vielen Dank, dass Sie sich dieses Video-Tutorial angesehen haben. Besuchen Sie www.dolibarr.org, um mehr zu erfahren.
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Stock

2020-08-04T08:47:46Z

Pradeepv:

'''Story board for Module Stocks:'''

'''Video Title:''' Stocks in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Stocks module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module Stocks from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You also need to activate the module Products and "Product Lots". The Products module is activated automatically when the Stocks module is activated.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Stocks module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the module "Products" and "Product Lots".
|-
|Grant permission on the "Stocks" and "Products" modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Stock Allocation'''
|
|-
|The Stock management module saves the current quantity, status and movement of products that are stocked in warehouses. Apply the "Stock too low" filter to view products having stock less than the desired stock.
|Show the list view of stocks.
|-
|You can create a warehouse from the respective menu. A warehouse is a location where products are received at or stocked and shipped from.
|Show creating a warehouse.
|-
|While creating a product, the stock allocation parameters are also captured. Choose a default warehouse where the product is usually stocked. Specify a stock limit if you want to be notified when the stock limit is reached. Specify the desired quantity you want to get when doing automatic replenishment.
|Demo product creation screen and input the fields mentioned in the voice over.
|-
|For any product, the stocking information is available under the "Stock" tab. This includes all stocking parameters as well as warehouses.
|Show a product detail screen. Click on the Stock tab to show it.
|-
|Note that purchase orders and sales orders automatically update the product stock when the orders are fulfilled. For more information about purchase orders and sales orders, refer to the video tutorials about those modules.
|Show a Purchase Order. Click on "Receive Items". Fill in and submit.
|-
|'''Stocks - Module Features'''
|
|-
|When new stock arrives, or when any stock leaves the warehouse, click on the appropriate button to update the stock by means of stock correction. Choose the warehouse, and choose whether to add or delete stock. Enter the number of units and unit purchase price. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Finally, enter a label and inventory code for capturing the stock movement.
|Demo Stock Correction using the "Correct Stock" button.
|-
|You can transfer stock from one warehouse to another by clicking on the appropriate button. Choose the source warehouse, the target warehouse and the number of units to be transferred.
|Demo Stock Transfer.
|-
|Note that if you have created product variants, then the stock correction and stock transfer options are available only on those product variants and not on the original product.
|Show the buttons disabled for a product which has variants defined.
|-
|Stock correction and stock transfer are considered as stock movements and can be tracked from the "Movements" list view.
|Show the previous entry showing up in the Movements list view.
|-
|The "Mass stock transfer" menu option also allows you to move stock from one warehouse to another.
|Show mass stock transfer. Click on record transfer and demo the feature.
|-
|"Replenishment" is a list of all products that have stock that is lower than the desired stock. Choose a product by ticking the checkbox in order to create a purchase order to fill the difference.
|Demo the replenishment feature.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module setup. Also, like most other Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your product stock, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the import or export modules to import or export your product stock database.
|Show custom field creation
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Recurring invoices

2020-07-23T04:11:00Z

Pradeepv:

'''Story board for Module Recurring Invoices:'''

'''Video Title:''' Recurring Invoices in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use Recurring Invoices in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Invoices" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable the "Banks and Cash" module.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Financial Modules and enable the Invoices module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the "Banks and Cash" module.
|-
|Grant permission on the Invoices module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Recurring Invoice'''
|
|-
|For creating a recurring invoice, navigate to an existing invoice that is in the "Open" status and click on the "Convert Into Template Invoice" button.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Provide a title for the invoice. Enter any public or private notes. The Payment terms and Payment type and Bank account are pre-filled from the main invoice. If the module "Project" is enabled, you will be able to choose a project.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|The "Recurrence" section has the key parameters for defining the recurring invoice. Enter the frequency of recurrence and choose the unit - either days, months or years. The frequency of recurrence defines the time period between invoices. Choose the date for generating the first invoice and enter the maximum number of invoices that are to be automatically generated. Based on these parameters, the system will automatically generate recurring invoices. Finally, choose whether the recurring invoices will be in the draft status or automatically in the validated status. If you choose "draft status", you will need to issue the invoices manually by validating them after they are generated by the system. If you choose "validated status", the recurring invoices will be automatically issued without waiting for your validation.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|The products and services along with pricing information are pre-filled from the main invoice.
|Zoom in to show the products and services pre-filled.
|-
|Click on the "Create" button to finalise the recurring invoices.
|Click "Create"
|-
|'''Recurring Invoices - Module Features'''
|
|-
|You can find two fields in the detail view of a recurring invoice that provides information about the status of the invoices generated from the recurring invoice. The "Number of invoice generation already done" field gives the number of recurring invoices that have already been generated and issued from the recurring invoice. The "Date of latest generation" gives the date when the latest invoice was generated and issued from the recurring invoice.
|Zoom in and show the two fields being discussed.
|-
|If you want to stop generating additional invoices from the recurring invoice, click on the "Disable" button. You can also "Enable" a disabled recurring invoice.
|Demo the Disable and Enable buttons.
|-
|If you want to manually issue invoices from a recurring invoice, use the "Create Invoice" button. Note that this is available only when the "Date for next invoice generation" is reached, and the button is disabled otherwise. Note that this step is also not required, because the system will automatically generate invoices from a recurring invoice.
|Show the "Create Invoice" button. Cut to show the "Create Invoice" button in disabled state for a recurring invoice whose "Date for next invoice generation" is not yet reached.
|-
|All other features of the "Invoices" module also apply to invoices issued from recurring invoices. For more information on those features, refer to the video about "Invoices and Payments".
|Show the buttons available under the detail view of a standard invoice.
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to your invoices and you will be able to export your database of invoices and payments.
|Show custom field generation and the invoice creation screen where it is available.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Recurring invoices

2020-07-23T04:07:26Z

Pradeepv: EN Storyboard added

'''Story board for Module Recurring Invoices:'''

'''Video Title:''' Recurring Invoices in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use Recurring Invoices in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Invoices" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable the "Banks and Cash" module.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Financial Modules and enable the Invoices module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the "Banks and Cash" module.
|-
|Grant permission on the Invoices module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Recurring Invoice'''
|
|-
|For creating a recurring invoice, navigate to an existing invoice that is in the "Open" status and click on the "Convert Into Template Invoice" button.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Provide a title for the invoice. Enter any public or private notes. The Payment terms and Payment type and Bank account are pre-filled from the main invoice. If the module "Project" is enabled, you will be able to choose a project.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|The "Recurrance" section has the key parameters for defining the recurring invoice. Enter the frequency of recurrence and choose the unit - either days, months or years. The frequency of recurrence defines the time period between invoices. Choose the date for generating the first invoice, and enter the maximum number of invoices that are to be automatically generated. Based on these parameters, the system will automatically generate recurring invoices. Finally, choose whether the recurring invoices will be in the draft status or automatically in the validated status. If you choose "draft status", you will need to issue the invoices manually by validating them after they are generated by the system. If you choose "validated status", the recurring invoices will be automatically issued without waiting for your validation.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|The products and services along with pricing information are pre-filled from the main invoice.
|Zoom in to show the products and services pre-filled.
|-
|Click on the "Create" button to finalise the recurring invoices.
|Click "Create"
|-
|'''Recurring Invoices - Module Features'''
|
|-
|You can find two fields in the detail view of a recurring invoice that provides information about the status of the invoices generated from the recurring invoice. The "Number of invoice generation already done" field gives the number of recurring invoices that have already been generated and issued from the recurring invoice. The "Date of latest generation" gives the date when the latest invoice was generated and issued from the recurring invoice.
|Zoom in and show the two fields being discussed.
|-
|If you want to stop generating additional invoices from the recurring invoice, click on the "Disable" button. You can also "Enable" a disabled recurring invoice.
|Demo the Diable and Enable buttons.
|-
|If you want to manually issue invoices from a recurring invoice, use the "Create Invoice" button. Note that this is available only when the "Date for next invoice generation" is reached, and the button is disabled otherwise. Note that this step is also not required, because the system will automatically generate invoices from a recurring invoice.
|Show the "Create Invoice" button. Cut to show the "Create Invoice" button in disabled state for a recurring invoice whose "Date for next invoice generation" is not yet reached.
|-
|All other features of the "Invoices" module also apply to invoices issued from recurring invoices. For more information on those features, refer to the video about "Invoices and Payments".
|Show the buttons available under the detail view of a standard invoice.
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to your invoices and you will be able to export your database of invoices and payments.
|Show custom field generation and the invoice creation screen where it is available.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Stock

2020-07-21T07:32:15Z

Pradeepv: Updated EN storyboard

'''Story board for Module Stocks:'''

'''Video Title:''' Stocks in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Stocks module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module Stocks from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You also need to activate the module Products and "Product Lots". The Products module is activated automatically when the Stocks module is activated.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Stocks module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the module "Products" and "Product Lots".
|-
|Grant permission on the Stocks and "Product Lots" modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Stock Allocation'''
|
|-
|The Stock management module saves the current quantity, status and movement of products that are stocked in warehouses. Apply the "Stock too low" filter to view products having stock less than the desired stock.
|Show the list view of stocks.
|-
|You can create a warehouse from the respective menu. A warehouse is a location where products are received at or stocked and shipped from.
|Show creating a warehouse.
|-
|While creating a product, the stock allocation parameters are also captured. Choose a default warehouse where the product is usually stocked. Specify a stock limit if you want to be notified when the stock limit is reached. Specify the desired quantity you want to get when doing automatic replenishment.
|Demo product creation screen and input the fields mentioned in the voice over.
|-
|For any product, the stocking information is available under the "Stock" tab. This includes all stocking parameters as well as warehouses.
|Show a product detail screen. Click on the Stock tab to show it.
|-
|Note that purchase orders and sales orders automatically update the product stock when the orders are fulfilled. For more information about purchase orders and sales orders, refer to the video tutorials about those modules.
|Show a Purchase Order. Click on "Receive Items". Fill in and submit.
|-
|'''Stocks - Module Features'''
|
|-
|When new stock arrives, or when any stock leaves the warehouse, click on the appropriate button to update the stock by means of stock correction. Choose the warehouse, and choose whether to add or delete stock. Enter the number of units and unit purchase price. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Finally, enter a label and inventory code for capturing the stock movement.
|Demo Stock Correction using the "Correct Stock" button.
|-
|You can transfer stock from one warehouse to another by clicking on the appropriate button. Choose the source warehouse, the target warehouse and the number of units to be transferred.
|Demo Stock Transfer.
|-
|Note that if you have created product variants, then the stock correction and stock transfer options are available only on those product variants and not on the original product.
|Show the buttons disabled for a product which has variants defined.
|-
|Stock correction and stock transfer are considered as stock movements and can be tracked from the "Movements" list view.
|Show the previous entry showing up in the Movements list view.
|-
|The "Mass stock transfer" menu option also allows you to move stock from one warehouse to another.
|Show mass stock transfer. Click on record transfer and demo the feature.
|-
|"Replenishment" is a list of all products that have stock that is lower than the desired stock. Choose a product by ticking the checkbox in order to create a purchase order to fill the difference.
|Demo the replenishment feature.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module setup. Also, like most other Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your product stock, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the import or export modules to import or export your product stock database.
|Show custom field creation
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Stock

2020-07-21T05:55:39Z

Pradeepv: First cut of EN storyboard

'''Story board for Module Stocks:'''

'''Video Title:''' Stocks in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Stocks module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module Stocks from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You also need to activate the module Products and "Product Lots". The Products module is activated automatically when the Stocks module is activated.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Stocks module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the module "Products" and "Product Lots".
|-
|Grant permission on the Stocks and "Product Lots" modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Stock Allocation'''
|
|-
|The Stock management module saves the current quantity, status and movement of products that are stocked in warehouses.
|Show the list view of stocks.
|-
|While creating a product, the stock allocation parameters are also captured. Choose a default warehouse where the product is usually stocked. Specify a stock limit if you want to be notified when the stock limit is reached. Specify the desired quantity you want to get when doing automatic replenishment.
|Demo product creation screen and input the fields mentioned in the voice over.
|-
|For any product, the stocking information is available under the "Stock" tab. This includes all stocking parameters as well as warehouses.
|Show a product detail screen. Click on the Stock tab to show it.
|-
|Once new stock arrives, click on the appropriate button to enter the new stock into the system. Choose the warehouse, and choose whether to add or delete stock. Enter the number of units and unit purchase price. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Finally, choose a label and inventory code for the stock movement.
|Demo Stock Correction using the "Correct Stock" button.
|-
|'''Stocks - Module Features'''
|
|-
|You can transfer stock from one warehouse to another by clicking on the appropriate button. Choose the source warehouse, the target warehouse and the number of units to be transferred.
|Demo Stock Transfer.
|-
|Note that if you have created product variants, then the stock correction and stock transfer options are available only on those variants.
|Show the buttons disabled for a product which has variants defined.
|-
|Stock correction and stock transfer are considered as stock movements and can be tracked from the "Movements" list view.
|Show the previous entry showing up in the Movements list view.
|-
|Warehouses are locations where products are received at or stocked and shipped from.
|Show the list of warehouses.
|-
|Mass stock transfer is another way to move stock from one warehouse to another.
|Show mass stock transfer. Click on record transfer and demo the feature.
|-
|"Replenishment" is a list of all products having stock that is lower than the desired stock. Choose a product by ticking the checkbox in order to create a purchase order to fill the difference. The complete process for creating purchase orders is presented in the respective video about Purchase Orders.
|Demo the replenishment feature.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module setup. Also, like most other Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your product stock, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the import or export modules to import or export your product stock database.
|Show custom field creation
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Purchase Orders

2020-07-20T22:41:55Z

Pradeepv:

'''Story board for Module Purchase Orders:'''

'''Video Title:''' Purchase Orders
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Purchase Orders module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Vendors" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you may be interested in enabling other modules that interact with the Vendors module such as the modules Vendor Commercial Proposals, Invoices, etc, even if these are not required.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll down and enable the Vendors module. Enable also the Vendor Commercial Proposals and Invoices modules.
|-
|Grant permission on the "Vendors" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Purchase Order'''
|
|-
|A Purchase Order is usually created from a vendor proposal that has been accepted by your vendor. Navigate to the vendor proposal and click on the "Create Order" button which is available only for vendor proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|Navigate to the vendor proposals list view. Choose a proposal. Click on the "Create Order" button.
|-
|In this case, the products or services defined in the vendor proposal are copied into the Purchase Order automatically.
|Highlight and show that the products have been copied over into the Purchase Order.
|-
|When a purchase order is created from a vendor proposal, like any other object created from another one in Dolibarr, the purchase order and the vendor proposal remain linked with each other. You can switch at any time from the Purchase order to the vendor proposal by using the links visible in the section "Related Objects".
|Show the automatically generated link under "Related Objects".
|-
|You can also make some links manually with any other object by using the "Link to" menu and choosing the object type and object to which the link must be created.
|Create a link manually.
|-
|You can also create a Purchase Order from scratch by clicking on "New Order" and entering all the details manually.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Choose the vendor for whom you are creating the Purchase Order. Choose the payment terms, payment type and planned date of delivery. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Choose a currency. Add any public or private notes. Click the "create" button to create the Purchase Order.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|You can now start adding the actual product or service and pricing information to your Purchase Order. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple products or services to the Purchase Order.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Purchase Order'''
|
|-
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the Purchase Order.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the Purchase Order is ready to be sent to your vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Show the PDF file.
|-
|Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the Purchase Order are automatically included.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details. Show the email being sent.
|-
|'''Purchase Orders - Module Features'''
|
|-
|You can use the list view to view the list of Purchase Orders. The list is categorized based on the status of the Purchase Orders such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Ordered, Partially Received, All products received, Canceled and Refused.
|Show the list of POs. Show the various list views. Click on a PO to open the detailed view.
|-
|You can make an order from a purchase order. Click on the appropriate button, fill in the order date, order method and enter any comments to change the purchase order to the "Ordered" status.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|For recording receivables, use the appropriate button and provide the delivery date, the relevant delivery status and any comments to change the status of delivery corresponding to the purchase order.
|Demo the flow for Classify Reception button.
|-
|The Contacts and Addresses tab can be used to define explicit contacts - either business entities or people - to the Purchase Order, but this is optional.
|Show the contacts tab. Add a contact.
|-
|The "Item Receipts" tab lists all the items dispatched and received as part of the purchase order.
|Show the tab.
|-
|Use the "Linked files" section to add any file attachments to the Purchase Order.
|Show the linked files tab and upload an attachment.
|-
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the purchase order, such as creation, update, shipment etc.
|Show the events tab.
|-
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Purchase Order with all the details pre-filled.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|You can create a shipment or invoice from the purchase order by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Invoices are covered in detail in the relevant video tutorial.
|Show the appropriate buttons. Click on one of them to show the invoice creation screen.
|-
|You must decide, based to your own internal workflow, the order of events according to which you make the shipment from the purchase order, you create and send the invoice, and you set the purchase order as billed. Like most other Dolibarr modules, the Dolibarr process can be customised to work according to how your existing company process works. So, you need not change your company process according to Dolibarr!
|Show a purchase order being fulfilled.
|-
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the purchase orders are being fulfilled. Use the filters such as Company and Vendor to view detailed statistics.
|Show the Statistics and fill in a filter.
|-
|In any page of the application, for example on the main dashboard, when the reference of a Purchase Order is mentioned, an orange flag alerts you when a Purchase Order is delayed. You can setup an offset - the number of days before or after the expiration date - to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|Go on main My dashboard page to show the widget "Orders" to show a PO with the exclamation flag and put the mouse on the flag so the tooltip "Late" appears.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup, for example, to generate an invoice automatically on purchase order validation or to set a Purchase order automatically to the paid status when an invoice is generated thanks to the Workflow module.
|Navigate to the module settings for Purchase Orders.
|-
|Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your Purchase Orders, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your database of Purchase Orders.
|Show adding a custom field on a purchase order
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Purchase Orders

2020-07-20T15:36:16Z

Pradeepv: Added some more features

'''Story board for Module Purchase Orders:'''

'''Video Title:''' Purchase Orders
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Purchase Orders module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Vendors" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you may be interested in enabling other modules that interact with the Vendors module such as the modules Vendor Commercial Proposals, Invoices, etc, even if these are not required.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll down and enable the Vendors module. Enable also the Vendor Commercial Proposals and Invoices modules.
|-
|Grant permission on the "Vendors" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Purchase Order'''
|
|-
|A Purchase Order is usually created from a vendor proposal that has been accepted by your vendor. Navigate to the vendor proposal and click on the "Create Order" button which is available only for vendor proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|Navigate to the vendor proposals list view. Choose a proposal. Click on the "Create Order" button.
|-
|In this case, the products or services defined in the vendor proposal are copied into the Purchase Order automatically.
|Highlight and show that the products have been copied over into the Purchase Order.
|-
|When a purchase order is created from a vendor proposal, like any other object created from another one in Dolibarr, the purchase order and the vendor proposal remain linked with each other. You can switch at any time from the Purchase order to the vendor proposal by using the links visible in the section "Related Objects".
|Show the automatically generated link under "Related Objects".
|-
|You can also make some links manually with any other object by using the "Link to" menu and choosing the object type and object to which the link must be created.
|Create a link manually.
|-
|You can also create a Purchase Order from scratch by clicking on "New Order" and entering all the details manually.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Choose the vendor for whom you are creating the Purchase Order. Choose the payment terms, payment type and planned date of delivery. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Choose a currency. Add any public or private notes. Click the "create" button to create the Purchase Order.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|You can now start adding the actual product or service and pricing information to your Purchase Order. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple products or services to the Purchase Order.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Purchase Order'''
|
|-
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the Purchase Order.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the Purchase Order is ready to be sent to your vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Show the PDF file.
|-
|Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the Purchase Order are automatically included.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details. Show the email being sent.
|-
|'''Purchase Orders - Module Features'''
|
|-
|You can use the list view to view the list of Purchase Orders. The list is categorized based on the status of the Purchase Orders such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Ordered, Partially Received, All products received, Canceled and Refused.
|Show the list of POs. Show the various list views. Click on a PO to open the detailed view.
|-
|You can make an order from a purchase order. Click on the appropriate button, fill in the order date, order method and enter any comments to change the purchase order to the "Ordered" status.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|For recording receivables, use the appropriate button and provide the delivery date, the relevant delivery status and any comments to change the status of delivery corresponding to the purchase order.
|Demo the flow for Classify Reception button.
|-
|The Contacts and Addresses tab can be used to define explicit contacts - either business entities or people - to the Purchase Order, but this is optional.
|Show the contacts tab. Add a contact.
|-
|The "Item Receipts" tab lists all the items dispatched and received as part of the purchase order.
|Show the tab.
|-
|Use the "Linked files" section to add any file attachments to the Purchase Order.
|Show the linked files tab and upload an attachment.
|-
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the purchase order, such as creation, update, shipment etc.
|Show the events tab.
|-
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Purchase Order with all the details pre-filled.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|You can create a shipment or invoice from the purchase order by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Invoices are covered in detail in the relevant video tutorial.
|Show the appropriate buttons. Click on one of them to show the invoice creation screen.
|-
|You must decide, based to your own internal workflow, the order of events according to which you make the shipment from the purchase order, you create and send the invoice, and you set the purchase order as billed. Like most other Dolibarr modules, the Dolibarr process can be customised to work according to how your existing company process works. So, you need not change your company process according to Dolibarr!
|Show a purchase order being fulfilled.
|-
|Note that the generated invoice can also be a recurring invoice. For example, for a Purchase Order that need monthly payments for 1 year, an invoice will be generated automatically each month, 12 times. More information on the invoicing process is covered in the videos about Invoices and Recurring Invoices.
|Show a recurring invoice.
|-
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the purchase orders are being fulfilled. Use the filters such as Company and Vendor to view detailed statistics.
|Show the Statistics and fill in a filter.
|-
|In any page of the application, for example on the main dashboard, when the reference of a Purchase Order is mentioned, an orange flag alerts you when a Purchase Order is delayed. You can setup an offset - the number of days before or after the expiration date - to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|Go on main My dashboard page to show the widget "Orders" to show a PO with the exclamation flag and put the mouse on the flag so the tooltip "Late" appears.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup, for example, to generate an invoice automatically on purchase order validation or to set a Purchase order automatically to the paid status when an invoice is generated thanks to the Workflow module.
|Navigate to the module settings for Purchase Orders.
|-
|Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your Purchase Orders, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your database of Purchase Orders.
|Show adding a custom field on a purchase order
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Purchase Orders

2020-07-20T15:27:38Z

Pradeepv: Corrected spell errors

'''Story board for Module Purchase Orders:'''

'''Video Title:''' Purchase Orders
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Purchase Orders module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Vendors" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you may be interested in enabling other modules that interact with the Vendors module such as the modules Vendor Commercial Proposals, Invoices, etc, even if these are not required.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll down and enable the Vendors module. Enable also the Vendor Commercial Proposals and Invoices modules.
|-
|Grant permission on the "Vendors" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Purchase Order'''
|
|-
|A Purchase Order is usually created from a vendor proposal that has been accepted by your vendor. Navigate to the vendor proposal and click on the "Create Order" button which is available only for vendor proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|Navigate to the vendor proposals list view. Choose a proposal. Click on the "Create Order" button.
|-
|In this case, the products or services defined in the vendor proposal are copied into the Purchase Order automatically.
|Highlight and show that the products have been copied over into the Purchase Order.
|-
|When a purchase order is created from a vendor proposal, like any other object created from another one in Dolibarr, the purchase order and the vendor proposal remain linked with each other. You can switch at any time from the Purchase order to the vendor proposal by using the links visible in the section "Related Objects".
|Show the automatically generated link under "Related Objects".
|-
|You can also make some links manually with any other object by using the "Link to" menu and choosing the object type and object to which the link must be created.
|Create a link manually.
|-
|You can also create a Purchase Order from scratch by clicking on "New Order" and entering all the details manually.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Choose the vendor for whom you are creating the Purchase Order. Choose the payment terms, payment type and planned date of delivery. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Choose a currency. Add any public or private notes. Click the "create" button to create the Purchase Order.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|You can now start adding the actual product or service and pricing information to your Purchase Order. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple products or services to the Purchase Order.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Purchase Order'''
|
|-
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the Purchase Order.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the Purchase Order is ready to be sent to your vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Show the PDF file.
|-
|Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the Purchase Order are automatically included.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details. Show the email being sent.
|-
|'''Purchase Orders - Module Features'''
|
|-
|You can use the list view to view the list of Purchase Orders. The list is categorized based on the status of the Purchase Orders such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Ordered, Partially Received, All products received, Canceled and Refused.
|Show the list of POs. Show the various list views. Click on a PO to open the detailed view.
|-
|The Contacts and Addresses tab can be used to define explicit contacts - either business entities or people - to the Purchase Order, but this is optional.
|Show the contacts tab. Add a contact.
|-
|The "Item Receipts" tab lists all the items dispatched and received as part of the purchase order.
|Show the tab.
|-
|Use the "Linked files" section to add any file attachments to the Purchase Order.
|Show the linked files tab and upload an attachment.
|-
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the purchase order, such as creation, update, shipment etc.
|Show the events tab.
|-
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Purchase Order with all the details pre-filled.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|You can create a shipment or invoice from the purchase order by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Invoices are covered in detail in the relevant video tutorial.
|Show the appropriate buttons. Click on one of them to show the invoice creation screen.
|-
|You must decide, based to your own internal workflow, the order of events according to which you make the shipment from the purchase order, you create and send the invoice, and you set the purchase order as billed. Like most other Dolibarr modules, the Dolibarr process can be customised to work according to how your existing company process works. So, you need not change your company process according to Dolibarr!
|Show a purchase order being fulfilled.
|-
|Note that the generated invoice can also be a recurring invoice. For example, for a Purchase Order that need monthly payments for 1 year, an invoice will be generated automatically each month, 12 times. More information on the invoicing process is covered in the videos about Invoices and Recurring Invoices.
|Show a recurring invoice.
|-
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the purchase orders are being fulfilled. Use the filters such as Company and Vendor to view detailed statistics.
|Show the Statistics and fill in a filter.
|-
|In any page of the application, for example on the main dashboard, when the reference of a Purchase Order is mentioned, an orange flag alerts you when a Purchase Order is delayed. You can setup an offset - the number of days before or after the expiration date - to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|Go on main My dashboard page to show the widget "Orders" to show a PO with the exclamation flag and put the mouse on the flag so the tooltip "Late" appears.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup, for example, to generate an invoice automatically on purchase order validation or to set a Purchase order automatically to the paid status when an invoice is generated thanks to the Workflow module.
|Navigate to the module settings for Purchase Orders.
|-
|Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your Purchase Orders, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your database of Purchase Orders.
|Show adding a custom field on a purchase order
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Purchase Orders

2020-07-20T12:29:23Z

Pradeepv: Added EN Storyboard for Purchase Order

'''Story board for Module Purchase Orders:'''

'''Video Title:''' Purchase Orders
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Purchase Orders module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Vendors" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. Note that you may be interested in enabling other modules that interact with the Vendors module such as the modules Vendor Commercial Proposals, Invoices, etc, even if these are not required.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll down and enable the Vendors module. Enable also the Vendor Commercial Proposals and Invoices modules.
|-
|Grant permission on the "Vendors" module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Purchase Order'''
|
|-
|A Purchase Order is usually created from a vendor proposal that has been accepted by your vendor. Navigate to the vendor proposal and click on the "Create Order" button which is available only for vendor proposals that have been validated and accepted.
|Navigate to the vendor proposals list view. Choose a proposal. Click on the "Create Order" button.
|-
|In this case, the products or services defined in the vendor proposal are copied into the Purchase Order automatically.
|Highlight and show that the products have been copied over into the Purchase Order.
|-
|When a purchase order is created from a vendor proposal, like any other object created from another one in Dolibarr, the purchase order and the vendor proposal remain linked with each other. You can switch at any time from the purcahse order to the vendor proposal by using the links visible in the section "Related Objects".
|Show the automatically generated link under "Related Objects".
|-
|You can also make some links manually with any other object by using the "Link to" menu and choosing the object type and object to which the link must be created.
|Create a link manually.
|-
|You can also create a Purchase Order from scratch by clicking on "New Order" and entering all the details manually.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Choose the vendor for whom you are creating the Purchase Order. Choose the payment terms, payment type and planned date of delivery. If the module "Project" is enabled, you can choose a project. Choose a currency. Add any public or private notes. Click the "create" button to create the Purchase Order.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|You can now start adding the actual product or service and pricing information to your Purchase Order. Add the service name or choose from one of your pre-defined services. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount. You can add multiple products or services to the Purchase Order.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Purchase Order'''
|
|-
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the Purchase Order.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the Purchase Order is ready to be sent to your vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Show the PDF file.
|-
|Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the Purcahse Order are automatically included.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details. Show the email being sent.
|-
|'''Purcahse Orders - Module Features'''
|
|-
|You can use the list view to view the list of Purchase Orders. The list is categorized based on the status of the Purchase Orders such as Draft, Validated, Approved, Ordered, Partially Received, All products received, Canceled and Refused.
|Show the list of POs. Show the various list views. Click on a PO to open the detailed view.
|-
|The Contacts and Addresses tab can be used to define explicit contacts - either business entities or people - to the Purcahse Order, but this is optional.
|Show the contacts tab. Add a contact.
|-
|The "Item Receipts" tab lists all the items dispatched and received as part of the purchase order.
|Show the tab.
|-
|Use the "Linked files" section to add any file attachments to the Purcahse Order.
|Show the linked files tab and upload an attachment.
|-
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the purchase order, such as creation, update, shipment etc.
|Show the events tab.
|-
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Purchase Order with all the details pre-filled.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|You can create a shipment or invoice from the purchase order by clicking on the appropriate buttons. Invoices are covered in detail in the relevant video tutorial.
|Show the appropriate buttons. Click on one of them to show the invoice creation screen.
|-
|You must decide, based to your own internal workflow, the order of events according to which you make the shipment from the purchase order, you create and send the invoice, and you set the purchase order as billed. Like most other Dolibarr modules, the Dolibarr process can be customised to work according to how your existing company process works. So, you need not change your company process according to Dolibarr!
|Show a purchase order being fulfilled.
|-
|Note that the generated invoice can also be a recurring invoice. For example, for a Purchase Order that need monthly payments for 1 year, an invoice will be generated automatically each month, 12 times. More information on the invoicing process is covered in the videos about Invoices and Recurring Invoices.
|Show a recurring invoice.
|-
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the purcahse orders are being fulfilled. Use the filters such as Company and Vendor to view detailed statistics.
|Show the Statistics and fill in a filter.
|-
|In any page of the application, for example on the main dashboard, when the reference of a Purchase Order is mentioned, an orange flag alerts you when a Purchase Order is delayed. You can setup an offset - the number of days before or after the expiration date - to decide when the visual "Late" alert must be shown.
|Go on main My dashboard page to show the widget "Orders" to show a PO with the exclamation flag and put the mouse on the flag so the tooltip "Late" appears.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup, for example, to generate an invoice automatically on purchase order validation or to set a Purchase order automatically to the paid status when an invoice is generated thanks to the Workflow module.
|Navigate to the module settings for Purchase Orders.
|-
|Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your Purchase Orders, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the export module to export your database of Purchase Orders.
|Show adding a custom field on a purchase order
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Supplier invoices

2020-07-20T10:01:37Z

Pradeepv: Added EN storyboard for Vendor Invoices

'''Story board for Module Vendor Invoices:'''

'''Video Title:''' Vendor Invoices in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Vendor Invoices module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Invoices" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable the "Banks and Cash" module.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Financial Modules and enable the Invoices module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the "Banks and Cash" module.
|-
|Grant permission on the Invoices module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Vendor Invoice'''
|
|-
|Let us expolore the various ways in which you can create a vendor invoice. You can create a vendor invoice from a purchase order that has been validated and approved by clicking on the appropriate button. Information available in the purchase order such as vendor, payment terms and project are copied automatically into the vendor invoice.
|Navigate to a purchase order and click on the create invoice button. Show the fields being pre-filled.
|-
|You can also create a vendor invoice or credit note from a third party who is a vendor by navigating to the "Vendor" tab.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|You can also create a vendor invoice directly from the "Vendor Invoices" menu under the "Billing and Payments" tab. Choose the vendor you are creating the invoice for.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Choose the invoice type. A standard invoice is the default invoice type. A credit note is available when creating an invoice from the "Vendor" tab under the menu "Third parties".
|Show the various invoice types in the combo button list.
|-
|Choose the invoice date, payment due date, payment terms, payment type, bank account and currency. If the module "Project" is enabled, you will be able to choose a project. Add any public or private notes.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Once the invoice is created, you can add products and services along with the pricing information for the same. You can add multiple products and services. You can choose from existing products and services in order to pre-fill the pricing information.
|Add products or services and choose from pre-filled product or service during the second time.
|-
|Use the linked files menu to add any attachments to the vendor invoice.
|Attach a file.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Vendor Invoice'''
|
|-
|Click on "Validate" to validate the vendor invoice.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the invoice is ready to be sent to your vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Click on the PDF in section "Generated document" to show the PDF.
|-
|You can now use the "Send Email" button to send the invoice to your vendor. Note that all the invoice details are automatically attached to the email.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details, show the email being sent.
|-
|'''Vendor Invoices - Module Features'''
|
|-
|Use the "Clone" button if you want to create a similar vendor invoice in the future.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|If you have received payment for a vendor invoice, click on the "Enter Payment" button to record the payment in the system. Choose the date, payment type and account to credit. Enter the transaction number and any comments. Enter the payment amount and confirm the payment. Note that if you received a partial payment, you will be able to enter a payment again. Once the full payment due for the vendor invoice has been received and recorded, the vendor invoice is automatically closed.
|Show multiple payments being entered and the invoice getting closed automatically once full payment has been received.
|-
|If you wish to mark an invoice as paid, click on the appropriate button. The vendor invoice is automatically closed with the "paid" status.
|Show "Classify Paid" button and click it.
|-
|You can issue a "credit note" for a vendor invoice by clicking on the appropriate button. Note that the invoice type has been set to "credit note" with the invoice which is to be revised being automatically chosen. Fill in the required fields in order to create the "credit note".
|Show issuing of credit note.
|-
|You can view the list of vendor invoices with the relevant payment status in the list view. You can also view the list based on vendor invoice status such as Draft, Not Paid and Paid.
|Show the list view and the list views based on status.
|-
|Payments received from vendors are available under the payments list view.
|Show the payments list view.
|-
|You can create reports for payments received on a monthly basis. The report is instantly available for download in the PDF format.
|Show report generation and show the PDF report.
|-
|Statistics gives a birds-eye-view of all vendor invoices. You can filter the statistics based on the available parameters.
|Show statistics and one of the filters.
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to your vendor invoices and you will be able to export your database of vendor invoices and vendor payments.
|Show custom field generation and the invoice creation screen where it is available.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Invoices and Payments

2020-07-20T08:39:05Z

Pradeepv: Updated for summarising recurring invoices

'''Story board for Module Invoices and Payments:'''

'''Video Title:''' Invoices and Payments in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Invoices and Payments module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Invoices" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable the "Banks and Cash" module.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Financial Modules and enable the Invoices module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the "Banks and Cash" module.
|-
|-
|Grant permission on the Invoices module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating an Invoice'''
|
|-
|Let us expolore the various ways in which you can create an invoice. You can create an invoice from a commercial proposal that is in the "accepted" status by clicking on the appropriate button. Information available in the commercial proposal such as third party, payment terms and project are copied automatically into the invoice.
|Navigate to a commercial proposal and click on the create invoice button. Show the fields being pre-filled.
|-
|Similarly, you can create an invoice from a sales order that has been validated, from a purchase order, from a contract or subscription as well as from an intervention.
|Show the invoice creation button in a sales order, contract, and then intervention.
|-
|You can also create an invoice or credit note from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Supplier invoices can be created from a vendor proposal or purchase order. For more information on supplier invoices, please view the video about supplier invoices.
|Show the invoice creation button from a vendor proposal and the purchase order.
|-
|You can also create an invoice directly from the Billing and Payments tab. Choose the third party you are creating the invoice for.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Choose the invoice type. A down payment invoice is created when a down payment has been received. Replacement and credit note invoices can be created to replace or correct previously issued invoices, and they can only be issued from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab. Template invoices are a way to create recurring invoices, which we will cover later on in this video.
|Show the various invoice types in the combo button list.
|-
|Choose the invoice date, payment terms, payment type and bank account. If the module "Project" is enabled, you will be able to choose a project. Choose the currency and add any public or private notes.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Once the invoice is created, you can add products and services along with pricing information for the same. You can add multiple products and services. You can choose from existing products and services to pre-fill the pricing information.
|Add products or services and choose from pre-filled product or service during the second time.
|-
|Use the linked files menu to add any attachments to the invoice.
|Attach a file.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Invoice'''
|
|-
|Click on "Validate" to validate the invoice.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the invoice is ready to be sent to your customer. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Click on the PDF in section "Generated document" to show the PDF.
|-
|You can now use the "Send Email" button to send the invoice to your customer. Note that all the invoice details are automatically attached to the email.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details, show the email being sent.
|-
|'''Invoices - Module Features'''
|
|-
|Use the "Clone" button if you want to create a similar invoice in the future.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|If you have received payment for an invoice, click on the "Enter Payment" button to record the payment in the system. Choose the date, payment type and account to credit. Enter the transaction number and any comments. Enter the payment amount and confirm the payment. Note that if you received a partial payment, you will be able to enter a payment again. Once the full payment due for the invoice has been received and recorded, the invoice is automatically closed.
|Show multiple payments being entered and the invoice getting closed automatically once full payment has been received.
|-
|For invoice payment, you can also request a direct debit payment order, which can then be managed from the "Banks" menu under "Payment by direct debit".
|Show direct debit payment order.
|-
|If you receive only a partial payment for an invoice, and do not expect to receive the balance payment, use the appropriate button to record such a payment. Choose a reason and enter any notes. The invoice will be closed and will change into the "Paid" status.
|Show partial payment being recorded.
|-
|If you do not expect to receive any payment for an invoice, you can classify the invoice as "Abandoned". Choose a reason and enter any notes. The invoice will be canceled and moved to the "Abandoned" status.
|Show invoice being abandoned.
|-
|If you have received payments in excess, click on the appropriate button to issue a refund. Provide the payment details, enter the payment amount and confirm the refund.
|Show entering a refund.
|-
|Invoices in the "Draft" status can be converted into a template invoice, which is a way for issuing recurring invoices. For more information on how to issue a Recurring Invoice, refer to the video on Recurring Invoices.
|Show the button and click it to show the invoice creation screen. Show a recurring invoice being created in fast forward motion.
|-
|You can view the list of invoices with the relevant payment status in the list view. You can also view the list based on invoice status such as Draft, Not Paid, Paid and Abandoned.
|Show the list view and the list views based on status.
|-
|Payments are available under the payments list view.
|Show the payments list view.
|-
|You can create reports for payments received on a monthly basis. The report is instantly available for download in the PDF format.
|Show report generation and show the PDF report.
|-
|Statistics gives a birds-eye-view of all customer invoices. You can filter the statistics based on the available parameters.
|Show statistics and one of the filters.
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to your invoices and you will be able to export your database of invoices and payments.
|Show custom field generation and the invoice creation screen where it is available.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Invoices and Payments

2020-07-20T04:22:04Z

Pradeepv: Added use cases for abandoned invoices and refund

'''Story board for Module Invoices and Payments:'''

'''Video Title:''' Invoices and Payments in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Invoices and Payments module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Invoices" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable the "Banks and Cash" module.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Financial Modules and enable the Invoices module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the "Banks and Cash" module.
|-
|-
|Grant permission on the Invoices module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating an Invoice'''
|
|-
|Let us expolore the various ways in which you can create an invoice. You can create an invoice from a commercial proposal that is in the "accepted" status by clicking on the appropriate button. Information available in the commercial proposal such as third party, payment terms and project are copied automatically into the invoice.
|Navigate to a commercial proposal and click on the create invoice button. Show the fields being pre-filled.
|-
|Similarly, you can create an invoice from a sales order that has been validated, from a purchase order, from a contract or subscription as well as from an intervention.
|Show the invoice creation button in a sales order, contract, and then intervention.
|-
|You can also create an invoice or credit note from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Supplier invoices can be created from a vendor proposal or purchase order. For more information on supplier invoices, please view the video about supplier invoices.
|Show the invoice creation button from a vendor proposal and the purchase order.
|-
|You can also create an invoice directly from the Billing and Payments tab. Choose the third party you are creating the invoice for.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Choose the invoice type. A down payment invoice is created when a down payment has been received. Replacement and credit note invoices can be created to replace or correct previously issued invoices, and they can only be issued from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab. Template invoices are a way to create recurring invoices, which we will cover later on in this video.
|Show the various invoice types in the combo button list.
|-
|Choose the invoice date, payment terms, payment type and bank account. If the module "Project" is enabled, you will be able to choose a project. Choose the currency and add any public or private notes.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Once the invoice is created, you can add products and services along with pricing information for the same. You can add multiple products and services. You can choose from existing products and services to pre-fill the pricing information.
|Add products or services and choose from pre-filled product or service during the second time.
|-
|Use the linked files menu to add any attachments to the invoice.
|Attach a file.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Invoice'''
|
|-
|Click on "Validate" to validate the invoice.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the invoice is ready to be sent to your customer. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Click on the PDF in section "Generated document" to show the PDF.
|-
|You can now use the "Send Email" button to send the invoice to your customer. Note that all the invoice details are automatically attached to the email.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details, show the email being sent.
|-
|'''Invoices - Module Features'''
|
|-
|Use the "Clone" button if you want to create a similar invoice in the future.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|If you have received payment for an invoice, click on the "Enter Payment" button to record the payment in the system. Choose the date, payment type and account to credit. Enter the transaction number and any comments. Enter the payment amount and confirm the payment. Note that if you received a partial payment, you will be able to enter a payment again. Once the full payment due for the invoice has been received and recorded, the invoice is automatically closed.
|Show multiple payments being entered and the invoice getting closed automatically once full payment has been received.
|-
|For invoice payment, you can also request a direct debit payment order, which can then be managed from the "Banks" menu under "Payment by direct debit".
|Show direct debit payment order.
|-
|If you receive only a partial payment for an invoice, and do not expect to receive the balance payment, use the appropriate button to record such a payment. Choose a reason and enter any notes. The invoice will be closed and will change into the "Paid" status.
|Show partial payment being recorded.
|-
|If you do not expect to receive any payment for an invoice, you can classify the invoice as "Abandoned". Choose a reason and enter any notes. The invoice will be canceled and moved to the "Abandoned" status.
|Show invoice being abandoned.
|-
|If you have received payments in excess, click on the appropriate button to issue a refund. Provide the payment details, enter the payment amount and confirm the refund.
|Show entering a refund.
|-
|Invoices in the "Draft" status can be converted into a template invoice, which is a way for issuing recurring invoices. Provide a title for the invoice. Enter any public or private notes. Choose a project if required. Choose the frequency of recurrence in days, months or years. Choose the date for generating the first invoice, and enter the maximum number of invoices that are to be automatically generated. Based on these parameters, the system will automatically generate recurring invoices. Finally, choose whether the recurring invoices will be in the draft status or automatically in the validated status. If you choose draft status, you will need to issue the invoices manually by validating them after they are generated.
|Show the creation of recurring invoices as per the voice over.
|-
|You can view the list of invoices with the relevant payment status in the list view. You can also view the list based on invoice status such as Draft, Not Paid, Paid and Abandoned.
|Show the list view and the list views based on status.
|-
|Payments are available under the payments list view.
|Show the payments list view.
|-
|You can create reports for payments received on a monthly basis. The report is instantly available for download in the PDF format.
|Show report generation and show the PDF report.
|-
|Statistics gives a birds-eye-view of all customer invoices. You can filter the statistics based on the available parameters.
|Show statistics and one of the filters.
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to your invoices and you will be able to export your database of invoices and payments.
|Show custom field generation and the invoice creation screen where it is available.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Invoices and Payments

2020-07-19T15:02:11Z

Pradeepv:

'''Story board for Module Invoices and Payments:'''

'''Video Title:''' Invoices and Payments in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Invoices and Payments module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Invoices" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable the "Banks and Cash" module.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Financial Modules and enable the Invoices module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the "Banks and Cash" module.
|-
|-
|Grant permission on the Invoices module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating an Invoice'''
|
|-
|Let us expolore the various ways in which you can create an invoice. You can create an invoice from a commercial proposal that is in the "accepted" status by clicking on the appropriate button. Information available in the commercial proposal such as third party, payment terms and project are copied automatically into the invoice.
|Navigate to a commercial proposal and click on the create invoice button. Show the fields being pre-filled.
|-
|Similarly, you can create an invoice from a sales order that has been validated, from a purchase order, from a contract or subscription as well as from an intervention.
|Show the invoice creation button in a sales order, contract, and then intervention.
|-
|You can also create an invoice or credit note from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Supplier invoices can be created from a vendor proposal or purchase order. For more information on supplier invoices, please view the video about supplier invoices.
|Show the invoice creation button from a vendor proposal and the purchase order.
|-
|You can also create an invoice directly from the Billing and Payments tab. Choose the third party you are creating the invoice for.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Choose the invoice type. A down payment invoice is created when a down payment has been received. Replacement and credit note invoices can be created to replace or correct previously issued invoices, and they can only be issued from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab. Template invoices are a way to create recurring invoices, which we will cover later on in this video.
|Show the various invoice types in the combo button list.
|-
|Choose the invoice date, payment terms, payment type and bank account. If the module "Project" is enabled, you will be able to choose a project. Choose the currency and add any public or private notes.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Once the invoice is created, you can add products and services along with pricing information for the same. You can add multiple products and services. You can choose from existing products and services to pre-fill the pricing information.
|Add products or services and choose from pre-filled product or service during the second time.
|-
|Use the linked files menu to add any attachments to the invoice.
|Attach a file.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Invoice'''
|
|-
|Click on "Validate" to validate the invoice.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the invoice is ready to be sent to your customer. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Click on the PDF in section "Generated document" to show the PDF.
|-
|You can now use the "Send Email" button to send the invoice to your customer. Note that all the invoice details are automatically attached to the email.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details, show the email being sent.
|-
|'''Invoices - Module Features'''
|
|-
|Use the "Clone" button if you want to create a similar invoice in the future.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|If you have received payment for an invoice, click on the "Enter Payment" button to record the payment in the system. Choose the date, payment type and account to credit. Enter the transaction number and any comments. Enter the payment amount and confirm the payment. Note that if you received a partial payment, you will be able to enter a payment again. Once the full payment due for the invoice has been received and recorded, the invoice is automatically closed.
|Show multiple payments being entered and the invoice getting closed automatically once full payment has been received.
|-
|For invoice payment, you can also request a direct debit payment order, which can then be managed from the "Banks" menu under "Payment by direct debit".
|Show direct debit payment order.
|-
|If you receive only a partial payment for an invoice, and do not expect to receive the balance payment, use the appropriate button to record such a payment. Choose a reson and enter any notes. The invoice will be closed and will change into the "Paid" status.
|Show partial payment being recorded.
|-
|Invoices in the "Draft" status can be converted into a template invoice, which is a way for issuing recurring invoices. Provide a title for the invoice. Choose the frequency of recurrence in days, months or years. Choose the date for generating the first invoice, and enter the maximum number of invoices that are to be automatically generated. Based on these parameters, the system will automatically generate recurring invoices. Finally, choose whether the recurring invoices will be in the draft status or automatically in the validated status. If you choose draft status, you will need to issue the invoices manually by validating them after they are generated.
|Show the creation of recurring invoices as per the voice over.
|-
|You can view the list of invoices with the relevant payment status in the list view. You can also view the list based on invoice status such as Draft, Not Paid, Paid and Abandoned.
|Show the list view and the list views based on status.
|-
|Payments are available under the payments list view.
|Show the payments list view.
|-
|You can create reports for payments received on a monthly basis. The report is instantly available for download in the PDF format.
|Show report generation and show the PDF report.
|-
|Statistics gives a birds-eye-view of all customer invoices. You can filter the statistics based on the available parameters.
|Show statistics and one of the filters.
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to your invoices and you will be able to export your database of invoices and payments.
|Show custom field generation and the invoice creation screen where it is available.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Invoices and Payments

2020-07-19T15:01:38Z

Pradeepv:

'''Story board for Module Invoices and Payments:'''

'''Video Title:''' Invoices and Payments in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Invoices module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Invoices" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable the "Banks and Cash" module.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Financial Modules and enable the Invoices module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the "Banks and Cash" module.
|-
|-
|Grant permission on the Invoices module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating an Invoice'''
|
|-
|Let us expolore the various ways in which you can create an invoice. You can create an invoice from a commercial proposal that is in the "accepted" status by clicking on the appropriate button. Information available in the commercial proposal such as third party, payment terms and project are copied automatically into the invoice.
|Navigate to a commercial proposal and click on the create invoice button. Show the fields being pre-filled.
|-
|Similarly, you can create an invoice from a sales order that has been validated, from a purchase order, from a contract or subscription as well as from an intervention.
|Show the invoice creation button in a sales order, contract, and then intervention.
|-
|You can also create an invoice or credit note from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Supplier invoices can be created from a vendor proposal or purchase order. For more information on supplier invoices, please view the video about supplier invoices.
|Show the invoice creation button from a vendor proposal and the purchase order.
|-
|You can also create an invoice directly from the Billing and Payments tab. Choose the third party you are creating the invoice for.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Choose the invoice type. A down payment invoice is created when a down payment has been received. Replacement and credit note invoices can be created to replace or correct previously issued invoices, and they can only be issued from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab. Template invoices are a way to create recurring invoices, which we will cover later on in this video.
|Show the various invoice types in the combo button list.
|-
|Choose the invoice date, payment terms, payment type and bank account. If the module "Project" is enabled, you will be able to choose a project. Choose the currency and add any public or private notes.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Once the invoice is created, you can add products and services along with pricing information for the same. You can add multiple products and services. You can choose from existing products and services to pre-fill the pricing information.
|Add products or services and choose from pre-filled product or service during the second time.
|-
|Use the linked files menu to add any attachments to the invoice.
|Attach a file.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Invoice'''
|
|-
|Click on "Validate" to validate the invoice.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the invoice is ready to be sent to your customer. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Click on the PDF in section "Generated document" to show the PDF.
|-
|You can now use the "Send Email" button to send the invoice to your customer. Note that all the invoice details are automatically attached to the email.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details, show the email being sent.
|-
|'''Invoices - Module Features'''
|
|-
|Use the "Clone" button if you want to create a similar invoice in the future.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|If you have received payment for an invoice, click on the "Enter Payment" button to record the payment in the system. Choose the date, payment type and account to credit. Enter the transaction number and any comments. Enter the payment amount and confirm the payment. Note that if you received a partial payment, you will be able to enter a payment again. Once the full payment due for the invoice has been received and recorded, the invoice is automatically closed.
|Show multiple payments being entered and the invoice getting closed automatically once full payment has been received.
|-
|For invoice payment, you can also request a direct debit payment order, which can then be managed from the "Banks" menu under "Payment by direct debit".
|Show direct debit payment order.
|-
|If you receive only a partial payment for an invoice, and do not expect to receive the balance payment, use the appropriate button to record such a payment. Choose a reson and enter any notes. The invoice will be closed and will change into the "Paid" status.
|Show partial payment being recorded.
|-
|Invoices in the "Draft" status can be converted into a template invoice, which is a way for issuing recurring invoices. Provide a title for the invoice. Choose the frequency of recurrence in days, months or years. Choose the date for generating the first invoice, and enter the maximum number of invoices that are to be automatically generated. Based on these parameters, the system will automatically generate recurring invoices. Finally, choose whether the recurring invoices will be in the draft status or automatically in the validated status. If you choose draft status, you will need to issue the invoices manually by validating them after they are generated.
|Show the creation of recurring invoices as per the voice over.
|-
|You can view the list of invoices with the relevant payment status in the list view. You can also view the list based on invoice status such as Draft, Not Paid, Paid and Abandoned.
|Show the list view and the list views based on status.
|-
|Payments are available under the payments list view.
|Show the payments list view.
|-
|You can create reports for payments received on a monthly basis. The report is instantly available for download in the PDF format.
|Show report generation and show the PDF report.
|-
|Statistics gives a birds-eye-view of all customer invoices. You can filter the statistics based on the available parameters.
|Show statistics and one of the filters.
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to your invoices and you will be able to export your database of invoices and payments.
|Show custom field generation and the invoice creation screen where it is available.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Invoices and Payments

2020-07-19T15:00:57Z

Pradeepv:

'''Story board for Module Invoices and Payments:'''

'''Video Title:''' Invoices and Payments in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Invoices and Payments module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Invoices" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable the "Banks and Cash" module.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Financial Modules and enable the Invoices module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the "Banks and Cash" module.
|-
|-
|Grant permission on the Invoices module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating an Invoice'''
|
|-
|Let us expolore the various ways in which you can create an invoice. You can create an invoice from a commercial proposal that is in the "accepted" status by clicking on the appropriate button. Information available in the commercial proposal such as third party, payment terms and project are copied automatically into the invoice.
|Navigate to a commercial proposal and click on the create invoice button. Show the fields being pre-filled.
|-
|Similarly, you can create an invoice from a sales order that has been validated, from a purchase order, from a contract or subscription as well as from an intervention.
|Show the invoice creation button in a sales order, contract, and then intervention.
|-
|You can also create an invoice or credit note from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Supplier invoices can be created from a vendor proposal or purchase order. For more information on supplier invoices, please view the video about supplier invoices.
|Show the invoice creation button from a vendor proposal and the purchase order.
|-
|You can also create an invoice directly from the Billing and Payments tab. Choose the third party you are creating the invoice for.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Choose the invoice type. A down payment invoice is created when a down payment has been received. Replacement and credit note invoices can be created to replace or correct previously issued invoices, and they can only be issued from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab. Template invoices are a way to create recurring invoices, which we will cover later on in this video.
|Show the various invoice types in the combo button list.
|-
|Choose the invoice date, payment terms, payment type and bank account. If the module "Project" is enabled, you will be able to choose a project. Choose the currency and add any public or private notes.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Once the invoice is created, you can add products and services along with pricing information for the same. You can add multiple products and services. You can choose from existing products and services to pre-fill the pricing information.
|Add products or services and choose from pre-filled product or service during the second time.
|-
|Use the linked files menu to add any attachments to the invoice.
|Attach a file.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Invoice'''
|
|-
|Click on "Validate" to validate the invoice.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the invoice is ready to be sent to your customer. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Click on the PDF in section "Generated document" to show the PDF.
|-
|You can now use the "Send Email" button to send the invoice to your customer. Note that all the invoice details are automatically attached to the email.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details, show the email being sent.
|-
|'''Invoices - Module Features'''
|
|-
|Use the "Clone" button if you want to create a similar invoice in the future.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|If you have received payment for an invoice, click on the "Enter Payment" button to record the payment in the system. Choose the date, payment type and account to credit. Enter the transaction number and any comments. Enter the payment amount and confirm the payment. Note that if you received a partial payment, you will be able to enter a payment again. Once the full payment due for the invoice has been received and recorded, the invoice is automatically closed.
|Show multiple payments being entered and the invoice getting closed automatically once full payment has been received.
|-
|For invoice payment, you can also request a direct debit payment order, which can then be managed from the "Banks" menu under "Payment by direct debit".
|Show direct debit payment order.
|-
|If you receive only a partial payment for an invoice, and do not expect to receive the balance payment, use the appropriate button to record such a payment. Choose a reson and enter any notes. The invoice will be closed and will change into the "Paid" status.
|Show partial payment being recorded.
|-
|Invoices in the "Draft" status can be converted into a template invoice, which is a way for issuing recurring invoices. Provide a title for the invoice. Choose the frequency of recurrence in days, months or years. Choose the date for generating the first invoice, and enter the maximum number of invoices that are to be automatically generated. Based on these parameters, the system will automatically generate recurring invoices. Finally, choose whether the recurring invoices will be in the draft status or automatically in the validated status. If you choose draft status, you will need to issue the invoices manually by validating them after they are generated.
|Show the creation of recurring invoices as per the voice over.
|-
|You can view the list of invoices with the relevant payment status in the list view. You can also view the list based on invoice status such as Draft, Not Paid, Paid and Abandoned.
|Show the list view and the list views based on status.
|-
|Payments are available under the payments list view.
|Show the payments list view.
|-
|You can create reports for payments received on a monthly basis. The report is instantly available for download in the PDF format.
|Show report generation and show the PDF report.
|-
|Statistics gives a birds-eye-view of all customer invoices. You can filter the statistics based on the available parameters.
|Show statistics and one of the filters.
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to your invoices and you will be able to export your database of invoices and payments.
|Show custom field generation and the invoice creation screen where it is available.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Invoices and Payments

2020-07-19T14:59:15Z

Pradeepv: Added EN storyboard for Invoices and Payments

'''Story board for Module Invoices and Payments:'''

'''Video Title:''' Invoices and Payments in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Invoices and Payments module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Invoices" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You must also enable the "Banks and Cash" module.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to CRM and enable the Invoices module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the "Banks and Cash" module.
|-
|-
|Grant permission on the Invoices module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating an Invoice'''
|
|-
|Let us expolore the various ways in which you can create an invoice. You can create an invoice from a commercial proposal that is in the "accepted" status by clicking on the appropriate button. Information available in the commercial proposal such as third party, payment terms and project are copied automatically into the invoice.
|Navigate to a commercial proposal and click on the create invoice button. Show the fields being pre-filled.
|-
|Similarly, you can create an invoice from a sales order that has been validated, from a purchase order, from a contract or subscription as well as from an intervention.
|Show the invoice creation button in a sales order, contract, and then intervention.
|-
|You can also create an invoice or credit note from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Supplier invoices can be created from a vendor proposal or purchase order. For more information on supplier invoices, please view the video about supplier invoices.
|Show the invoice creation button from a vendor proposal and the purchase order.
|-
|You can also create an invoice directly from the Billing and Payments tab. Choose the third party you are creating the invoice for.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Choose the invoice type. A down payment invoice is created when a down payment has been received. Replacement and credit note invoices can be created to replace or correct previously issued invoices, and they can only be issued from a third party by navigating to the "Customer" tab. Template invoices are a way to create recurring invoices, which we will cover later on in this video.
|Show the various invoice types in the combo button list.
|-
|Choose the invoice date, payment terms, payment type and bank account. If the module "Project" is enabled, you will be able to choose a project. Choose the currency and add any public or private notes.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Once the invoice is created, you can add products and services along with pricing information for the same. You can add multiple products and services. You can choose from existing products and services to pre-fill the pricing information.
|Add products or services and choose from pre-filled product or service during the second time.
|-
|Use the linked files menu to add any attachments to the invoice.
|Attach a file.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Invoice'''
|
|-
|Click on "Validate" to validate the invoice.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the invoice is ready to be sent to your customer. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Click on the PDF in section "Generated document" to show the PDF.
|-
|You can now use the "Send Email" button to send the invoice to your customer. Note that all the invoice details are automatically attached to the email.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details, show the email being sent.
|-
|'''Invoices - Module Features'''
|
|-
|Use the "Clone" button if you want to create a similar invoice in the future.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|If you have received payment for an invoice, click on the "Enter Payment" button to record the payment in the system. Choose the date, payment type and account to credit. Enter the transaction number and any comments. Enter the payment amount and confirm the payment. Note that if you received a partial payment, you will be able to enter a payment again. Once the full payment due for the invoice has been received and recorded, the invoice is automatically closed.
|Show multiple payments being entered and the invoice getting closed automatically once full payment has been received.
|-
|For invoice payment, you can also request a direct debit payment order, which can then be managed from the "Banks" menu under "Payment by direct debit".
|Show direct debit payment order.
|-
|If you receive only a partial payment for an invoice, and do not expect to receive the balance payment, use the appropriate button to record such a payment. Choose a reson and enter any notes. The invoice will be closed and will change into the "Paid" status.
|Show partial payment being recorded.
|-
|Invoices in the "Draft" status can be converted into a template invoice, which is a way for issuing recurring invoices. Provide a title for the invoice. Choose the frequency of recurrence in days, months or years. Choose the date for generating the first invoice, and enter the maximum number of invoices that are to be automatically generated. Based on these parameters, the system will automatically generate recurring invoices. Finally, choose whether the recurring invoices will be in the draft status or automatically in the validated status. If you choose draft status, you will need to issue the invoices manually by validating them after they are generated.
|Show the creation of recurring invoices as per the voice over.
|-
|You can view the list of invoices with the relevant payment status in the list view. You can also view the list based on invoice status such as Draft, Not Paid, Paid and Abandoned.
|Show the list view and the list views based on status.
|-
|Payments are available under the payments list view.
|Show the payments list view.
|-
|You can create reports for payments received on a monthly basis. The report is instantly available for download in the PDF format.
|Show report generation and show the PDF report.
|-
|Statistics gives a birds-eye-view of all customer invoices. You can filter the statistics based on the available parameters.
|Show statistics and one of the filters.
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to your invoices and you will be able to export your database of invoices and payments.
|Show custom field generation and the invoice creation screen where it is available.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Third Parties (Customers, Suppliers, Partners)

2020-07-10T10:25:10Z

Pradeepv: Added FR and ES translations

{{TemplateAssoEn}}
{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

'''Story board for Module Third Parties:'''

'''Video Title:''' Third Parties in Dolibarr (Customers, Suppliers, Partners)
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Third Parties module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module Third Parties from the menu Home -> Setup -> Modules. Enable the module "Suppliers" as well.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Third Party module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the module "Suppliers".
|-
|Grant permission on the Third Parties module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Demo the permissions being granted for the third parties module.
|-
|'''Creating a Third Party'''
|
|-
|The "Third Parties" module allows you to manage your customers, prospects, suppliers or partners. Some pre-filtered lists are available to list prospects, customers and vendors. Note that a third party can appear in several of these lists.
|Show the list views.
|-
|Let's look at how to create a "Third party". Provide a name and an alias. Note that this is usually the name of the business entity. You can add multiple people under the third party when you add "contacts" in the next step. Choose whether the third party is a prospect, customer or vendor. Provide the address, contact details and social media handles. Choose the type and legal entity type. Upload a logo if required.
A customer or vendor code can be automatically or manually assigned for each new third-party, like the accounting code if the module "Double party accounting" is used.
Note that your third parties can also be easily imported using the Import module.
|Demo the third party creation process.
|-
|'''Third Parties - Module Features'''
|
|-
|Once the third party is created, you can navigate to the "Contacts" tab to add people who are representatives of the third party or an alternative address like another delivery address or the address of an accounting department.
|Show the contacts tab and demo creating a contact.
|-
|You can attach files such as documents and photos under the "Linked files" menu.
|Demo attaching a document under linked files menu.
|-
|If the module "Notification by Email" has been enabled, then in the "Notifications" tab, you can define people who must receive email notifications for specific Dolibarr events.
|Demo configuring a notification.
|-
|If duplicate entries have been created for a third party, use the "Merge" button to merge the entries.
|Show the merge button.
|-
|The tab "Payment information" can be used to enter bank information or electronic payment ID of your customers
|Show the list of contacts
|-
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the third-party, such as creation, update, invoicing, emails sent, phone calls, planned meetings etc.
|Show the list of events
|-
|More tabs and buttons will be added on the Third-party view, providing more features like by the module "Commercial proposal", "Orders" and "Invoice". Additional information about these features is available in the relevant video tutorials of these modules.
|
|-
|The "Contacts" list view shows all the contacts. The list view is separated into list of prospects, customers, vendors and others.
|Show the list of contacts
|-
|'''Tags and Grouping'''
|
|-
|You can create tags in order to group third parties. Tags maybe anything you want for grouping your customers such as sales region, type of customer, their importance such as VIP etc. Clicking on a tag will show all the third parties associated with it.
|Click and show the tag hierarchy tree. Click on a tag to view all third parties associated with the tag.
|-
|To associate tags with a third party, navigate to the third party record and click on "Modify". Input the tag names in the appropriate field.
Third-parties are one of the most important data of your company. If they are well qualified, it will be easy to use them with other modules to make your commercial proposals, orders, invoices, marketing emails, or to export them into CSV or Excel sheets with the module Export.
|Show adding multiple tags to a third party.
|-
|There is also a lot of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can also add your own custom fields to describe your customers or vendors, define default values or mandatory fields, and you can use the import or export module to load or export your third parties.
|
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}
'''Translation in French'''
 
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Translation'''
|-
|1
|Third Parties in Dolibarr (Customers, Suppliers, Partners)
|Tiers sur Dolibarr (clients, fournisseurs, partenaires)
|-
|2
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Third Parties module in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenue à ce tutoriel vidéo sur le système ERP et CRM de Dolibarr. Dans cette vidéo, nous allons voir comment utiliser le module Tiers sur Dolibarr.
|-
|'''3'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|'''Prérequis'''
|-
|4
|Activate the module Third Parties from the menu Home -> Setup -> Modules. Enable the module "Suppliers" as well.
|Activez le module Tiers dans le menu Accueil -> Configuration -> Modules. Activez également le module "Fournisseurs".
|-
|5
|Grant permission on the Third Parties module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Donnez des autorisations à vos utilisateurs sur le module Tiers. Pour des informations plus détaillées sur la manière de configurer les autorisations pour les utilisateurs, vous pouvez regarder notre vidéo "Utilisateurs, groupes et autorisations".
|-
|'''6'''
|'''Creating a Third Party'''
|'''Création d'un tiers'''
|-
|7
|The "Third Parties" module allows you to manage your customers, prospects, suppliers or partners. Some pre-filtered lists are available to list prospects, customers and vendors.
|Le module "Tiers" vous permet de gérer vos clients, prospects, fournisseurs ou partenaires. Certaines listes pré-filtrées sont disponibles pour répertorier les prospects, les clients et les fournisseurs.
|-
|8
|Note that a third party can appear in several of these lists.
|Notez qu'un tiers peut figurer dans plusieurs de ces listes.
|-
|9
|Let's look at how to create a "Third party". Provide a name and an alias. Note that this is usually the name of the business entity.
|Voyons comment créer un "tiers". Fournissez un nom et un pseudonyme. Notez qu'il s'agit généralement du nom de l'entreprise.
|-
|10
|You can add multiple people under the third party when you add "contacts" in the next step. Choose whether the third party is a prospect, customer or vendor.
|Vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs personnes sous le tiers lorsque vous ajoutez des "contacts" à l'étape suivante. Choisissez si le tiers est un prospect, un client ou un vendeur.
|-
|11
|Provide the address, contact details and social media handles. Choose the type and legal entity type. Upload a logo if required.
|Indiquez son adresse, ses coordonnées et ses pseudonymes dans les médias sociaux. Choisissez le type et le type d'entité juridique. Uploadez un logo si nécessaire.
|-
|12
|A customer or vendor code can be automatically or manually assigned for each new third-party, like the accounting code if the module "Double party accounting" is used. Note that your third parties can also be easily imported using the Import module.
|Un code client ou fournisseur peut être attribué automatiquement ou manuellement pour chaque nouveau tiers, comme le code de comptabilité si le module "Comptabilité double partie" est utilisé. Notez que vos tiers peuvent également être facilement importés à l'aide du module "Importer".
|-
|'''13'''
|'''Third Parties - Module Features'''
|'''Tiers - Caractéristiques du module'''
|-
|14
|Once the third party is created, you can navigate to the "Contacts" tab to add people who are representatives of the third party or an alternative address like another delivery address or the address of an accounting department.
|Une fois le tiers créé, vous pouvez naviguer dans l'onglet "Contacts" pour ajouter des personnes qui sont des représentants du tiers ou une adresse alternative comme une autre adresse de livraison ou l'adresse d'un service comptable.
|-
|15
|You can attach files such as documents and photos under the "Linked files" menu.
|Vous pouvez joindre des fichiers tels que des documents et des photos sous le menu "Fichiers liés".
|-
|16
|If the module "Notification by Email" has been enabled, then in the "Notifications" tab, you can define people who must receive email notifications for specific Dolibarr events.
|Si le module "Notification par email" a été activé, alors dans l'onglet "Notifications", vous pouvez définir les personnes qui doivent recevoir des notifications par email pour des événements Dolibarr spécifiques.
|-
|17
|If duplicate entries have been created for a third party, use the "Merge" button to merge the entries.
|Si des entrées en double ont été créées pour un tiers, utilisez le bouton "Fusionner" pour fusionner les entrées.
|-
|18
|The tab "Payment information" can be used to enter bank information or electronic payment ID of your customers
|L'onglet "Informations de paiement" peut être utilisé pour saisir les informations bancaires ou l'identifiant de paiement électronique de vos clients
|-
|19
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the third-party, such as creation, update, invoicing, emails sent, phone calls, planned meetings etc.
|L'onglet "Événements ou agenda" vous donnera une liste complète de tous les événements passés et à venir liés au tiers, tels que la création, la mise à jour, la facturation, les e-mails envoyés, les appels téléphoniques, les réunions prévues, etc.
|-
|20
|More tabs and buttons will be added on the Third-party view, providing more features like by the module "Commercial proposal", "Orders" and "Invoice". Additional information about these features is available in the relevant video tutorials of these modules.
|D'autres onglets et boutons seront ajoutés à la page Tiers, offrant plus de fonctionnalités comme par exemple le module "Proposition commerciale", "Commandes" et "Facture". Des informations supplémentaires sur ces fonctionnalités sont disponibles dans les tutoriels vidéo correspondants de ces modules.
|-
|21
|The "Contacts" list view shows all the contacts. The list view is separated into list of prospects, customers, vendors and others.
|La page "Contacts" affiche la liste de tous les contacts. La page de liste est divisée en liste de prospects, de clients, de fournisseurs et autres.
|-
|'''22'''
|'''Tags and Grouping'''
|'''Tags et regroupement'''
|-
|23
|You can create tags in order to group third parties. Tags maybe anything you want for grouping your customers such as sales region, type of customer, their importance such as VIP etc. Clicking on a tag will show all the third parties associated with it.
|Vous pouvez créer des tags afin de regrouper des tiers. Les tags peuvent être n'importe quoi pour regrouper vos clients comme la région de vente, le type de client, leur importance comme VIP etc. En cliquant sur un tag, vous verrez tous les tiers qui y sont associés.
|-
|24
|To associate tags with a third party, navigate to the third party record and click on "Modify". Input the tag names in the appropriate field.
|Pour associer des tags à un tiers, naviguez jusqu'à l'enregistrement du tiers et cliquez sur "Modifier". Saisissez les noms des tags dans le champ approprié.
|-
|25
|Third-parties are one of the most important data of your company. If they are well qualified, it will be easy to use them with other modules to make your commercial proposals, orders, invoices, marketing emails, or to export them into CSV or Excel sheets with the module Export.
|Les tiers sont l'une des données les plus importantes de votre entreprise. Si elles sont bien qualifiées, il sera facile de les utiliser avec d'autres modules pour faire vos propositions commerciales, commandes, factures, e-mails marketing, ou de les exporter en CSV ou en feuilles Excel avec le module Exporter.
|-
|26
|There is also a lot of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can also add your own custom fields to describe your customers or vendors, define default values or mandatory fields, and you can use the import or export module to load or export your third parties.
|De nombreuses autres fonctionnalités peuvent également être activées à partir de la configuration. De plus, comme la plupart des modules de Dolibarr, vous pouvez aussi ajouter vos propres champs personnalisés pour décrire vos clients ou fournisseurs, définir des valeurs par défaut ou des champs obligatoires, et vous pouvez utiliser le module d'importation ou d'exportation pour importer ou exporter vos tiers.
|-
|27
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Merci pour avoir regardé ce tutoriel vidéo. Visitez www.dolibarr.org pour en savoir plus.
|}

'''Translation in Spanish'''

{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Translation'''
|-
|1
|Third Parties in Dolibarr (Customers, Suppliers, Partners)
|Terceros en Dolibarr (Clientes, Proveedores, Socios)
|-
|2
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Third Parties module in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenido a este video tutorial sobre el sistema ERP y CRM Dolibarr. En este vídeo, veremos cómo utilizar el módulo Terceros en Dolibarr.
|-
|'''3'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|Requisitos previos
|-
|4
|Activate the module Third Parties from the menu Home -> Setup -> Modules. Enable the module "Suppliers" as well.
|Activar el módulo Terceros desde el menú Inicio -> Configuración -> Módulos. Activa también el módulo "Proveedores".
|-
|5
|Grant permission on the Third Parties module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Concede permiso al módulo "Terceros" para tus usuarios. Para obtener información más avanzada sobre cómo configurar los permisos de los usuarios, puedes ver nuestro video "Usuarios, Grupos y Permisos"
|-
|'''6'''
|'''Creating a Third Party'''
|Creación de un Tercero
|-
|7
|The "Third Parties" module allows you to manage your customers, prospects, suppliers or partners. Some pre-filtered lists are available to list prospects, customers and vendors.
|El módulo "Terceros" te permite gestionar tus clientes, clientes potenciales, proveedores o socios. Algunas listas prefiltradas están disponibles para listar clientes potenciales, clientes y proveedores.
|-
|8
|Note that a third party can appear in several of these lists.
|Ten en cuenta que un tercero puede aparecer en varias de estas listas.
|-
|9
|Let's look at how to create a "Third party". Provide a name and an alias. Note that this is usually the name of the business entity.
|Veamos cómo crear un "Tercero". Proporciona un nombre y un alias. Ten en cuenta que éste suele ser el nombre de la entidad comercial.
|-
|10
|You can add multiple people under the third party when you add "contacts" in the next step. Choose whether the third party is a prospect, customer or vendor.
|Puedes añadir varias personas a un tercero cuando añadas "contactos" en el siguiente paso. Elige si el tercero es un cliente potencial, un cliente o un proveedor.
|-
|11
|Provide the address, contact details and social media handles. Choose the type and legal entity type. Upload a logo if required.
|Introduzce la dirección, los datos de contacto y los datos de las redes sociales. Escoge el tipo y el tipo de entidad legal. Sube un logotipo si es necesario.
|-
|12
|A customer or vendor code can be automatically or manually assigned for each new third-party, like the accounting code if the module "Double party accounting" is used. Note that your third parties can also be easily imported using the Import module.
|Se puede asignar un código de cliente o proveedor de forma automática o manual para cada nuevo tercero, como el código de contabilidad si se utiliza el módulo "Contabilidad (Doble Partida)". Ten en cuenta que sus terceros también pueden ser importados fácilmente utilizando el módulo "Importación de Datos".
|-
|'''13'''
|'''Third Parties - Module Features'''
|Terceros - Características del Módulo
|-
|14
|Once the third party is created, you can navigate to the "Contacts" tab to add people who are representatives of the third party or an alternative address like another delivery address or the address of an accounting department.
|Una vez creado el tercero, puedes navegar a la pestaña "Contactos" para añadir personas que sean representantes del tercero, o una dirección alternativa como otra dirección de entrega o la dirección de un departamento de contabilidad.
|-
|15
|You can attach files such as documents and photos under the "Linked files" menu.
|Puedes adjuntar archivos como documentos y fotos en el menú "Archivos vinculados".
|-
|16
|If the module "Notification by Email" has been enabled, then in the "Notifications" tab, you can define people who must receive email notifications for specific Dolibarr events.
|Si el módulo "Notificación Sobre Eventos" ha sido activado, entonces en la pestaña "Notificaciones", se pueden definir las personas que deben recibir las notificaciones por correo electrónico para los eventos específicos de Dolibarr.
|-
|17
|If duplicate entries have been created for a third party, use the "Merge" button to merge the entries.
|Si se han creado entradas duplicadas para un tercero, utiliza el botón "Fusión" para fusionar las entradas.
|-
|18
|The tab "Payment information" can be used to enter bank information or electronic payment ID of your customers
|La pestaña "Información del pago" puede utilizarse para introducir la información bancaria o el ID de pago electrónico de sus clientes
|-
|19
|The "Events or Agenda" tab will give you a complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the third-party, such as creation, update, invoicing, emails sent, phone calls, planned meetings etc.
|La pestaña "Eventos/Agenda" te dará una lista completa de todos los eventos pasados y futuros relacionados con el tercero, como la creación, actualización, facturación, correos electrónicos enviados, llamadas telefónicas, reuniones planificadas, etc.
|-
|20
|More tabs and buttons will be added on the Third-party view, providing more features like by the module "Commercial proposal", "Orders" and "Invoice". Additional information about these features is available in the relevant video tutorials of these modules.
|Se añadirán más pestañas y botones en la vista de terceros, proporcionando más características como por ejemplo por el módulo "Presupuestos", "Pedidos" y "Factura". Se puede obtener información adicional sobre estas características en los correspondientes videotutoriales de estos módulos.
|-
|21
|The "Contacts" list view shows all the contacts. The list view is separated into list of prospects, customers, vendors and others.
|La vista de lista de "Contactos/Direcciones" muestra todos los contactos. La vista de lista está separada en la lista de prospectos, clientes, proveedores y otros.
|-
|'''22'''
|'''Tags and Grouping'''
|Etiquetas y Grupos
|-
|23
|You can create tags in order to group third parties. Tags maybe anything you want for grouping your customers such as sales region, type of customer, their importance such as VIP etc. Clicking on a tag will show all the third parties associated with it.
|Puedes crear etiquetas para agrupar a terceros. Etiquetas que pueden ser cualquier cosa que quieras para agrupar a tus clientes como la región de ventas, el tipo de cliente, su importancia como VIP, etc. Al hacer clic en una etiqueta se mostrarán todos los terceros asociados a ella.
|-
|24
|To associate tags with a third party, navigate to the third party record and click on "Modify". Input the tag names in the appropriate field.
|Para asociar etiquetas con un tercero, navega al registro de terceros y haz clic en "Modificar". Introduce los nombres de las etiquetas en el campo correspondiente.
|-
|25
|Third-parties are one of the most important data of your company. If they are well qualified, it will be easy to use them with other modules to make your commercial proposals, orders, invoices, marketing emails, or to export them into CSV or Excel sheets with the module Export.
|Los terceros son uno de los datos más importantes de su empresa. Si están bien clasificados, será fácil utilizarlos con otros módulos para hacer tus propuestas comerciales, pedidos, facturas, correos electrónicos de marketing, o para exportarlos a hojas CSV o Excel con el módulo Exportaciones de Datos.
|-
|26
|There is also a lot of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can also add your own custom fields to describe your customers or vendors, define default values or mandatory fields, and you can use the import or export module to load or export your third parties.
|También hay muchas otras características que pueden ser habilitadas desde la configuración. Además, como la mayoría de los módulos de Dolibarr, también puedes añadir tus propios campos personalizados para describir a tus clientes o proveedores, definir valores por defecto o campos obligatorios, y puedes utilizar el módulo de importación o exportación para cargar o exportar tus terceros.
|-
|27
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Gracias por ver este video tutorial. Visita www.dolibarr.org para obtener más información.
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Products and Services

2020-07-10T10:22:35Z

Pradeepv: Added FR and ES translations

{{TemplateAssoEn}}
{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

'''Story board for Module Products and Services:'''

'''Video Title:''' Products and Services in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Products and Services module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module Products from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You also need to activate the module Services. You can also activate the module "Variant" if you need to define variants like color and size for products like shirts.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Products module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the module "Services" and "Variant".
|-
|Grant permission on the Products and Services modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Product or Service'''
|
|-
|Products are material goods that you stock and sell to your customers or buy from your suppliers. Services are offerings provided to customers that can be realized without stocking or shipment.
|Show the list views or products and services.
|-
|Let's create a product. Provide a reference number and label for the product. Choose whether the product is for sale or purchase. Specify if you will be using lot or serial numbers.
|Demo product creation.
|-
|If you use barcodes, then choose a barcode type and enter the barcode. Provide a description. Choose a default warehouse where the product is usually stocked. Specify a stock limit if you want to be notified when the stock limit is reached. Specify the desired quantity you want to get when doing automatic replenishment.
|Demo product creation.
|-
|Input other aspects of your product such as weight and dimensions in the case of products. Set pricing and tax details. Finally, choose the appropriate accounting codes and click on "Create" to add the product.
|Demo product creation.
|-
|Similarly, you can create a service from the appropriate menu. A service differs from a product such that it cannot be stocked or shipped. Also, attributes specific to products such as weight, dimensions and commodity code are not available for services.
|Demo service creation.
|-
|'''Products and Services - Module Features'''
|
|-
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar product or service without having to re-enter all the information.
|Show the clone button.
|-
|Use the tab "Selling prices" if the product is "On sale" or "Buying prices" if the product is "On Purchase". For selling price, you can setup the application to have 1 selling price, 1 selling price per segment of customers or 1 selling price for each customer. For buying price, you can define different prices for each supplier too.
|Show the tab "Selling prices" or "Buying prices"
|-
|If the module "Variant" is enabled, you can define variants like color and size for products like shirts. You can also define a relative price or weight impact for the variant when compared to the price and weight of the main product.
|Create a variant of a product.
|-
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the product or service is performing by tracking the proposals, sales orders, purchase orders, invoices and contracts.
|Show the statistics and graphs.
|-
|You can create tags in order to group products or services such as quality, limited edition etc. Clicking on a tag will show all the products or services associated with it.
|Show tags and products grouped based on tags.
|-
|Warehouses are locations where products are received at or stocked and shipped from.
|Show the list of warehouses.
|-
|Stock movements and mass stock transfer can also be tracked and recorded.
|Show mass stock transfer. Click on record transfer and demo the feature.
|-
|"Replenishment" is a list of all products having stock that is lower than the desired stock. Choose a product by ticking the checkbox in order to create a purchase order to fill the difference. The complete process for creating purchase orders is presented in the respective video about Purchase Orders.
|Demo the replenishment feature.
|-
|You can also add and track shipments and deliveries for the products.
|Show the shipment list view.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup like if you need to manage virtual products or kits. Also, like most other Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your product, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the import or export modules to import or export your product database.
|
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}
'''Translation in French'''
 
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''English Text'''
|'''Translation'''
|-
|1
|Products and Services in Dolibarr
|Produits et services sur Dolibarr
|-
|2
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Products and Services module in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenue à ce tutoriel vidéo sur le système ERP et CRM de Dolibarr. Dans cette vidéo, nous allons voir comment utiliser le module Produits et Services sur Dolibarr.
|-
|'''3'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|'''Prérequis'''
|-
|4
|Activate the module Products from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You also need to activate the module Services. You can also activate the module "Variant" if you need to define variants like color and size for products like shirts.
|Activez le module Produits à partir du menu Accueil - Configuration - Modules. Vous devez également activer le module Services. Vous pouvez également activer le module "Variante" si vous avez besoin de définir des variantes comme la couleur et la taille pour des produits comme les chemises.
|-
|5
|Grant permission on the Products and Services modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Donnez des autorisations à vos utilisateurs sur les modules Produits et Services. Pour plus d'informations sur la façon de configurer les autorisations pour les utilisateurs, vous pouvez regarder notre vidéo "Utilisateurs, groupes et autorisations".
|-
|'''6'''
|'''Creating a Product or Service'''
|'''Créer un produit ou un service'''
|-
|7
|Products are material goods that you stock and sell to your customers or buy from your suppliers.
|Les produits sont des biens matériels que vous stockez et vendez à vos clients ou achetez auprès de vos fournisseurs.
|-
|8
|Services are offerings provided to customers that can be realized without stocking or shipment.
|Les services sont des offres fournies aux clients qui peuvent être réalisées sans stockage ni expédition.
|-
|9
|Let's create a product. Provide a reference number and label for the product.
|Créons un produit. Donnez un numéro de référence et une étiquette pour le produit.
|-
|10
|Choose whether the product is for sale or purchase. Specify if you will be using lot or serial numbers.
|Choisissez si le produit est à vendre ou à acheter. Précisez si vous utiliserez des numéros de lot ou de série.
|-
|11
|If you use barcodes, then choose a barcode type and enter the barcode.
|Si vous utilisez des codes-barres, choisissez un type de code-barres et entrez le code-barres.
|-
|12
|Provide a description.
|Fournissez une description.
|-
|13
|Choose a default warehouse where the product is usually stocked.
|Choisissez un entrepôt par défaut où le produit est habituellement stocké.
|-
|14
|Specify a stock limit if you want to be notified when the stock limit is reached.
|Précisez une limite de stock si vous souhaitez être notifié lorsque la limite de stock est atteinte.
|-
|15
|Specify the desired quantity you want to get when doing automatic replenishment.
|Indiquez la quantité souhaitée que vous souhaitez obtenir lors du réapprovisionnement automatique.
|-
|16
|Input other aspects of your product such as weight and dimensions in the case of products.
|Saisissez d'autres aspects de votre produit tels que le poids et les dimensions dans le cas des produits.
|-
|17
|Set pricing and tax details. Finally, choose the appropriate accounting codes and click on "Create" to add the product.
|Définissez les détails relatifs à la tarification et aux taxes. Enfin, choisissez les codes comptables appropriés et cliquez sur "Créer" pour ajouter le produit.
|-
|18
|Similarly, you can create a service from the appropriate menu. A service differs from a product such that it cannot be stocked or shipped. Also, attributes specific to products such as weight, dimensions and commodity code are not available for services.
|De même, vous pouvez créer un service à partir du menu approprié. Un service diffère d'un produit dans la mesure où il ne peut être stocké ou expédié. De plus, les attributs spécifiques aux produits tels que le poids, les dimensions et le code de marchandise ne sont pas disponibles pour les services.
|-
|'''19'''
|'''Products and Services - Module Features'''
|'''Produits et services - Caractéristiques du module'''
|-
|20
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar product or service without having to re-enter all the information.
|Utilisez le bouton "Cloner" pour créer un produit ou un service similaire sans avoir à saisir à nouveau toutes les informations.
|-
|21
|Use the tab "Selling prices" if the product is "On sale" or "Buying prices" if the product is "On Purchase". For selling price, you can setup the application to have 1 selling price, 1 selling price per segment of customers or 1 selling price for each customer.
|Utilisez l'onglet "Prix de vente" si le produit est "En vente" ou "Prix d'achat" si le produit est "En achat". Pour le prix de vente, vous pouvez configurer l'application pour avoir 1 prix de vente, 1 prix de vente par segment de clients ou 1 prix de vente pour chaque client.
|-
|22
|For buying price, you can define different prices for each supplier too.
|Pour le prix d'achat, vous pouvez également définir des prix différents pour chaque fournisseur.
|-
|23
|If the module "Variant" is enabled, you can define variants like color and size for products like shirts.
|Si le module "Variante" est activé, vous pouvez définir des variantes telles que la couleur et la taille pour des produits comme les chemises.
|-
|24
|You can also define a relative price or weight impact for the variant when compared to the price and weight of the main product.
|Vous pouvez également définir un prix relatif ou un impact de poids pour la variante par rapport au prix et au poids du produit principal.
|-
|25
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the product or service is performing by tracking the proposals, sales orders, purchase orders, invoices and contracts.
|Le module "Statistiques" donne une vue d'ensemble de la performance du produit ou du service en suivant les propositions, les commandes, les bons de commande, les factures et les contrats.
|-
|26
|You can create tags in order to group products or services such as quality, limited edition etc. Clicking on a tag will show all the products or services associated with it.
|Vous pouvez créer des tags afin de regrouper des produits ou des services tels que la qualité, l'édition limitée, etc. En cliquant sur un tag, tous les produits ou services qui lui sont associés s'affichent.
|-
|27
|Warehouses are locations where products are received at or stocked and shipped from.
|Les entrepôts sont des lieux où les produits sont reçus ou stockés et d'où ils sont expédiés.
|-
|28
|Stock movements and mass stock transfer can also be tracked and recorded.
|Les mouvements de stock et les transferts de stock en masse peuvent également être suivis et enregistrés.
|-
|29
|"Replenishment" is a list of all products having stock that is lower than the desired stock. Choose a product by ticking the checkbox in order to create a purchase order to fill the difference. The complete process for creating purchase orders is presented in the respective video about Purchase Orders.
|Le module "réapprovisionnement" est une liste de tous les produits dont le stock est inférieur au stock souhaité. Choisissez un produit en cochant la case afin de créer un bon de commande pour combler la différence. Le processus complet de création de bons de commande est présenté dans la vidéo correspondante sur les bons de commande.
|-
|30
|You can also add and track shipments and deliveries for the products.
|Vous pouvez également ajouter et suivre les expéditions et les livraisons des produits.
|-
|31
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup like if you need to manage virtual products or kits. Also, like most other Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your product, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the import or export modules to import or export your product database.
|De nombreuses autres fonctionnalités peuvent être activées depuis la configuration, par exemple si vous avez besoin de gérer des produits ou des kits virtuels. De plus, comme la plupart des autres modules de Dolibarr, vous pouvez ajouter vos propres champs personnalisés pour décrire votre produit, définir des valeurs par défaut ou des champs obligatoires et vous pouvez utiliser les modules d'importation ou d'exportation pour importer ou exporter votre base de données de produits.
|-
|32
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Merci pour avoir regardé ce tutoriel vidéo. Visitez le site www.dolibarr.org pour en savoir plus.
|}

'''Translation in Spanish'''
 
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''English Text'''
|'''Translation'''
|-
|1
|Products and Services in Dolibarr
|Productos y Servicios en Dolibarr
|-
|2
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Products and Services module in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenido a este video tutorial sobre el sistema ERP y CRM Dolibarr. En este vídeo, veremos cómo utilizar el módulo Productos y Servicios de Dolibarr.
|-
|'''3'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|Requisitos previos
|-
|4
|Activate the module Products from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You also need to activate the module Services. You can also activate the module "Variant" if you need to define variants like color and size for products like shirts.
|Activar el módulo Productos desde el menú Inicio - Configuración - Módulos. También necesitas activar el módulo Servicios. También puedes activar el módulo "Variantes de Productos" si necesitas definir variantes como el color y la talla para productos como las camisas.
|-
|5
|Grant permission on the Products and Services modules for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Concede el permiso para los módulos de Productos y Servicios para tus usuarios. Para obtener información más avanzada sobre cómo configurar los permisos de los usuarios, puede ver nuestro video "Usuarios, Grupos y Permisos".
|-
|'''6'''
|'''Creating a Product or Service'''
|Creación de un Producto o Servicio
|-
|7
|Products are material goods that you stock and sell to your customers or buy from your suppliers.
|Los productos son bienes materiales que se almacenan y se venden a los clientes o se compran a los proveedores.
|-
|8
|Services are offerings provided to customers that can be realized without stocking or shipment.
|Los servicios son ofertas a los clientes que pueden realizarse sin almacenamiento o envío.
|-
|9
|Let's create a product. Provide a reference number and label for the product.
|Vamos a crear un producto. Ponga un número de referencia y una etiqueta para el producto.
|-
|10
|Choose whether the product is for sale or purchase. Specify if you will be using lot or serial numbers.
|Selecciona si el producto está en venta o en compra. Especifica si utilizarás números de lote o de serie.
|-
|11
|If you use barcodes, then choose a barcode type and enter the barcode.
|Si usas códigos de barras, elige un tipo de código de barras e introduce el código de barras.
|-
|12
|Provide a description.
|Proporciona una descripción.
|-
|13
|Choose a default warehouse where the product is usually stocked.
|Elige un almacén predeterminado en el que se almacene normalmente el producto.
|-
|14
|Specify a stock limit if you want to be notified when the stock limit is reached.
|Defina un límite de existencias si desea que se le notifique cuando se alcance el límite de existencias.
|-
|15
|Specify the desired quantity you want to get when doing automatic replenishment.
|Especifica la cantidad deseada que deseas obtener al hacer el reaprovisionamiento automático.
|-
|16
|Input other aspects of your product such as weight and dimensions in the case of products.
|Introduce otros aspectos de tu producto como el peso y las dimensiones en el caso de los productos.
|-
|17
|Set pricing and tax details. Finally, choose the appropriate accounting codes and click on "Create" to add the product.
|Establece los detalles de precios e impuestos. Finalmente, selecciona los códigos de contabilidad apropiados y haz clic en "Crear" para añadir el producto.
|-
|18
|Similarly, you can create a service from the appropriate menu. A service differs from a product such that it cannot be stocked or shipped. Also, attributes specific to products such as weight, dimensions and commodity code are not available for services.
|Del mismo modo, puedes crear un servicio desde el menú apropiado. Un servicio difiere de un producto en que no puede ser almacenado o enviado. Además, los atributos específicos de los productos, como el peso, las dimensiones y el código de producto, no están disponibles para los servicios.
|-
|'''19'''
|'''Products and Services - Module Features'''
|Productos y servicios - Características del Módulo
|-
|20
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar product or service without having to re-enter all the information.
|Utiliza el botón "Clonar" para crear un producto o servicio similar sin tener que volver a introducir toda la información.
|-
|21
|Use the tab "Selling prices" if the product is "On sale" or "Buying prices" if the product is "On Purchase". For selling price, you can setup the application to have 1 selling price, 1 selling price per segment of customers or 1 selling price for each customer.
|Utiliza la pestaña "Precios de venta" si el producto está "En venta" o "Precios de compra" si el producto está "En compra". Para el precio de venta, puedes configurar la aplicación para que tenga un precio de venta, un precio de venta para cada segmento de clientes o un precio de venta para cada cliente.
|-
|22
|For buying price, you can define different prices for each supplier too.
|Para el precio de compra, también puedes definir diferentes precios para cada proveedor.
|-
|23
|If the module "Variant" is enabled, you can define variants like color and size for products like shirts.
|Si el módulo "Variantes de Productos" está activado, puedes definir variantes como el color y la talla para productos como camisas.
|-
|24
|You can also define a relative price or weight impact for the variant when compared to the price and weight of the main product.
|También puedes definir un precio relativo o impacto de peso para la variante cuando se compara con el precio y el peso del producto principal.
|-
|25
|"Statistics" gives a bird eye view of how the product or service is performing by tracking the proposals, sales orders, purchase orders, invoices and contracts.
|"Estadísticas" ofrece una visión general del rendimiento del producto o servicio mediante el seguimiento de las propuestas, pedidos de venta, pedidos de compra, facturas y contratos.
|-
|26
|You can create tags in order to group products or services such as quality, limited edition etc. Clicking on a tag will show all the products or services associated with it.
|Se pueden crear etiquetas para agrupar productos o servicios como calidad, edición limitada, etc. Al hacer clic en una etiqueta se mostrarán todos los productos o servicios asociados a ella.
|-
|27
|Warehouses are locations where products are received at or stocked and shipped from.
|Los almacenes son lugares donde se reciben o almacenan los productos y desde donde se envían.
|-
|28
|Stock movements and mass stock transfer can also be tracked and recorded.
|Los movimientos de existencias y el traslado masivo de existencias también pueden ser controlados y registrados.
|-
|29
|"Replenishment" is a list of all products having stock that is lower than the desired stock. Choose a product by ticking the checkbox in order to create a purchase order to fill the difference. The complete process for creating purchase orders is presented in the respective video about Purchase Orders.
|"Reabastecimiento" es una lista de todos los productos que tienen existencias inferiores a las deseadas. Selecciona un producto marcando la casilla de verificación para crear un pedido de compra que complete la diferencia. El proceso completo de creación de pedidos de compra se explica en el vídeo correspondiente sobre los pedidos de compra.
|-
|30
|You can also add and track shipments and deliveries for the products.
|También puedes añadir y hacer un seguimiento de los envíos y entregas de los productos.
|-
|31
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup like if you need to manage virtual products or kits. Also, like most other Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your product, define default values or mandatory fields and you can use the import or export modules to import or export your product database.
|También hay muchas otras características que pueden ser activadas desde la configuración, como por ejemplo si necesitas gestionar productos o kits virtuales. Además, como la mayoría de los otros módulos de Dolibarr, es posible añadir tus propios campos personalizados para describir su producto, definir valores por defecto o campos obligatorios y puedes utilizar los módulos de importación o exportación para importar o exportar tu base de datos de productos.
|-
|32
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Gracias por ver este video tutorial. Visita www.dolibarr.org para obtener más información.
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Commercial proposals, Quotes

2020-07-10T10:18:25Z

Pradeepv: Added FR and ES translations

{{TemplateAssoEn}}
{{Draft}}
[[Category:Video]]

'''Story board for Module Commercial Proposals:'''

'''Video Title:''' Commercial Proposals, Quotes in Dolibarr
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Commercial Proposals module in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module "Proposals" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You can also enable the "Vendor Commercial Proposals" module if you are going to deal with proposals for vendors.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to CRM and enable the Proposals module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the "Vendor Commercial Proposals" module.
|-
|-
|Grant permission on the Proposals module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Commercial Proposal'''
|
|-
|Let's create a new commercial proposal. Choose the customer you are creating the proposal for.
|Click on New Proposal. Choose the customer.
|-
|Choose the validity in number of days. Choose the payment terms, payment type and source. All the values of these combo lists can customized from the setup of the module.
|Choose validity, payment terms, payment type and source.
|-
|Set the availability delay, shipping method and delivery date. If the module Project is enabled, you can also select a project. Choose the currency.
|Perform the actions as in the voice over.
|-
|Provide any notes that will be visible in the proposal, as well as any private notes that will by visible only to you.
|Add notes.
|-
|Once created, the proposal is in the draft status. You can now start adding the actual product and pricing information to it.
|Click create.
|-
|Add the product or service name along with a description. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount.
You can add multiple items to the proposal.
|Add a service offering to the proposal.
|-
|Use the Contacts or addresses tab if you want to assign particular contacts to the proposal. This information can be filled automatically with default contacts and can be used on the generated PDF or ODT document.
|Show adding a contact/address
|-
|Use the linked files section to add any attachments to the proposal.
|Upload a file to the proposal.
|-
|'''Validating and Sending the Proposal'''
|
|-
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the proposal and move it to the "Open" status.
|Click on Validate.
|-
|Now, the proposal is ready to be sent to your customer or vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Click on the PDF in section "Generated document" to show the PDF.
|-
|Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the proposal are automatically included.
|Click on Send Email and fill in the receiver details, show the email being sent.
|-
|Based on the response received from your customer or vendor, you can set the proposal to the "Accepted" or "Refused" status.
|Show updating the status of the proposal.
|-
|'''Commercial Proposal - Module Features'''
|
|-
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar proposal with all the details pre-filled, for example, to create another version of the proposal.
|Show the Clone button.
|-
|Depending on your workflow, you can convert your proposal into an order or directly into an invoice.
|Show "Create order" and "Create invoice" button.
|-
|Statistics gives a birds eye view of all the commercial proposals sent to your customers and vendors. Use the filters available to get more detailed statistics.
|Show statistics. Demo the filters.
|-
|With the list views, you can view proposals based on their status such as Draft, Open, Accepted or Signed (which needs billing), Rejected or Not signed, and Billed.
|Show the list views
|-
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to describe your proposals and you will be able to export your database of proposals.
|
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}
'''Translation in French'''
 
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''English Text'''
|'''Translation'''
|-
|1
|Commercial Proposals and Quotes in Dolibarr
|Propositions et devis commerciaux sur Dolibarr
|-
|2
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Commercial Proposals module in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenue à ce tutoriel vidéo sur le système ERP et CRM de Dolibarr. Dans cette vidéo, nous allons voir comment utiliser le module de propositions commerciales sur Dolibarr.
|-
|'''3'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|'''Prérequis'''
|-
|4
|Activate the module "Proposals" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You can also enable the "Vendor Commercial Proposals" module if you are going to deal with proposals for vendors.
|Activez le module "Propositions" à partir du menu Accueil - Configuration - Modules. Vous pouvez également activer le module "Propositions commerciales des fournisseurs" si vous allez traiter des propositions de fournisseurs.
|-
|5
|Grant permission on the Proposals module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Donnez des autorisations à vos utilisateurs sur le module "Propositions". Pour des informations plus détaillées sur la manière de configurer les autorisations pour les utilisateurs, vous pouvez regarder notre vidéo "Utilisateurs, groupes et autorisations".
|-
|'''6'''
|'''Creating a Commercial Proposal'''
|'''Créer une proposition commerciale'''
|-
|7
|Let's create a new commercial proposal. Choose the customer you are creating the proposal for.
|Créons une nouvelle proposition commerciale. Choisissez le client pour lequel vous créez la proposition.
|-
|8
|Choose the validity in number of days. Choose the payment terms, payment type and source. All the values of these combo lists can customized from the setup of the module.
|Choisissez la validité en nombre de jours. Choisissez les conditions de paiement, le type de paiement et la source. Toutes les valeurs de ces listes combinées peuvent être personnalisées à partir de la configuration du module.
|-
|9
|Set the availability delay, shipping method and delivery date.
|Définissez le délai de disponibilité, le mode d'expédition et la date de livraison.
|-
|10
|If the module Project is enabled, you can also select a project. Choose the currency.
|Si le module Projet est activé, vous pouvez également sélectionner un projet. Choisissez la devise.
|-
|11
|Provide any notes that will be visible in the proposal, as well as any private notes that will by visible only to you.
|Indiquez toutes les notes qui seront visibles dans la proposition, ainsi que toutes les notes privées qui ne seront visibles que pour vous.
|-
|12
|Once created, the proposal is in the draft status. You can now start adding the actual product and pricing information to it.
|Une fois créée, la proposition est à l'état de projet. Vous pouvez maintenant commencer à y ajouter le produit réel et les informations de prix.
|-
|13
|Add the product or service name along with a description. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount.
|Ajoutez le nom du produit ou du service ainsi qu'une description. Choisissez une tranche de taxe si nécessaire. Saisissez le coût net, la quantité et toute remise applicable.
|-
|14
|You can add multiple items to the proposal.
|Vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs articles à la proposition.
|-
|15
|Use the Contacts or addresses tab if you want to assign particular contacts to the proposal. This information can be filled automatically with default contacts and can be used on the generated PDF or ODT document.
|Utilisez l'onglet Contacts ou adresses si vous souhaitez affecter des contacts particuliers à la proposition. Ces informations peuvent être remplies automatiquement avec les contacts par défaut et peuvent être utilisées sur le document PDF ou ODT généré.
|-
|16
|Use the linked files section to add any attachments to the proposal.
|Utilisez la section des fichiers liés pour ajouter des pièces jointes à la proposition.
|-
|'''17'''
|'''Validating and Sending the Proposal'''
|'''Validation et envoi de la proposition'''
|-
|18
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the proposal and move it to the "Open" status.
|Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur "Valider" pour finaliser la proposition et la faire passer au statut "Ouvert".
|-
|19
|Now, the proposal is ready to be sent to your customer or vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|La proposition est maintenant prête à être envoyée à votre client ou à votre fournisseur. Un modèle par défaut est utilisé pour le fichier PDF généré.
|-
|20
|Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the proposal are automatically included.
|Cliquez sur le bouton "Envoyer un courriel". Vous pouvez maintenant remplir les détails du destinataire. Tous les autres détails de la proposition sont automatiquement inclus.
|-
|21
|Based on the response received from your customer or vendor, you can set the proposal to the "Accepted" or "Refused" status.
|En fonction de la réponse reçue de votre client ou fournisseur, vous pouvez mettre la proposition en statut "Accepté" ou "Refusé".
|-
|'''22'''
|'''Commercial Proposal - Module Features'''
|'''Proposition commerciale - Caractéristiques du module'''
|-
|23
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar proposal with all the details pre-filled, for example, to create another version of the proposal.
|Utilisez le bouton "Cloner" pour créer une proposition similaire avec tous les détails pré-remplis, par exemple, pour créer une autre version de la proposition.
|-
|24
|Depending on your workflow, you can convert your proposal into an order or directly into an invoice.
|En fonction de votre flux de travail, vous pouvez convertir votre proposition en une commande ou directement en une facture.
|-
|25
|Statistics gives a birds-eye-view of all the commercial proposals sent to your customers and vendors. Use the filters available to get more detailed statistics.
|Le module "Statistiques" donne un aperçu de toutes les propositions commerciales envoyées à vos clients et fournisseurs. Utilisez les filtres disponibles pour obtenir des statistiques plus détaillées.
|-
|26
|With the list views, you can view proposals based on their status such as Draft, Open, Accepted or Signed (which needs billing), Rejected or Not signed, and Billed.
|Grâce aux listes, vous pouvez visualiser les propositions en fonction de leur statut, par exemple : Brouillon, Ouvert, Accepté ou Signé (qui doit être facturé), Rejeté ou Non signé, et Facturé.
|-
|27
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to describe your proposals and you will be able to export your database of proposals.
|De nombreuses autres fonctionnalités peuvent être activées à partir de la configuration. De plus, comme la plupart des modules Dolibarr, vous pouvez ajouter vos propres champs personnalisés pour décrire vos propositions et vous pourrez exporter votre base de données de propositions.
|-
|28
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Merci pour avoir regardé ce tutoriel vidéo. Visitez le site www.dolibarr.org pour en savoir plus.
|}
'''Translation in Spanish'''
 
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SNO'''
|'''English Text'''
|'''Translation'''
|-
|1
|Commercial Proposals and Quotes in Dolibarr
|Propuestas Comerciales y Presupuestos en Dolibarr
|-
|2
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Commercial Proposals module in Dolibarr.
|Bienvenido a este video tutorial sobre el sistema ERP y CRM Dolibarr. En este vídeo, veremos cómo utilizar el módulo de Propuestas Comerciales en Dolibarr.
|-
|'''3'''
|'''Prerequisites'''
|Requisitos previos
|-
|4
|Activate the module "Proposals" from menu Home - Setup - Modules. You can also enable the "Vendor Commercial Proposals" module if you are going to deal with proposals for vendors.
|Activa el módulo "Presupuestos" en el menú Inicio - Configuración - Módulos. También puedes activar el módulo "Presupuestos de Proveedores" si vas a gestionar presupuestos para proveedores.
|-
|5
|Grant permission on the Proposals module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Concede permiso en el módulo "Presupuestos " a tus usuarios. Para obtener información más avanzada sobre cómo configurar los permisos de los usuarios, puedes ver nuestro video "Usuarios, Grupos y Permisos".
|-
|'''6'''
|'''Creating a Commercial Proposal'''
|Creación de una Propuesta Comercial
|-
|7
|Let's create a new commercial proposal. Choose the customer you are creating the proposal for.
|Vamos a crear una nueva propuesta comercial. Elije el cliente para el que está creando el presupuesto.
|-
|8
|Choose the validity in number of days. Choose the payment terms, payment type and source. All the values of these combo lists can customized from the setup of the module.
|Elije la duración validez en número de días. Elije las condiciones de pago, el tipo de pago y el origen. Todos los valores de estas listas desplegables se pueden personalizar desde la configuración del módulo.
|-
|9
|Set the availability delay, shipping method and delivery date.
|Establezce el plazo de entrega, el método de envío y la fecha de entrega.
|-
|10
|If the module Project is enabled, you can also select a project. Choose the currency.
|Si el módulo Proyectos está habilitado, también puedes seleccionar un proyecto. Elije la moneda.
|-
|11
|Provide any notes that will be visible in the proposal, as well as any private notes that will by visible only to you.
|Introduce las notas que serán visibles en la propuesta, así como las notas privadas que sólo serán visibles para ti.
|-
|12
|Once created, the proposal is in the draft status. You can now start adding the actual product and pricing information to it.
|Una vez creada, la propuesta se encuentra en estado de borrador. Ahora puede empezar a agregarle la información real del producto y el precio.
|-
|13
|Add the product or service name along with a description. Choose a tax slab if relevant. Enter the net cost, quantity and any applicable discount.
|Añade el nombre del producto o servicio junto con una descripción. Elija una ficha de impuestos si es pertinente. Introduzce el coste neto, la cantidad y cualquier descuento aplicable.
|-
|14
|You can add multiple items to the proposal.
|Puedes agregar varios artículos a la propuesta.
|-
|15
|Use the Contacts or addresses tab if you want to assign particular contacts to the proposal. This information can be filled automatically with default contacts and can be used on the generated PDF or ODT document.
|Utiliza la pestaña Contactos o Direcciones si deseas asignar contactos concretos a la propuesta. Esta información se puede rellenar automáticamente con los contactos predeterminados y se puede utilizar en el documento PDF o ODT generado.
|-
|16
|Use the linked files section to add any attachments to the proposal.
|Utiliza la sección de archivos vinculados para agregar cualquier archivo adjunto a la propuesta.
|-
|'''17'''
|'''Validating and Sending the Proposal'''
|Validación y Envío de la Propuesta
|-
|18
|Once you are done, click on "Validate" to finalise the proposal and move it to the "Open" status.
|Una vez que hayas terminado, haz clic en "Validar" para finalizar la propuesta y pasarla al estado "Abierto".
|-
|19
|Now, the proposal is ready to be sent to your customer or vendor. A default template is used for the generated PDF file.
|Ahora, la propuesta está lista para ser enviada a su cliente o proveedor. Se utiliza una plantilla por defecto para el archivo PDF generado.
|-
|20
|Click on the "Send Email" button. You can now fill in the receiver details. All other details in the proposal are automatically included.
|Haga clic en el botón "Enviar correo electrónico". Ahora puede rellenar los datos del receptor. Todos los demás detalles de la propuesta se incluyen automáticamente.
|-
|21
|Based on the response received from your customer or vendor, you can set the proposal to the "Accepted" or "Refused" status.
|Basándose en la respuesta recibida de su cliente o proveedor, puede establecer la propuesta en estado "Aceptado" o " Rechazado".
|-
|'''22'''
|'''Commercial Proposal - Module Features'''
|Propuesta Comercial - Características del Módulo
|-
|23
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar proposal with all the details pre-filled, for example, to create another version of the proposal.
|Utiliza el botón "Clonar" para crear una propuesta similar con todos los detalles prellenados, por ejemplo, para crear otra versión de la propuesta.
|-
|24
|Depending on your workflow, you can convert your proposal into an order or directly into an invoice.
|Dependiendo de tu flujo de trabajo, puede convertir su propuesta en un pedido o directamente en una factura.
|-
|25
|Statistics gives a birds-eye-view of all the commercial proposals sent to your customers and vendors. Use the filters available to get more detailed statistics.
|Las estadísticas ofrecen una vista general de todas las propuestas comerciales enviadas a tus clientes y proveedores. Utiliza los filtros disponibles para obtener estadísticas más detalladas.
|-
|26
|With the list views, you can view proposals based on their status such as Draft, Open, Accepted or Signed (which needs billing), Rejected or Not signed, and Billed.
|Con las vistas de lista, puedes ver las propuestas en función de su estado como Borrador, Abierto, Aceptado o Firmado (que necesita ser facturado), Rechazado o No firmado, y Facturado.
|-
|27
|There are plenty of other features that can be enabled from the setup. Also, like most Dolibarr modules, you can add you own custom fields to describe your proposals and you will be able to export your database of proposals.
|Hay muchas otras características que se pueden activar desde la configuración. Además, como la mayoría de los módulos de Dolibarr, puedes añadir tus propios campos personalizados para describir sus propuestas y podrás exportar su base de datos de propuestas.
|-
|28
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|Gracias por ver este video tutorial. Visita www.dolibarr.org para obtener más información.
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - MRP (BOM and MO)

2020-07-07T08:04:12Z

Pradeepv: Added voice over about custom fields

'''Story board for Module Bills of Materials and Manufacturing Orders:'''

'''Video Title:''' Bills of Materials and Manufacturing Orders

{| class="wikitable"
|'''Voice Over'''
|'''Visuals in the Video'''
|-
|Welcome to this video tutorial about the Dolibarr ERP and CRM system. In this video, we will look at how to use the Bills of Materials and Manufacturing Orders modules in Dolibarr.
|Animate the video title with special effects. Below it, the Dolibarr logo appears along with the url www.dolibarr.org (Do NOT show the YouTube channel and Social media accounts like for exit sequence)
|-
|'''Prerequisites'''
|
|-
|Activate the module Bills of Materials and the module Manufacturing Orders from the menu Home - Setup - Modules.
|Go on menu Home - Setup - Modules, scroll to Bills of Materials module and show you can switch on/off the module. Enable also the module "Manufacturing Orders".
|-
|Grant permission on the Bills of Materials module and the Manufacturing Orders module for your users. For more advanced information on how to setup permissions to users, you can watch our video "Users, Groups and Permissions"
|Show the module permissions and enable the permissions.
|-
|'''Creating a Bill of Materials'''
|
|-
|A bill of material is the list of the raw materials, components, parts, and the quantities of goods needed to manufacture an end product
|Show the list view of BOMs.
|-
|Let's create a new Bill of Materials. Provide a label. Choose the actual end product that is to be created with this Bill of Materials.
|Demo BOM creation.
|-
|Choose the quantity and provide a description.
|Demo BOM creation.
|-
|Provide the estimated time duration to manufacture the chosen product.
|Demo BOM creation.
|-
|Choose the warehouse for production and click the button to continue.
|Demo BOM creation.
|-
|Now, you are ready to specify the raw materials belonging to this Bill of Materials. Type the name and choose from the pre-populated list of materials. Provide the quantity as well as other attributes and click on the "Add" button. You can add multiple raw materials one by one.
|Demo BOM creation.
|-
|Use the "Linked files" menu to add any file attachments to the Bill of Materials.
|Attach a file.
|-
|Once you are done, click on the "Validate" button.
|Click Validate.
|-
|The "Events" tab captures the complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the bill of materials, such as creation, update etc.
|Show the Events tab.
|-
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Bill of Materials without having to re-enter all the information.
|Demo the Clone button.
|-
|'''Creating a Manufacturing Order'''
|
|-
|Once the bill of materials has been created, the next step in the manufacturing process is the creation of a manufacturing order.
|Show the list view of MOs.
|-
|There are two ways to create a Manufacturing Order. You can do it from the "New" menu item under Manufacturing Orders.
|Click and show the "New Manufacturing Order" menu.
|-
|You can also use the "Create MO" button available in the Bill of Materials to create a Manufacturing Order for that Bill of Materials.
|Show the detailed view of a BOM. Click on the "Create MO" button.
|-
|The "Bill of Materials"-specific parameters are pre-filled. Provide a label. Choose a third party. Choose a project.
|Demo the MO creation.
|-
|Choose the planned start date and end date. Review the raw materials listed at the bottom, which will be consumed for this order. Click on the button to create the Manufacturing Order.
|Demo the MO creation.
|-
|Click the "Validate" button to approve the Manufacturing Order for production.
|Click the Validate button.
|-
|Use the "Clone" button to create a similar Bill of Materials without having to re-enter all the information.
|Click the Clone button.
|-
|The "Production" tab tracks consumption and production.
|Show the Production tab.
|-
|The "Stock movements" tab tracks the relevant stock movements.
|Show the Stock Movements tab.
|-
|Use the "Linked files" menu to add any file attachments to the Manufacturing Order.
|Attach a file.
|-
|The "Events" tab captures the complete list of all past and upcoming events related to the Manufacturing Order, such as creation, update etc.
|Show the Events tab.
|-
|There are also plenty of other features that can be enabled from the module setup such as templates and watermarks. Also, like most other Dolibarr modules, you can add your own custom fields to describe your Bills of Materials and Manufacturing Orders and define default values or mandatory fields. You can use the import or export modules to import or export your Bill of Materials and Manufacturing Orders database.
|Show the options.
|-
|Thank you for watching this video tutorial. Visit www.dolibarr.org to learn more.
|The Dolibarr logo appears at the center of the screen along with the url www.dolibarr.org. Show the YouTube channel and other social media accounts with icons at the bottom (facebook, twitter and github).
|}

Draft:Video Presentation (Dolibarr features) - Sale Orders

2020-07-05T22:49:32Z

Pradeepv: Language changes